Mastering the King's Indian Defence

Mastering the
King's Indian Defence

Robert Bellin and Pietro Ponzetto

B. T. Batsford Ltd, London

First published 1990
© Robert Bellin and Pietro Ponzetto 1990

ISBN 0 7134 5717 1

A CIP catalogue rec<;>rd for this book is available from the British Library

All rights reserved. No part of this book

may be reproduced, by any means, without the
prior permission of the publisher

Typeset by Lasertext Ltd, Thomas Street, Stretford, Manchester M32 OJT.

and printed in Great Britain by
Dotesios (Printers) Ltd, Trowbridge, Wilts
for the publishers,
B. T. Batsford Ltd,
4 Fitzhardinge Street,
London W1H OAH

A BATSFORD CHESS BOOK

Adviser: R. D. Keene GM, OBE
Technical Editor: Ian Kingston
Contents

Preface Vll

Introduction IX

1 The Mar del Plata Centre 1

2 The Petrosian Centre 28
3 The Samisch Centre 58
4 The Averbakh Centre 87
5 The Simplified Centre 118
6 Orthodox Centre 1 31
7 Samisch Variation: the Modern Centre 1 45
8 The Orthodox Centre against g2-g3 1 58
9 Yugoslav Cen:tre 1 72
10 The Panno and Kavalek Centres 185

Table of Variations 200

 Preface
With this work we have set our­
selves a very precise goal: to teach
the understanding of the opening
not by cataloguing variations but
by explaining the key ideas and
plans of each player quickly and
easily with the Read and Play
method and, in such a way, more­
over, that the reader can follow
the greater part of the text without
a chessboard.
To achieve this ambitious aim,
we have been guided by the princi­
ple that once the central pawns
have assumed a stable configur­
ation there exists a greater stra­
tegic and tactical affinity between
diverse variations with the same
central pawn structure than
between different lines of the same
variation which lead to different
pawn structures. This simple
approach enables us immediately
to understand the basic idea of
any position whatsoever. This is
in stark contrast to what happens
in normal books of opening the­
ory, where the exigencies of sys­
tematization end up making the
process of understanding very
difficult.
Having established this starting
point the continuation is logical:
we divide the opening not accord­
ing to variations but according to
'type of centre' (which normally
retains the name of the principal
variation) so that different lines of
the same variation will be exam­
ined in one or other type of centre
according to the configuration of
the central pawns which sooner or
later becomes established. Con­
sideration of each type of centre is
then divided into three parts: a
deep analysis of the strategic ideas
(with particular attention to the
most modern), and overview of
the recurring tactical themes, and
finally some illustrative games,
meticulously annotated, especially
in the opening, in examining which
(and here it is necessary to use a
chessboard) the reader will find
not only a practical correspon­
dence with the two theoretical
parts, but also a certain number of
exemplifying variations. Attentive
reading of the illustrative games is
indispensable for the full compre-
Preface
hension of the strategic concepts
previously expounded.
Of course, it has not been poss­
ible to consider all the types of
centre which can arise from all the
opening variations. The central
structures considered are the most
important and the most common,
and comprise at least 85 per cent
of possible cases. For those possi­
bilities not considered (which all
derive from minor byways) the
reader can refer to traditional
monographs.
In the elaboration of our subject
we have tried to maintain as objec­
tive a viewpoint as possible
without taking one side or the
other. We hope thereby to have
obtained an impartial exposition
of the ideas of each type of centre,
the knowledge of which is indis­
pensable whether one intends to
play the white side or the black
side.
This oeuvre can be used by a
wide range of players: it can be
used by beginners in order to learn
the fundamentals of the opening,
or by experts needing to expand
their range of variations quickly
or even to acquire an entirely new
addition to their opening reper­
toire. Of course, strong players,
for whom a more profound know­
ledge of the variations and latest
wrinkles is essential, must use this
work in conjunction with a syste­
matic text.
We hope that readers will find
our exposition clear, that they
learn, that they enjoy themselves,
and that they quickly improve
their playing standard: only then
will our Read and Play method
have hit the mark.
Introduction

The King's Indian Defence is a

system of playing against the basic
Queen's Pawn Opening (1 d4 fol­
lowed by c2 -c4) characterized by
the moves . . . tZJf6 . . . . g6, . . . i..g 7
and . . . d6. Black's strategy aimost
always features kingside castling
and either . . . e5 or . . . c5. In
the most general sense, White's
response can be classified accord­
ing to whether the KB is developed
on its original f1 -a6 diagonal or goes to e7. Both sides almost
is fianchettoed. always castle kingside.
Given that we have not divided
the material into variations, as is Chapter 2
usually the case, but have intro­ Petrosian centre : White's KN IS
duced the concept of 'type of cen­
tre', it will be useful to provide the 11

reader with a summary of the

contents of the ten chapters in this
book.
The first three chapters examine
the various closed centres which
can arise when Black plays . . . e5.

Chapter I
Mar del Plata centre: White's KN developed on f3. the centre closed,
is developed on f3 and the centre and Black's QN placed on either
closed after . . . t2lc6; B lack's QN d7 or a6. Both players often castle
Introduction

short, but White retains more The fifth and sixth chapters
flexibility than in Chapter 1 . examine central pawn exchanges
after Black plays . . . e5.
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
Samisch centre : White's KN is not
Simplified centre : the d-file IS
developed on f3 (in order not to
opened by dxe5 dxe5.
obstruct the f-pawn). The centre is
clo sed; White retains maximum
flexibility regarding castling. V

III

Chapter 6

The fourth chapter deals with Orthodox centre: Black plays . . .

the closed centre which anses exd4.
when Black plays . . . c5.
VI
Chapter 4
Averbakh centre: Black plays . . .
c5 and the centre is closed.

IV

The seventh chapter gives

Black's options against the
Samisch not covered in Chapter
3.
 Introduction

Chapter 7 IX

Modern cen tre versus Samisch

Variation: Black i nitiates q ueen­
side action before declaring his
intentions in the centre.

Chapter 10

Panno centre : Black pursues

queenside action; central flexibility
reserved.

The last th ree ch apters deal with X

centres where White plays g2-g3.

Chapter 8

Orthodox centre against g2-g3:

Black plays . . . e5 followed by . . .
exd4.

VI

XI

Chapter 9
Yugoslav centre : Black plays
c5 and the centre is closed . Kavalek centre: the c-file becomes
Introduction
open after d4-d5; the centre Is
fixed.
Which variation should
I play?
To help you decide which vari­
ation is most appropriate for your
style we have compiled a table of
variations (see page 200) which
indicates their level of strategic
and tactical complexity. In
addition, we have used a survey
of nearly 2000 games played in
tournaments of FIDE category 7
and above to extract statistical
data concerning the frequency and
results percentage of each vari­
ation so as to provide a useful
overview of their level of risk. Thus
you are given all the information
necessary to make the most suit­
able selection according to your
needs.
1 The Mar del Plata
Centre

Main Line: Mar del Plata Vari­ 7 0-0 t'Llc6 8 ..te3 l'Llg4 9 ..tg5
ation f6 10 ..tcl ..t>h8 11 d5 l'Lle7.
1 d4 lLlf6 2 c4 g6 3 l'Llc3 .i..g7 4
e4 d6 5 l'Llf3 0-0 6 .i.e2 e5 7 0-0
lZJc6 8 d5 l'Lle7 (1).
1 Strategic Ideas
The main strategic ideas can be
deduced from the pawn structure
and the position of the kings (2).
2

A similar structure can arise

from other lines, e.g. 1 d4 t'Llf6 2
c4 g6 3 t'Llc3 .i.g7 4 e4 d6 5 l'Llf3
0-0 6 .i.e2 e5 and now:
Gligoric System
7 .i.e3 l'Llg4 (or 7 ... l'Llc6 8 d5
l'Lle7) 8 .i.g5 f6 9 ..th4 l'Llc6
10 d5 l'Lle7.
(1) Closed centre with same side
castling
(2) White's space advantage on
the queenside
(3) The central pawn chains
(4) White's weakness on the d4
and f4 squares
The Mar del Plata Centre

Closed centre with same increase W hite's defensive space,

side cast I i ng and prefers instead to cramp the
opponent's king by . . . f5-f4, rely­
With the centre closed and t he
ing on the g-pawn to effect a
kings castled on the same side it
breakthrough later on.
is clear that the game can easily
develop into one of respective
flank attack s, W hite exploiting his
spatial advantage on the queen­ The manoeuvre ti:Jf3--e 1-d 3

side and Black his natural . . . f7-
f5 break on the other (3).
3
The mutual mobilization of
flank pawns is also indicated by
the position of the ti:Je7 and the
ti:Jf3. Black's QN is, in fact, ideally
Having a spatial advantage on the
queen's wing, it is clear that White
will try to organize an attack in
that sector. Black's pawn structure
is very solid, however, and in order
to make progress it is necessary to
open lines and create weaknesses.
Both these goals can be achieved
by attacking the c7-d6-e5 pawn
chain with the advance c4-c5, and
the manoeuvre best suited for its
preparation is the simultaneously
offensive and defensive ti:Jf3-e1-
d3 (4).
4

placed to support the advance . . .

f7-f5 and then join in the attack
via g6 or g8. White, on the other
hand, normally chooses to s upport
the e4 point by f2-f3 in response
to Black's attack, and therefore it
is natural to transfer the knight to
the queenside by tt:Jf3 -c l -d 3 or
ti:Jf3--d2-c4.
In posttwns with mutual Sometimes, White chooses to
attacks, Black will generally avoid increase control of c5 by linking
exchanging pawns on e4 after the this manoeuvre with the develop­
sequence . . . f5, f3 as this would ment of the QB on e3, intending

2

to withdraw the bishop to f2 in
case of 0 0 0 f5-f40
The manoeuvre .. . ll.:lf6--d7-
f6
On his side, Black must free the
path of his f-pawn and thus it is
natural to move the knight to d7
in order to hold up the c5 advance
at the same time (5)0
However, should White show
himself reluctant to weaken his
king's position and create a break­
through point on the kingside by
playing f3, then the ll.:ld7 must
return to f6 in order to force the
defence of e4 by f2-f30 It is also
important for Black to force f2-f3
in order to be able to play 0 0 0 f5-
f4 in the conditions shown in the
above diagram without allowing
White to get rid of his bad bishop
by ..te2-g40
Black has an alternative to
returning with the knight to f6
The Mar del Plata Centre
in the capture 0 0 0 f5xe4 with the
intention, as we shall see later, to
use f5 for his pieces and occupy
d40
It will be remembered that after
the moves 0 0 ll.:lf6, f3 Black
0
obtains nothing from the exchange
0 0 f5xe4 and instead claims his
0
own space advantage on the king­
side with 0 0 0 f5-f4 entrusting his
chances to the advance of the g­
pawno
The opening of the c-file
and the weakness of the
pawn on d 6
The main a i m of the advance c4-
c5 is to follow up with the
exchange c5xd6 so that after the
recapture 0 0 0 c7xd6 White obtains
the c-file and weakens the pawn
on d6 as a basis for his queenside
play (6)0
The pressure along the c-file
can be reinforced by doubling the
3
The Mar del Plata Centre

heavy pieces, and that against the

d6 pawn by .tb4 and/or 'it'b3-
a3. Two other ideas are the disrup­
tive sally ti'Jc7-e6 (generally
linked with 'it'b3 after which
White does not fear . . . .i.xe6
because the opening of the d-file,
weakening of the light squares in
the enemy camp and enhanced
dynamism of the a2-g8 diagonal
would all work in his favour), and
winning the a-pawn after 'ifc2
by means of the deflection ti'Jxa 7
White has occupied b6 he will
since . . . l:.xa7 would leave the
have total control of the c-file.
bishop on c8 insufficiently protec­
This paralysing manoeuvre can
ted. Black may either choose to
sometimes be effectively halted
abandon the a-pawn to its fate,
half-way if Black succeeds in
contenting himself with . . . .i.c8-
organizing the advance . . . b7-b5
d7 after ti'Jxa7 in the hope that
before White can fix b6 with a4-
the time lost by White will help
a5 (8).
his attack, or simply prevent the
capture by playing . . . a6.
8

The advance a2-a4

It is just for this last reason above

that White plays a2-a4 (see Diag­
ram 6), securing the position of
the tiJ b5 in order to be able to
meet . . . a7-a6 with the manoeuvre
tiJ b5--a3--c4 looking to fix the
weakness on b6 by a subsequent
a4-a5 (7). In such types of position White's
Although Black can attempt to attack may be slowed up
resolve the development of his sufficiently to allow Black to shift
queenside by the manoeuvre . . . the emphasis of the struggle to the
.tc8-d7-b5, it is clear that once opposite flank.

4

The defensive manoeuvre
. .. tZ:lf6--e8, .. . .:t f8--f7,
..tg7-f8
Clearly, though, Black cannot
afford to be solely preoccupied
with the a-pawn and/or b6 square
given that White's two main objec­
tives are pressure on d6 and pen­
etration on c7. To protect these
two weak points Black normally
retreats the tZ:lf6 to e8, bringing
the rook to f7 and completing the
defence of the d6 pawn by . . .tf8 (9).
.
In this manner the points c7
and d6 are defended three times
and the square g7 is simul­
taneously made available to the
KR, from where it is ideally placed
to support the advance of the g­
pawn.
The . . . g 4 breakthrough
Black's hopes on the kingside are
closely bound up with the
breakthrough . . . g4: the opening
of the g-file ( . . . g4xf3) will evidently
The Mar del Plata Centre
seriously endanger the safety of
the white king. Thus it is logical
that White will try to control g4
as much as possible with moves
such as h2-h3 and tZ:ld3-f2. Nat­
urally, given the key importance of
the kingside breakthrough, Black,
for his part, will not hesitate to
enlist the h-pawn for support (10).
10
Here, Black does not yet have
sufficient control to effect the
advance . . . g5-g4, and therefore
if he cannot play . . . tZ:le8-f6 he
sometimes has recourse to the
manoeuvre tZ:le7-g8-h6.
Normally, however, the tZ:le7 will
be transferred to h4 via g6 and the
breakthrough with . . . g4 played
anyway, even at the cost of a pawn,
especially since the opening of the
d8-h4 diagonal will enable the
queen to join in the attack. One
defensive method White may use
to help prevent . . . g5-g4 is to
withdraw the queen to d l .
I t will be readily understood
that if W hite has played .i.e3-f2
5
The Mar del Plata Centre

he will have more difficulty in 12

preventing the . . . g4 advance (11).

11

would have two pieces en prise.

Sometimes this clearance of the
third rank can be exploited by a
In this type of position Black
rook which has previously been
quite often achieves a decisive
stationed at c3 or a3.
opening up of lines of attack by
Another method of defending
means of the pawn sacrifice . . . g4-
the g-pawn from the attack shown
g3.
in the last diagram is with the
prophylactic llc2 (which is also
Defence by the major useful for doubling rooks on the
p ieces along the second c-file) coupled with the clearance
and third ranks of the second rank by .i.d2-e l
(13).
Given the battle centred around
control of g4 (see Diagram 10) it 13
follows that when Black plays . . .
g5-g4 a series of exchanges could
occur which would free White's
third rank. In such circumstances
White quite frequently attempts to
profit from this factor by rapidly
transferring a major piece to the
h-file, especially seeing as Black's
king is usually placed on h8 (12).
In playing 'ilfh3 White aims to By �d2-e 1 White not only
turn the tables on the kingside; defends g2 but also makes it poss­
note that Black cannot reply with ible to eliminate the dangerous
ll xg2+ because after � h1 he knight on h4.

6

Occasionally these two defens­
ive ideas can be com bined, in
which case it is by no means
impossi ble for White to achieve
his aim of turning the tables on
the kingside.
The weakness of the d4
square
In the situation illustrated in Diag­
ram 5 Black may, in place of
forcing f3 by . . . tLld7-f6, opt for
a more simplified type of game
by playing . . . f5xe4. This would
create the following pawn struc­
ture after the recapture tLlc3xe4
( 14).
14
This structure can also arise
after . . . f7-f5 when White chooses
to capture on f5 and Black decides
to recapture with a piece. How­
ever, it is clearly in White's interest
to wait, as whoever makes the
exchange of pawns loses a tempo
and helps the centralization of the
enemy pieces.
The Mar del Plata Centre
After the exchange . . . f5xe4 the
struggle essentially revolves
around the squares d4 and e4:
Black has opened up a route to
the weak d4 square (for example
by . . . tLle7-f5-d4) whilst White
has use of the strong base e4 and
can keep a degree of control over
d4 by the manoeuvre J.c l -d2-c3
(15 ).
15
Black can bring about some
simplification by . .. tLlh4, ttJxf6+
"ilt'xf6, J.e4 .i.f5, "it'e2 J.xe4,
"it'xe4 and may also offer the
exchange of queens with . . . -..f5.
However, in the ending White
maintains a slight but enduring
advantage due to the possession
of the e4 square, the strong centra­
lized position of the tLld3, and the
possibility of launching a pawn
assault on the queenside against
Black's rather rigid structure. In
addition, seeing as White's king's
position is not at all weakened, it is
difficult for Black to drum up any
meaningful play on the kingside.
7
The Mar del Plata Centre
Recently, after the thematic
advances . . . f5-f4 and c4-c5,
Black has tried opening up an
alternative route to d4 by attack­
ing the d5 pawn by . . . c7-c6 ( 16).
16
The inadequate protection of d5
obliges White to make the double
exchange c5xd6 and d5xc6 which
allows Black, after . . . t'iJe7 xc6, to
look forward to occupying the
square d4 (17).
17
Such a strategy, however, has
its defects, given that the ripping
open of the centre does not fit in
with the attacking thrust . . . f5-
8
f4 and the black queen becomes
exposed.
The attack against the pawn
chain c4-d 5
Another idea which Black can pur­
sue is the dismantling of the pawn
chain c4-d5 by means of the dual
thrust . . . c7-c6 and . . . b7-b5 (18).
18
This idea finds its justification
in the undefended position of the
pawn on c4 : Black will reply to
d5xc6 with . . . b5xc4, and answer
c4xb5 by . . . c6xd5, utilizing the
strength of his knights to destroy
the enemy centre. To implement
this kind of counterattack it is
nearly always necessary to play a
prophylactic . . . '1ttg 8-h8 in order
to avoid problems along the a2-
g8 diagonal.
Generally, in this type of pos­
ition, White fights for possession
of d5 either with t'iJd3-b4 or
d5xc6 b5xc4, t'iJd3-f2 followed by

..te2xc4 ( 19).
19
When White obtains control of
d5 his position is clearly preferable
in view of the backward pawn
on d6 and the queenside pawn
majority.
The ad vance b2-b4
If we return to reflect on the pos­
ition shown in Diagram 1 , it is
clear that as an alternative to
the manoeuvre l2Jf3-e l -d3 White
can also prepare the c5 advance
by playing b2-b4. The basic aim
of this idea is to earmark the
square c4 for the KN ( l2Jf3-d2-
c4) and post the QB on a3 (after
the move a2-a4) in order to exert
concerted pressure against the d6
pawn (20).
If Black proceeds with his usual
strategy, White does not intend to
make the exchange c5xd6 but will
increase the pressure on d6 by
playing b4-b5 with the further
idea of breaking down Black's
The Mar del Plata Centre
20
queenside structure by means of a
subsequent a4-a5 and/or b5-b6.
The weakness of the f4
square
Referring back to the position in
Diagram 1 we observe that White
can either advance with b2-b4
immediately or first transfer the
knight to d2 before proceeding
with b2-b4. An anticipatory
retreat of the KN (either to d2 or
e l ) uncovers the action of the
queen and bishop on the d l -h5
diagonal thus preventing Black
from exploiting the weakness of f4
with a rapid . . . l2Jf6-h5-f4. This
manoeuvre can be carried out if
White decides to play b2-b4
immediately (21).
Here White must choose
between protecting f4 with g2-g3
at the cost of weakening his castled
position and continuing his queen­
side action by c4-c5 with the
intention, after . . . l2Jh5-f4, of
9
The Mar del Plata Centre
21
eliminating the troublesome
knight by ..tc 1 xf4.
In the first case, after Black's
typical reaction of .. . n-f5, White
can continue with b2-b4 and the
consequent transfer l2lf3-d2-c4.
However, the weakening of Whi­
te's kingside means that Black 's
kingside counterattack comes
more quickly, especially with the
natural arrival of Black's QB on
h3 (22).
22
Black can increase the pressure
on the f-file by . . . h7-h5 followed
by . . . l2lf6-g4 and leave the other
knight to take care of the defence
of d6 ( . . . l2le7 -c8).
10
Alternatively, White can
attempt to exploit the weakness
on e6 created by the advance .. .
n-f5 with the manoeuvre l2lf3-
g5 (-e6) (23).
In this type of position the
incursion into e6 often implies
the sacrifice of a pawn after . . .
i..c 8xe6, d5xe6, but White can
find both strategic, and above all
tactical, compensation in the
general white square debility in
the enemy camp, for example by
exploiting the obvious possibility
of occupying the d5 square or
utilizing the open d-file to exert
strong pressure on c7 and d6 after
c4-c5 and l2lc3-b5.
When White decides against
weakening his king's position by
g2-g3 i n favour of continuing his
queenside action with c4-c5, and
consequently also plays .tc l xf4
after l2lh5-f4, the following stra­
tegical outline arises (24).
After the recapture . . . e5xf4
Black has managed to free the bad

24
bishop, and in addition to the
normal pawn attack on the king's
wing ( . . . h7-h6, followed by . . .
g6-g5-g4) he has also exposed the
e-pawn to attack along the half­
open e-file. The ti'Je7 needs to be
posted on g6 so as to prevent the
suffocating advance e4-e5. For his
part, White will pursue his usual
pressure along the c-file and
against d6 ( ti'Jc3 --b5) and also use
the newly acquired base at d4, the
occupation of which may also be
used to transfer a knight to f5 in
the event of Black playing . . . g6-
g5.
The bad bishop
One of the problems which fre­
quently obliges Black to play shar­
ply and uncompromisingly is the
fact that he cannot lightly enter
an ending on account of his bad
bishop. The exchange of the bad
bishop thus represents a strategic
element which can be realized in
The Mar del Plata Centre
various ways, according to how
White plays.
When White goes ti'Jf3-d2, with
the idea of continuing with b2-b4,
c4-c5 and ti'Jd2-c4, Black can get
rid of the bad bishop by . . . �g7-
h6 (25).
25
Black invariably aims to
exchange his bad bishop for its
good counterpart so as not to give
White the opportunity, after the
exchange . . . �h6xd2, �c 1 xd2,
of exploiting the weakness of the
dark squares by opening up the
position with the advance f2-f4.
When White effects the
manoeuvre ti'Jf3-e 1 -d3, the elim­
ination of the bad bishop requires
more complicated manoeuvres
(26).
Before blocking the position
with . . . f5-f4, Black can play the
preparatory . . . �g8-h8 which,
in addition to aiding a possible
attack on the pawn chain c4-d5
(see p. 8), can also contain the
idea of getting rid of the bad
11
The Mar del Plata Centre
26
bishop with . . . tL:Je7-g8 followed
by ..tg7-h6.
Finally, another method con­
sists of playing the anticipatory
thematic move . . l:.f8-f7 to free
.
the square f8 for the queen (27).
27
This is another way, albeit rare,
for Black to carry out the exchange
of his bad bishop.
The prophylactic ad vance .. .
c7-c5
Given that White's attack is based
almost without exception on
the advance c4-c5, Black can
effect a prophylactic strategy by
12
playing . . . c7-c5 himself (28).
28
Generally speaking, this plan
is more usually employed when
White plays tL:Jf3-d2, as it has the
effect of depriving the knight of
the important c4 outpost, but
occasionally Black also employs
this prophylactic idea when White
plays the normal manoeuvre
tL:Jf3-e l -d3.
Once Black has carried out the
advance . . . c7-c5, White m ust
choose whether to take en passant
or to stick with the opening up of
the queenside by .tt. a l -b l fol­
lowed by b2-b4. In the first case,
the strategic structure of the pos­
ition changes considerably after
d5xc6 b7xc6 (29).
Having weakened his control
of the centre, White will try to
develop the queenside and exploit
his pawn majority in that sector
with a quick b2-b4-b5, whereas
Black will try to obtain counter­
play in the centre by means of the
thrust . . . d6-d5.
 The Mar del Plata Centre

29
captures the b-pawn by . . . c5xb4
he will soon find himself exposed
to the same attack as he will have
to play . . . b7-b6 in order to keep
c5 under control.
After the opening of the b-file,
while Black is carrying on with
his typical kingside counterplay,
White will be looking to occupy
the square c6 by the manoeuvre
tLld2-b3-a5-c6 and to penetrate
In the second case, on the other
enemy territory by means of doub­
hand, W hite's queenside action
ling the rooks on the open file.
will be based on the opening of
the b-file (30).
The prophylacti c advance
30
g 2-g4

White in his turn can take prophy­

lactic measures against Black's
kingside action. The motivating
force for these measures is that
after the advance . . . f5-f4 White's
kingside suffers from a chronic
lack of defensive space. Thus in
order to make the defence easier
After l:t b 1 and b4 (prepared by White will play g2-g4 before
a2-a3 in case of Black countering Black plays the restrictive . . . f5-
with . . . a7-a5) Black's best strat­ f4, supporting it by f2-f3 (31).
egy is to play . . . b7-b6 in order 31
to be able to recapture on c5 with
the b-pawn. The recapture with
the d-pawn would give \\'hite a
protected passed pawn and leave
Black open to a flank attack after
. . . b7-b6 (sooner or later Black is
obliged to play this move in order
to defend the pawn on c5) by a2-
a4-a5. Similarly, even if Black

13
The Mar del Plata Centre

By applying this strategy White 32

obtains sufficient defensive space
on the kingside: if Black decides
to block the position immediately
with . . . f5-f4 (hoping to continue
with . . . g6-g5 and subsequently
prepare the breakthrough . . . h 7-
h5) White can in fact prevent the
opening of any lines by playing
h2-h4. In this case the h4 pawn
can be protected either by lZJe1-
g2 or �g l-g2 followed by l:.fl­
2 Tactical ideas
h 1. Should Black decide to make
the capture . . . f5xg4, then after The presence of a closed centre,
f3xg4 it is clear that White's king­ generally characteristic of the lines
side is not restricted in the slight­ we have examined, militates
est. against recurring tactical ideas at
This prophylactic strategy also least during the opening phase. Of
contains another idea, that should course, in the middle game, when
Black try to get rid of his bad the mutual attacks have reached
bishop as we saw in Diagram 26, their height and the respective
White would continue the advance defences have consequently
of the g-pawn by g4-g5 thus pre­ become somewhat stretched, the
venting the exchange. game can become rich in tactical
Normally, in the type of pos­ ideas which, however, are too
ition shown in Diagram 31, Black, diverse to catalogue. Nor are there
having been somewhat thwarted many thematic, recurring tactical
in his kingside attacking aspir­ ideas to be found in the lines where
ations, redirects his attack to the White weakens his king's position
pawn chain c4-d5, as we saw with the advance g2-g3.
in Diagram 1 8. However, White,
thanks to the move lLld 3-b4, has
Winning the a-pawn and
real chances of obtaining control
the counter ... .:t c7
of d5 (32).
A position in which White is In one of the better known theor­
more concerned to contain the etical variations the following pos­
opponent's play on both flanks ition arises after nineteen moves
rather than initiate his own plans. (33).
14
 The Mar del Plata Centre

33 The knig ht sacrifice for

two pawns
w

The efficacy of the . . . 1:. c7 counter

comes seriously into question if
White is able to capture on a7
after having played the advance
b2-b4 (35).

35

Here White can exploit the

pressure exerted against the . .tc8
by playing CiJxa7 although Black
has the counter . . . l:.c7 available
(it should be noted that Black can
also ignore the loss of the pawn
and simply reply with . . . . .td7) White plays CiJxa7 and after the
which forces a probably equalizing counter move . . . ll c7 he can reply
simplification: ..ta5 1:. xc2, ..txd8 with the sacrifice CiJc6 because
llxe2, CiJxc8 .l:rxa4 (34). after . . . bxc6, dxc6, he obtains
three connected passed pawns (36).

34 36

vv B

The advance b4 rules out any

Present-day understanding con­ danger of losing the c6 pawn and
siders this position approximately makes White's threats more
equal. immediate.

15
The Mar del Plata Centre
The d iscovered attack on
Black's KN and the pseudo­
fork g4
When White allows the opponent
to play . . . tt:Jh5 and protects the
f4 square by g2-g3 the following
position can arise (37).
37
w London 1980
Here White can play exf5 obliging
Black to recapture on f5 with a
piece (since after . . . gxf5 there is a
favourable discovered attack by
tt:Jxe5) although after . . . tt:Jxf5 he
must not fall into the trap of
playing a pseudo-fork: if g4? tt:J d4!
and Black's position is better in
case of either tt:J xd4 exd4, or gxh5
tt:J xe2 +, 'ifxe2 .tg4 (38) . . .
38
w
16
. . . because Black regain s the piece
with a very clear advantage.
3 Illustrative games
Game 1
Miles-Sax
Mar del Plata Variation
1 lt:'lf3 tt:Jf6
2 c4 g6
3 tt:Jc3 .tg7
4 e4
An inversion of moves designed
to a void the Gri.infeld defence.
4 d6
5 d4 0-0
6 .te2 e5
7 0-0
This is the point where White
declares his intentions regarding
the king and also permits the
development . . . ttJ b8-c6. The
principal alternatives are 7 d5
(Petrosian System; see Ch. 2) and 7
.te3 (Gligoric System). The latter,
when it does not revert to this
type of centre, brings about those
considered in Chapters 2, 5, or 6.
7 tt:Jc6
8 d5 tt:Je7
9 tt:Jel
The most commonly used con-

tinuation, with which White aims
to support the c5 advance by a
typical transfer of the knight to
d3. The alternatives are given in
the notes to both White's and
Black's ninth moves in the second
game.
9 lt:ld7
As well as freeing the path of
the f-pawn and controlling the
square c5, this move is also useful
for maintaining control of e5. This
becomes clear should Black, in
place of the usual manoeuvre ...
lt:lf6-d7, ... f7-f5 and ... lt:ld7-
f6-e8, try to save two tempi by
playing 9 . . . lt:le8, in which case
White would instantly change
plans and challenge the e5 point
with the thrust f2-f4, e.g. 1 0 lt:ld3
f5 1 1 f4 exf4 1 2 lt:lxf4 with some
advantage bearing in mind the
possibility of occupying the e6
square.
10 lt:ld3 f5
11 -'.d2
Note that White waits for the
opponent's knight to return to
f6 before playing f2-f3 so as to
facilitate the advance c4-c5. The
old continuation 1 1 exf5 has fallen
into disuse because the recapture
1 1 .. . lt:lxf5 helps Black to make
use of the sensitive d4 square.
11 lt:lf6
The Mar del Plata Centre
Black must not continue with
11 ... f4 before having forced f3 as
this would allow White to rid
himself of his bad bishop by play­
ing 1 2 -'.g4. Moreover,. in order
to be able to open up lines of
attack on the kingside Black needs
to create a breakthrough point in
White's pawn structure: from this
derives the need to force f3 in
order to be able to make progress
on the flank after . .. f5-f4 with
the thrust .. . g6-g5-g4. An alter­
native is found in the simplifying
move 1 1 . . . f5xe4 with the idea of
exploiting the weakness of the d4
square with a subsequent . ..
lt:le7-f5-d4 manoeuvre. But in
this case White gains two vital
tempi (.td2 and lt:lxe4) in com­
parison with the old line noted
above (11 exf5 lt:lxf5) which ensure
him a small but enduring advan­
tage, e.g. 11 ... fxe4 12 lt:lxe4 lt:lf5
1 3 -'.c3 lt:lf6 1 4 .tf3 lt:lh4 15
lt:lxf6+ 'it'xf6 1 6 -'.e4 .tf5 1 7
'it'e2 -'.xe4 1 8 'it'xe4 (see the
commentary to Diagram 1 5).
12 f3 (39)
At this point Black must choose
a plan. There are three basic possi­
bilities: (1) to continue the
counterattack on the kingside with
... f5-f4, as we will see in this
game; the classic and most popular
continuation; (2) to take prophy­
lactic steps on the queenside by
17
The Mar del Plata Centre
39
B
playing . . . c7--c5 either immedi­
ately or after . . . �g8-h8, e.g. 12
. . . c5 13 l:tb l f4 14 b4 b6, or 12
. . . �h8 13 l:tc l c5, as will be
seen in game 2; (3) to attack the
c4-d5 pawn chain (after . . . �g8-
h8) without closing the centre by
. . . f5-f4, e.g. 12 . . . �h 8 13 l:tc l
c6 14 b4 b5 (see the commentary
to Diagrams 18 and 19).
12 f4
13 c5 g5
This is Black's last chance to
opt out of 'the race to get there
first' by trying to open up a path
to d4 with 13 . . . c6, e.g. 14 cxd6
W'xd6 15 dxc6 tt:Jxc6 16 lU b5
jje7 17 tt:J b4 with complicated
play
14 J:tcl
In the present game this pos­
ition was reached by a transpos­
ition of moves: 10 ..td2 f5 11 l:tc1
tt:Jf6 12 f3 f4 13 tt:Jd3 g5 14
c5. Such transpositions are quite
18
frequent in this variation, but the
move order given is the most logi­
cal and most usual in practice. The
text move is White's most direct
method of commencing his the­
matic pressure on the c-file. An
alternative, although somewhat
more tortuous plan, is to bring the
KR to c l : 1 4 cxd6 cxd6 15 tt:Jf2
(to prevent . . . g5-g4) followed by
jjd1-c2 and J:tfl -c l .
14 tt:Jg6
Occasionally, when this pos­
ition has been reached with the
additional interpolation of the
moves . . . �g8-h8 and b2-b4,
Black can use this knight (via g8-
h6) coupled with the advance . . .
h7-h5 to support the
breakthrough . . . g5-g4. The text
move is equally useful for freeing
the seventh rank for the defensi­
ve/offensive manoeuvre . . . l:tf8-
f7, . . . .i.g7-f8 and . . . l:tf7-g7,
and sending the knight to h4 from
where, together with the l:tg7, it
will exert pressure on g2.
15 cxd6
So far, the sacrifice 15 tt:J b5 a6
16 cxd6 axb5 17 exc7 jjd7 18
jjb3 has only been mentioned in
analysis.
15 cxd6
16 tt:Jb5
Threatening tt:Jc7.
 The Mar del Plata Centre

16 .: ti ling g4 and covering the g1-a7

17 �c2 diagonal thus activating the threat
of tt:Jxa7.
White supports the knight on
This classic position has been
b5 by renewing the threat of tt:Jc7,
much analyzed. There are bas­
as otherwise it could be chased out
ically three ways for Black to meet
of the game by Black's queenside
the 'threat' of tt:Jxa7: (1) to let
pawns, e.g. 17 tt:Jf2 a6 18 tt:Ja3
White play tt:Jxa7, having confid­
b5. Note that with the text move
ence in the simplification following
White does not yet threaten
the counter . . . l:.c7, e.g. 19 .. .
tt:Jb5xa7 on account of . . . 'i!fd8-
jJ8 20 tt:Jxa7 .Uc7 21 ..ta5
b6+ .
.: xc2 22 ..txd8 l::t. xe2 23 tt:Jxc8
17 tt:Je8 .: xa4 24 tt:Jd3 g4 with a position
currently considered balanced; (2)
Black can also consider permit­
to sacrifice the pawn in order to
ting the penetration of the knight
gain time for the kingside attack,
into c7 and e6, e.g. 17 . . . g4 18
as we shall see in the present game;
tt:Jc7 gxf3 19 gxf3 ..th3 20 tt:Je6,
(3) to prevent the capture of the
but the solid text move is the most
a-pawn by playing . . . ..tc8-d7
popular nowadays.
hoping to break free on the queen-
18 a4 side by . . . a7-a6 and . . . b7-b5,
e.g. 19 ... ..td7 20 'i!fb3 ..tf8 21
Necessary in order to prevent
I: c2 a6 22 tt:Ja3 l::t. g7 23 h3 tt:Jh4
. . . a7-a6 and . . . b7-b5.
24 t[fc1 .l:t b8 25 tt:Jc4 g4 26 fxg4
18 h5 b5 with an extremely complicated
19 tt:Jf2 (40) position.

40 19 ..tf8
B Now it is White who stands at
the crossroads: to take on a7 or
not?
20 h3 llg7

These two thematic moves

merely postpone White's decision.

21 ti:Jxa7

With the double aim of control- Quite apart from the counter .. .

19
The Mar del Plata Centre
'D.c7, there is the danger associ­
ated with this continuation that it
will cost time to bring the knight
back into play. 21 a5 and 21 'ji'b3
have also been experimented with.
21 .td7
Deciding against the simpl­
ification with 21 . . . l:tc7. The
interpolation of h3 on the twenti­
eth move provides the as yet
untried possibility 21 . .. ..txh3!?
22 gxh3 'D.xa7.
22 ttJ b5 ttJ h4
23 'ji' b3
White prepares to defend along
the third rank.
23 � h8
Given that sooner or later Black
will need to bring the tt:Je8 into
play on f6 in order to support the
. . . g4 thrust, this sidestep is useful
in cutting out potential dangers
along the a2-g8 diagonal which
could follow from the knight
invasion ttJ b5-c7 -e6. If, e.g. 23
. . . tt:Jf6 24 tt:Jc7 g4 25 fxg4 hxg4
26 tt:Je6 ..txe6 27 dxe6 d5 28 hxg4
and White stands better. Later
games have experimented with 23
. . . g4 24 fxg4 hxg4 25 hxg4 tt:Jf6
with mixed results.
24 a5
Removing the a-pawn from
Black's line of fire after the
20
impending sequence tt:Jf6,
tt:Jc7.
24 g4!
A new move at the time, which
takes Miles by surprise. Black
effects the thematic breakthrough
at the cost of a temporary pawn
sacrifice.
25 fxg4 hxg4
26 hxg4
The subtle point hidden behind
Black's 23rd move becomes appar­
ent at this moment: on 26 tt:Jxg4
would come 26 . . . tt:Jf6! and now
the capture on f6 would be without
check, thus allowing the zwischen­
zug . . . 'D.xg2+ .
26 tt:Jf6
27 tt:Jc7
White continues logically. It
would be very dangerous to pro­
tect the g-pawn by 27 *h3?! as
Black would have the choice
between 27 . .. tt:Jh7 intending to
continue with ... tt:Jg5 and ...
l:th7, and 27 ... 'D.h7 followed by
tt:Jh5.
27 tt:Jxg4!
Utilizing a clever tactical idea
to remove the g-pawn and thus
open up the rook's action along
the file: 28 tt:Jxa8? tt:Je3 29 ..txe3
'D.xg2+ 30 �h1 *g5 with a
winning attack.

28 .i.xg4 ..txg4
29 tt:Jxg4
Not 29 tt:Jxa8? tt:Jf3+ winning.
29 .l:rxg4 (41)
41
l-t'
The critical position of the
game, which illustrates very
clearly the pros and cons of this
complicated and combative vari­
ation. Notwithstanding the multi­
ple exchanges on g4, Black's king­
side pressure remains very strong,
whilst his queenside hangs by a
thread, and the presence of the
bad bishop (quite apart from the
pawn less) prevents him from
entering almost any type of
ending.
30 l:tf2?
The decisive error. 30 ..te1! had
to be played, leading after 30 ...
f3! (but not 30 . . . l::r xg2+ 31
�h1 f3 32 l:txf3 tt:Jxf3 33 'ir'xf3
l:txb2 34 tt:Jxa8 'ir'xa8 35 'ir'h3+
The Mar del Plata Centre
�g8 36 .l::tc8 and White wins) 31
.l::txf3 (if 31 tt:Jxa8? .l::txg2+ 32
�hl �g5 33 .l::tc2 �f4 again
winning) 31 . . . �g5 to an
extremely complicated position.
30 'tli'g5
31 � h3
White is obliged to protect the
pawn, since 31 tt:Jxa8 would be
answered by 31 . . . .l::txg2+ 32
�f1 (if 32 �h1 .l::txf2 33 .l::tg1
tt:Jf3! and wins) 32 . . . .l::txf2+ 33
�xf2 jfg2+ 34 �e1 tt:Jf3+ etc.
31 .i::tg3
32 �h1
On 32 tt:Je6 comes 32 . . . �h5
33 �h1 ..th6 followed by
l::tag8.
32 .l::tc 8
33 ..te1
33 tt:Je6 still does not work
on account of 33 ... .l::txc1+ 34
..txcl �g4 35 tt:Jxf8 l:txg2+ ! 36
l'lxg2 'ir'd1+ 37 �h2 tt:Jf3+
and wins. The text move activates
the threat, e.g. 34 tt:Je6 .Uxcl 35
tt:Jxg5 .Uxe1+ 36 ttfl l:txg2+
37 'ilfxg2 tt:Jxg2 38 �xg2 etc.
33 �h6
34 a6
Again if 34 tt:Je6 li xcl 35
tt:Jxg5 li xe1+ 36 l:tf1 l:txfl +
(not 36 ... .ttxg2+ 37 'ir'xg2
tt:Jxg2 38 llxel tt:Jxel 39 tt:Jfl+
21
The Mar del Plata Centre

and White can create dangerous which would either oblige White
counterchances despite the piece to weaken the kingside by g2-g3
less) 37 'ittx fl �xg5 and Black or agree to the exchange .i.c 1 xf4
has a winning position. once the knight arrives on f4. For
example, 9 b4 ttJh5 10 c5 ttJf4 1 1
34 bxa6
..txf4 exf4 1 2 t1 c 1 h6, or 9 .i.d2
35 l:tc6 .Ug8
ltJh5 10 g3 f5 1 1 exf5 ttJxf5 1 2
The transfer of the Q R to the ttJe4 ttJf6. By contrast, i n playing
kingside rapidly decides matters. 9 ltJd2 White would prevent ...
ltJh5 whilst intending to open up
36 l:txd6 f3 the queenside with b2-b4 and c4-
37 l:txa6 l:txg2+
c5, reserving c4 for the ttJd2.
38 t:txg2 'ife3+!
Black's most direct method of
39 j_f2 l:txg2+
countering this plan lies in the
40 'ifxg2 fxg2
prophylactic advance . . . c7-c5,
0-1
e.g. 9 ttJd2 c5 10 tt b1 (or 10 dxc6
bxc6 1 1 b4 d5 1 2 b5) 1 0 . . . ttJe8
1 1 b4 b6 etc.
Game 2
Ftacnik-Nunn 9 ttJ d7 (42)
Vienna 1986
Mar del Plata Variation 42

1 ttJf3 ttJ f6 w
2 c4 g6
3 ttJc3 .i.g7
4 d4 0-0
5 e4 d6
6 .te2 e5
7 0-0 ttJ c6
8 d5 l1Je7
9 ttJ e1

This is the first important cross­ In this classic posttton White

roads for choice of variation as
White can also play 9 ttJd2, 9 b4
and 9 .td2. The main aim of
moving the knight is to prevent . . .
ttJf6-h5 looking to occupy f4,
essentially has two methods of
dealing with Black's intended
kingside attack: to enter into
opposite side attacks with mutual
pawn storms, or to take preventive

22
 The Mar del Plata Centre

measures on the kingside in order 10 tt:Jd3 f5

to freeze the opponent's attack. 11 .i.d2 ttJ f6
In the first case, the c5 advance 12 f3 �h8
can be prepared in two ways:
(1 ) playing .i.c1-e3 intending to This move constitutes the
answer the advance of the black modern alternative to the classical
f-pawn with f2-f3 and .i.e3-f2; continuation 12 ... f4 which we
further control of c5 can be examined in the previous game.
brought about by b2-b4 and Black can interpret the text move
tt:Je1-d3. Nowadays this line is in three different ways: (1) to
seen rather infrequently as after attack the c4-d5 pawn chain by
10 .i.e3 f5 11 f3 f4 1 2 .i.f2 g5 the means of ... c7-c6 and .. . b7-b5
position of the .tf2 is seen to be in which case the king move serve �
exposed during the middlegame to to avoid problems along the a2-
the breakthrough . .. g4-g3 lead­ g8 diagonal; (2) to get rid of the
ing to the dangerous opening up bad bishop by ... tt:Je7 -g8 and ...
of lines of attack against the white ig7-h6; (3) intending to play the
monarch, albeit possibly at the prophylactic .. . c7-c5 after having
cost of a pawn sacrifice. (2) Playing first lured the white rook to cl
� e1-d3, as we saw in the preced­ away from its natural post on bl .
mg game. 13 :et
With the other method, White
can implement his kingside pro­ Now if 13 c5, the counter with
phylaxis by playing 1 0 f3 f5 1 1 13 . .. c6 would be more effective
g4 and now Black can neither here than after 1 2 ... f4 in place of
continue his attack by 1 1 ... fxg4 12 ... �h8. The point is that
1 2 fxg4 when White has no prob- the king would already be tucked
lems, or 11 ... f4 (intending to away from the exposed a2-g8
continue with ... g5 and a later . .. diagonal and the annoying press­
h5 breakthrough) because of 12 ure exerted on e4 by Black's f­
h4 which prevents the opening of pawn would tie down the knight
lines on the kingside. Therefore on c3.
Black generally switches to queen­
13 c5
side play with an attack on the
c4-d5 pawn chain, e.g. 11 ... tt:Jf6 Opting for the third possibility
12 tt:Jd3 �h8 13 .i.e3 c6, with noted above. The alternatives are
the idea of continuing with . .. 13 . .. c6 14 b4 b5 and 13 . . . tt:Jeg8
b7-b5. 14 c5 (White can hardly go in for

23
The Mar del Plata Centre
1 4 g4 fxg4 1 5 fxg4 h6 1 6 h4 tLl xg4!
1 7 .i xg4 'iii'x h4 with a likely draw
by perpetual check) 14 .. . . .th6.
14 g4 (43)
43
B prepares a subtle transfer of the
Usually when Black plays .. .
c7-c5, White tends to open the b­
file by lla 1 -b 1 and b2-b4, but in
this specific position that would
cost a tempo given that l:tc 1 has
already been played. This helps to
explain the text move, which is
also directed against preventing
the exchange of the bad bishop.
Instead of the natural plans of
attack and counterattack, we now
see prophylaxis and counter-pro­
phylaxis leading to an extremely
subtle strategical duel.
14 tLleg8
Showing that he intends to con­
tinue with . . . t2Jf6-e8 and . . .
.i.g7-h6. It is useless to try to
force matters on the kingside, e.g.
14 . . . f4 1 5 h4!, or 14 ... h6 1 5 h4
24
fxg4 1 6 fxg4 g5 1 7 h 5! smothering
everything.
15 � g2!
White gets ready to protect the
h-pawn (when it is on h4) with
l:tfl -h 1 , and at the same time
heavy pieces to the kingside.
15 tLle8
Black continues with his plan,
not so m uch in the belief that he
will be able to effect the exchange
following .. . .i.g7-h6, but rather
to oblige the opponent to push
on with g4-g5 thus obtaining the
possibility of opening up the king­
side (.. . h7-h6). The violent alter­
native 1 5 . . . f4 1 6 h4 tL:Jxg4?!
would not give Black sufficient
compensation for the piece after
1 7 fxg4 'ii'x h4 1 8 .i.e 1 'ii'g 5 1 9
tL:Jf2 h 5 (if 1 9 . .. tLlh6 20 tL:Jh3
'ii'f6? 21 g5! .i.xh3 + 22 �xh3
'ii'x g5 23 .i.h4 a nd wins) 20 tLlh3
'ii'f6 2 1 gx h5 g5 22 tLlf2.
16 g5 f4
Excessive confidence in White's
inability to open up the kingside
could easily be shown to be mis­
placed after, e.g., 1 6 . . . l:tf7 1 7 h4
.i.f8 1 8 exf5 .i.xf5 19 f4 with
initiative.
17 h4 .:tfi
I f 1 7 . .. h6 1 8 .:th l .
 The Mar del Plata Centre

18 :J:h1 22 �e7
19 'ilfg1 23 ..ta4

M aximal utilization of the fif­ If 23 gxh6 �h7.

teenth move.
23 hxg5
19 ti:Jg7
Again with the benefit of hind­
Improving the placing of his sight Black would have done
pieces and heading for g3 before better to play 23 ... �h7, even
committing himself to ... h7-h6. though after, e.g., 24 b4 b6 25 ..tc6
llb8 26 llb l J.a6 27 b5 ..tb7
20 ..td1!
28 ..tc3 hxg5 29 hxg5 .i.xg5 30
The beginning of an incredibly .i.e8 1:. g7 31 Ci:Jxe5 dxe5 32
precise manoeuvre designed to i..x e5 White would have a strong
confound Black's plan of opening attack.
up the position. The clearest point 24 hxg5 ..txg5
is the freeing of e2 for the QN so 25 ..te8 !! ( 44)
as to prevent the occupation of g3.
Note that 20 ..tfl would not do 44
because White's king would then B
be forced to venture on to the
dangerous dark squares, e.g. 20 . . .
Ci:Jh5 21 Cf:Je2 ..te7 22 <itf2 h6
with a strong attack.

20 ti:Jh5
21 Cf:Je2 h6?!

With the benefit of hindsight

Black would have done better to The point of White's
abandon ideas of a kingside attack manoeuvre, evidently underesti­
in favour of solidifying his position mated by Black.
on the opposite flank, e.g. 21 . . .
25 .l:f.g7
i..g 7 22 ..ta4 Ci:Je7 2 3 b4 b6 with
an edge for White. Forced, because if 25 ... .:tc7 26
i..x g6 and the position collapses;
22 <itfl
equally if 25 . . . 'ilfxe8 26 'ilfxg5
The white monarch withdraws .l:f. h7 27 i..c 3 with the decisive
on the light squares. threat of ti:Jxe5.

25
The Mar del Plata Centre
26 �xg6 l:txg6
26 . .. �h4 fails after 27 �e1!
ttJg3+ 28 �xg3 l:txg6 29
l:txh4+ and wins. Note the
importance of the king escaping
on the white squares.
27 .U. xh5+ IJ;g7
If 27 . . . ttJh6 28 ttJexf4! exf4
29 �xf4 �xf4 30 'irxg6 and
wins.
28 �c3
The key move for activating all
White's pieces. From here until
the end Black must live with the
continual nightmare of sacrifices
on f4 and e5, as well as the possi­
bility of the l:tcl coming into play
via c2.
28 'ire7
If 28 ... �d7 29 �xe5 + ! dxe5
30 ttJxe5 with crushing conse­
quences, or if 28 ... �f6 29 'irh2
ttJh6 30 ttJexf4 exf4 31 ttJxf4
�xc3 32 ttJxg6 with a winning
position. Relatively best was pro­
bably 28 . .. �h6, even though
after 29 'irh1 ttJf6 30 l:.h2 it
would not be easy for Black to
prevent the idea of l:tc1-c2 fol­
lowed by ttJe2xf4 with a very
strong attack.
29 l:tc2
Preparing a decisive sacrifice
26
on f4.
29 .th6
Once again Black has no time
to bring his queenside pieces into
play, e.g. if 29 .. . .td7 30 ttJexf4!
�xf4 31 l:tg2 l:txg2 32 'irxg2+
IJ;f8 33 ttJxf4 exf4 34 l:th8 'irfl
35 'irg5 (with the threat of e4-e5)
35 .. . l:.e8 36 l:txg8+ 'irxg8 37
'irh6+ with mate next move.
30 'irh2 IJ;h7
Black tries to avoid the sacrifice
on f4, but . ..
31 ttJexf4! exf4
32 ttJ xf4
The sacrifice of a piece for two
pawns leads to a decisive opening
of lines: now all the white pieces
actively join in the attack.
32
Black's last hopes reside in an
attack on f3, and in particular in
the variation 33 ttJxg6 as after 33
... �g4 or 33 ... 'irxf3+ 34 l:tf2
'ird3+ ! 35 �gl 'ird1 + things
would have become more compli­
cated. A brilliant finish would fol­
low 32 . .. l:tg5: 33 l:.xh6+
ttJxh6 34 'irxh6+ ! and White
wins.
33 l:tf2 ! l:tf6
If 33 . . . .td7 34 ltlxg6 'irxg6
35 l:tg2 "iifl 36 l:tg7+ 11xg7
 The Mar del Plata Centre

37 J.xg7 'i;xg7 38 'ifxd6 with a 38 'i;el J.f5

decisive advantage.
'ifxf6 Desperation as there are no
34 J.xf6
35 l:tg2 'ifd4
more checks after 38 ... "ife3+
39 t2Je2 'ifd2+ 40 'i;fl 'ifdl +
After 35 ... .i.d7 36 l:tg6 'ifxg6 4 1 'i;f2.
37 t2Jxg6 'i;xg6 38 l:txh6+
t2Jxh6 39 'ifxd6+ White wins. 39 l:txf5 'ife3+
36 'ifg3 'ifdl + 40 l:te2
37 'i;f2 'ifd4+ 1-0

27
2 The Petrosian Centre
Main Line: Petrosian System
1 d4 tt:Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 tt:Jc3 Jt..g 7 4
e4 d6 5 tt:Jf3 0-0 6 Jt..e 2 e5 7 d5
(45)
45
B Other lines
A similar structure can arise
from other lines, e.g. 1 d4 tt:Jf6 2
c4 g6 3 tt:Jc3 .i.g7 4 e4 d6 5 tt:Jf3
0-0 and now :
Petrosian System
6 ..te2 e5 7 0-0 tt:Jbd7 8 d5
Gligoric System
6 �e2 e5 7 0-0 (or 7 .i.e3 'jje 7
8 d5) 7 . . . tt:Jbd7 8 .i.e3 c6 9
d5
Orthodox System
6 .i.e2 e5 7 0-0 tt:Jbd7 3 .:te 1
(or 8 'jjc 2 c6 9 .:td 1 [or 9 d5]
9 . 'jje 7 10 d 5) 8 . . . c6 9 .tfl
. .
28
(or 9 d 5) 9 . . a5 10 .::tb 1 .:te8
.
1 1 d5
Systems with h3
6 h3 e5 (or 6 . . . c5 7 d5 e5) 7
d5
6 .i.e2 .i.g4 7 .i.e3 tt:Jfd7 8
ttc l e5 9 d5
1 Strategic Ideas
The most important feature in
common in these variations, con­
trasted with the preceding chapter,
is the position of Black's QN. This
apparently insignificant detail in
reality has a profound influence
on the strategy of both sides. In
addition, the fact that White has
not yet castled in some variations
can also m ake an important diff­
erence as will be pointed out,
although he will normally castle
kingside.
Thus i n general the type of cen­
tre we shall be considering will
present the following characterist­
ics (46).
At first sight the strategic ele-

46
ments here are very similar to
those previously enumerated in
our observations on Diagram 2.
Indeed, normally the game will
feature attack and counterattack
with castling on the same side,
where a key role will be played by
the respective offensive thrusts c4-
c5 and . . . f7-f5. However, the
position of the QN means that
although Black may still choose
to make the prophylactic advance
. . . c7-c5 he will be able to control
the square c5 with greater ease
than in the positions examined in
the preceding chapter where the
QN was placed on e7.
The square c5
Not only does Black exercise
greater control over c5, he can
also turn it into a strong outpost
for his QN by securing it with . . .
a7-a5 (4 7).
In this type of position it is clear
The Petrosian Centre
47
that White cannot prepare the
advance c4-c5 with the standard
methods examined in the preced­
ing chapter, especially considering
that once the QN is directed
towards c5 it can easily be
reinforced by its partner ( . . . tt:l f6-
d7).
To prepare c4-c5 White will
need to employ his queenside
pawns, but he will hardly ever
simply be able to continue with
a2-a3 and b2-b4 because after
an immediate a3 Black will gain
permanent control of c5 by fixing
White's b-pawn with . . . a5-a4.
Thus the battle for control of c5
must be prepared by first playing
b2-b3 and only then a2-a3 and
b 3-b4 (48).
Only by expending a certain
number of tempi (among which
will almost always be : a l - b l to
bring extra support to b4) can
White succeed in getting a pawn
to b4 which is the essential pre­
requisite for the c5 breakthrough.
29
The Petrosian Centre
48
The closed centre
Given Black's enhanced control of
c5 in the Petrosian type of centre,
which naturally slows down Whi­
te's attack , he has no real need to
resort to the prophylaxis of the
advance . . . c7-c5 to counter Whi­
te's queenside play. At the same
time, however, it is true that
reliance on Black's extra control
of c5 will merely hold up the
opponent's attack whereas the
more drastic solution of . . . c7-c5
obliges White to adopt a different
method of attack . In the type of
situation illustrated in Diagram
46, then, Black may choose
whether or not to play . . . c7-c5,
thus bringing about the closed
centre.
The closed set-up (c5-d6-e5 v
c4---d5 -e4) arises most often from
the following circumstances : (1) by
inversion of moves, that is to say
when Black first plays . . . c7-c5
and after d4-d5 decides to close
the centre with . . . e7-e5; (2) when
30
White maintains the central ten­
sion for some moves and fixes the
centre after Black plays . . . c7-c6
(49).
49
In such positions Black often
plays the logical plan of creating
pressure against White's e-pawn
by the exchange . . . e5xd4 (pre­
ceded or followed by . . . .!:t f8 -e8)
and . . . t2Jd7-c5 with the possi­
bility, should the occasion arise,
of making the freeing advance . . .
d6-d5 (see Chapter 6).
White can counter these ideas
by closing the centre with d4-d5,
often thus threatening to win the
d6 pawn. This strategic decision
may be taken either straight away
or at any time during maintenance
of the central tension; sometimes
White waits for . . . ll f8-e8 before
closing the centre, thus luring the
rook away from its natural sup­
port of the f-pawn.
After d4-d5 Black often opts to
fix the centre by . . . c6-c5 since
the opening of the c-file (as would

be obtained after . . . c6xd 5) gener­
ally favours \\'hite, which is not
surprising given that this is one of
the aims of the c4-c5
breakthrough. However, as we
shall see, Black does sometimes
open the c-file with the intention
of challenging White on the queen­
side.
No matter at which stage the
pawn gets to c5, White is obliged
to change his mode of at tack on
the queen's wing (50).
50
With both players having
castled short, White will attempt
to breach the q ueenside by open­
ing the b-file while Black will pur­
sue his standard counterplay on
the opposite flank. It should, how­
ever, be observed that Black
occasionally decides to confront
the enemy head on with the
advance . . . a7-a6 coupled with . . .
b7--b5. In this case White may
react with the sq ueezing
manoeuvre a2-a4-a5 and l2Jc3-
The Petrosian Centre
a4 followed by the advance b2-
b4.
The only situation where Black
can really take the initiative on the
queenside is when White wrenches
the game out of the usual channels
by castling long (5 1 ). In such cases
the usual strategy is completely
reversed due to the vital difference
of being castled on opposite sides.
51
The pin o n the ttJ f6
With same-side castling, it is
clear that White cannot simply
adopt a pure attack/counterattack
approach since, whether Black
decides to control c5 with his
pieces or block it with his c-pawn,
in both cases White can easily find
himself with the inferior chances.
It is therefore logical that White in
turn seeks ways of slowing Black's
kingside action, especially to pre­
vent, retard, or weaken the
advance of the black f-pawn. Once
again we observe the influence
31
The Pet rosian Centre
of the placing of Black's QN in
deciding this strategy : in contrast
to the variations examined in the
previous chapter, the black knight
does not support the . . . f7-f5
advance, and on d7 it interferes
with the action of the .tc8.
The most direct method of
obstructing the advance of the f­
pawn is to pin the k night by .tc l ­
g5 (52).
52
The principle aim of this pin is
to induce Black to free himself by
means of . . . h 7-h6 and g6-g5,
thus weakening his control of f5
and consequently enfeebling the
advance of the f-pawn which
would now split the black pawns
into two relatively harmless blocks
after e4xf5.
Subseq uent developments will
be determined according to
whether Black places the QN on
a6 or d7 (see Diagram 47) or plays
. . . c7-c5.
32
U npinning by . . . h7-h6 and
. . . g 6-g 5
When Black develops h i s QN on
d7 we obtain the following type of
position (53).
It should be noted that in such
situations White does not threaten
to prevent . . . h7-h6 by playing
1lf d 1 -d2 because after . . . tLld 7-
c5 White would have the equally
unpleasant choice between .i.e2-
d 3 and 1lf d2-e3, both of which,
in any case, would fail to prevent
Black continuing with . . . h7-h6.
Consequently, this idea ("�d 1 -
d2) only works when Black has
adopted a set-up with . . . c7-c5.
White's intention here, in fact,
is to remove the K N to d2 in order
to gain control of the diagonal d l ­
h 5 and thus avert the simplifying
follow-up . . . tt:Jf6-h5xg3 after
unpinning by . . . h7-h6 and . . .
g6-g5. Therefore, given that
unpinning by . . . 1lf d8-e8 would
be met strongly by tt:Jc3-b5, it is
easy to see that Black does best to

In such posi tions it will be read­
ily understood that the occupation
of f4 ( . . . 'Llh5 -f4) is only effective
if White has already castled king­
side. If, after . . . 'Llf6-h5, White
has yet to castle, then he can try
to exploit the enemy's weakened
kingside by playing h2-h4. Such
variations are often very compli­
cated tactically and usually, after
. . . g5-g4 and the exchange . . .
'Ll h5xg3, lead to the following
pawn structure (55).
55
Here the struggle mainly
revolves around gaining control
The Petrosian Centre
of f5; should White do so he will
also gain a strategic superiority.
Thus Black must accomplish the
advance . . . f7-f5 even though it
has lost its original counter­
attacking significance and become
a necessary liberation without
which Black risks being slowly
strangled. If Black manages to
carry out the advance, however,
then after the exchange of the
pawns on e4 and f5 he can count
on an ending with virtually an
extra pawn, although his king will
be open to attack during the
middle game.
The sq u are e4
After the moves . . . h7-h6 and . . .
g6-g5, the main reason that the
advance . . . f7-f5 loses the greater
part of its attacking strength is
that after e4xf5 White obtains the
strong blockading square e4 (56).
56
White can occupy e4 and take
advantage of the general white
33
The Petrosian Centre

square weakness on the ki ngside. is natural to move the KN so as

Black's o nly chance of combating to continue with . . . f7-f5, and the
this strategic inferiority is in suc­ square d7 is best reserved for the
ceeding in playing . . . e5--e4 and development of the QB, as we
firmly defending it. An analogous shall see (58).
situation also arises when Black
plays . . . f7-f5, even with the sup­
port of a pawn on g6, and then for
some tactical reason finds himself
obliged to recapture on f5 with a
p1ece.

U npinning by . . . 'iY d 8-e8

When Black's QN has not been

developed on d 7 he has a less
After getting out of the pin,
compromising way of getting out
before continuing with . . . f7-f5
of the pin (5 7).
Black tends to bring his bad
bishop into play via h6 with . . .
h6-h5, which also threatens to
trap the QB and thus forces White
to play f2-f3 (59).

After having played . . . a7-a5

Black can unpin quite simply by
. . . 'iY d 8-e8 as l2J c3-b5 could be
answered by the thematic develop-
ment . . . l2J b8-a6. In this case the
move . . . h7-h6 is not played with
the intention of continuing with
. . . g6-g5 but in order to free h7
for the KN. After . . . � d8-e8 it
In such si tuations, when White
has castled kingside he should be
careful about withdrawing the
bishop to f2, which would allow
Black to build up kingside press-

34

ure too q uickly by . . . 1Ye8-e7, . . .
h5-h4 and . . . 'ilr'e7-g5.
The sq u are a4
As we have seen, even tho ugh
Black may eventually succeed in
organizing some kingside counter­
play, the pin certainly slows things
down. It is logical, therefore, for
Black to augment his preventative
measures on the queenside in
order to avoid being over-run
there.
The combination of the unpin-
ning . . . if d 8-e8 with the develop-
ing . . . .ic8-d7 gives Black the
extra option of implementing the
simplifying manoeuvre . . . lZJc5-
a4 once White has managed to
play b4 (60).
Black can offer the exchange of
his QN by . . . lZJc5-a4, either
with or without capturing on b4,
instead of consenting to its
exclusion from play by retreating
to a6.
The Petrosian Centre
U npin ning by ... ir' d 8-c7
As well as the methods already
considered, when Black has played
. . . c7--c5 he can get out of the pin
by moving his queen along the
diagonal d8-a5 (61 ).
61
The best position for Black's
queen in general is c7, given that
the other possibilities ( . . . ifb6 or
. . . it' a5) would be easily disturbed
by White's natural plan of opening
the b-file ( tt a l -b 1 and b2-b4). In
this case too, the move . . . h7-h6
serves to prepare the retreat . . .
lZ:lf6-h7, as going to e8 would
impede the normal development
of the QN on d7 because of .i h4-
e7 winning the exchange.
The advance f2-f4
Another method of countering the
advance . . . f7-f5 (and especially
the further . . . f5-f4) is to play
f2-f4 either before or after the
exchange e4xf5, g6xf5. The basic
idea of this type of plan is to open
35
The Petrosian Centre
the centre in order to weaken
Black's attack on the kingside, at
the same time hoping to profit
from the somewhat exposed pos­
ition of the black king. Such a
strategy nearly always precedes
the development of the Q B on
e3, and exhibits different nuances
according to whether Black plays
his c-pawn to c5 (62).
62
When Black has occupied c5,
White can aim to open the centre
and/or obtain control of d4 by
playing e4xf5 g6xf5 and f2-f4 (63).
63
In general, the closing of the
position by . . . e5 -e4 is unlikely to
upset White because the �e3 is
36
already placed to block the pawn
whilst the sq uare d4 will quickly
fall into his hands (for example by
lLld2-b3 or lLlc3-b5) and the
pawn chain e4-f5 can always be
broken up by a later g2-g4.
Black's best approach is to
exchange on f4, looking for adequ­
ate compensation for his inferior
pawn structure in the centraliz­
ation of his pieces.
On the other hand, when Black
has played . . . c5 White will norm­
ally manoeuvre his KN to d3
via el (in order to support the
advances b2-b4 and f2-f4) rather
than play lLlf3-d2 as in the pre­
ceding diagrams. With the knight
on d3, however, if White takes
with e4xf5 and afterwards plays
f2-f4 Black will be able to push
on with . . . e5-e4 with gain of
tempo (64).
64
In such positions Black can play
. . . e5-e4 and after lLld3 -f2 immo­
bilize White's pawns with the
exchange . . . �g7xc3, subsequ-

ently preventing the thrust g2-g4
by means of . . . tt:Jd7-f6 and, if
necessary, . . . h7-h5. In this way
he obtains a balanced game not­
withstanding the loss of the bishop
pair (and especially the fianchet­
toed KB) thanks to the closed
nature of the position and White's
lack of pawn breakthroughs.
Consequently, when Black has
played . . . c5 White tends to post­
pone the exchange e4xf5 and play
an immediate f2-f4 in order to try
and maintain some advantage (65).
65
The principal aim of this
advance remains the same, i.e. to
open the centre and try to profit
from the ex posed position of the
black king. In this position Black
has attempted to renew his king­
side attack by playing . . . g5, but
after fxe5 tt:Jxe5 ( . . . f4, e6 fxe3,
exd7 � xd7, e5 dxe5, tt:Je4 gives
White a strategically superior pos­
ition), tt:J xe5 .txe5, exf5 .txf5,
g4 White retains the initiative
thanks to the rapidity of his attack
on the g-pawn ('�d2 h6, h4).
The Pet rosian Centre
I d eas associated with the
ad van ce h2-h3
Occasionally, White decides to
play h2-h3 at some stage in the
opening. This little move contains
various ideas according to
whether or not it is combined with
the pin kc 1 -gS. When Black does
nothing to break the pin, then h2-
h3 serves to prepare tt:Jf3-h 2--g4
(66).
66
White threatens to increase the
pressure by tt:J h2--g4. Should
Black decide to play . . . h 7-h6,
then the bishop can retreat to e3
and with a subsequent h 3-h4-h5
White can create a weakening of
f5 and consequently of the advance
. . . t7-f5.
More often, however, the move
h2-h3 (especially when played
early on in the opening) is intended
to prepare a later g2-g4 (67).
This is another system, fairly
frequent in practice, which aims
to d raw the sting of . . . t7-f5.
Occasionally the g2--g4 advance
37
The Petrosian Centre
67
can be played without the support
of the h-pawn by moving the KN
to d2 thus supplying the support
of the queen and KB. It is obvious
that this plan is almost always
implemented before White has
declared his castling inten tions, as
only in this way can he hope to
reap the full benefit of a possible
opening of the g-file following . . .
f7--f5. By reserving the option of
castling queenside White main­
tains the possibility of sharpening
things with opposite side castling.
From Black's point of view, it
is not always easy to make the
correct choice of plan. We will try
to outline the pros and cons of the
three possibilities. ( 1 ) Gi ven that
the opponent might castle queen­
side, Black reacts by opening the
c-file with . . . c7-c6xd5, but this
plan can only come to fruition
if White has already committed
himself to the g4 advance, other­
wise nothing prevents him from
gtvmg up this idea in favour of
38
castling kingside and trying to
profit from the opening of the c­
file; (2) Black reacts by securing
and occupying c5 by . . . a5 and . . .
4Jc5 or fixing the pawns with . . .
c5; this plan is only really effective
when White has castled queenside
as otherwise, protected by the
closed centre, White's king can
remain in the centre and gain the
initiative either on the kingside by
g4 and h4, or on the queenside
with a3 and b4, and this without
allowing the opponent a clear
object of counterplay; (3) Black
reacts by exploiting the weak f4
square (accentuated by h2-h3)
with a rapid . . . 4J f6-h5-f4.
The square f4
Generally speaking, there are two
main situations where occupation
of the f4 square constitutes one
of Bl ack's most important aim s :
when White h a s played h2-h3, o r
when h e has castled kingside.
I n the first case, the diagram
underlines the fact that occupation
of f4 is not dependent upon White
having also castled kingside ( 68).
White cannot afford any further
weakening of the kingside pawns
by g2-g3 as, i n the first place,
the aggressive aim of h2-h3 (to
continue with g2-g4) would be
nullified, and in the second, Black
would acquire the dangerous

68
breakthrough possibility of . . . f5-­
f4 after . . . f7 -f5. Therefore, in
order to protect f4, White must
have reco urse to an artifici al-look­
ing manoeuvre : 4.J h2 tt.Jf4, � f3
f5, and now, so as not to lose the
h-pawn, he must first play h4 and
only then g3. It will readily be
observed that the exchange
it c l xf4 constitutes a strategic
success for Black given the li ber­
ation of the bad bishop and simul­
taneous gain of dark square play.
An example of the second case
(which we have already glimpsed
in the commentary to diagram 54)
comes about when White retreats
the bishop to e3 after . . . h 7- h6
(69).
In this type of situation Black
can either choose to base his coun­
terplay on . . . f7-f5 by playing . . .
4.Jf6-h7 (or -d7), or on occupying
f4. This latter plan gains in import­
ance from White castling kingside,
and Black can proceed in three
ways : ( 1 ) to play . . . tt.J f6-h5
The Petrosian Centre
69
immediately if White's KN is still
on f3; (2) to play . . . �c8 -g4, if
White's KN is on d2, with the idea
of gaining control of h5 after f2-­
f3 �g4-d 7; (3) to play . . . 4.J f6-
h5 immediately, even if White's
KN has moved from f3, challeng­
ing the opponent to give up the
bishop pair in order to double
Black 's h-pawns.
Clearly, the idea of occupying
f4 should not be seen as a totally
separate alternative to the plan
with . . . f7-f5 : the two methods
are frequently combined.
The manoeuvre g 2-g 3 and
t2J f3-h4
White sometimes decides to play
g2-g3 both in order to prevent
Black occupying f4 and to obtain
the possibility of tt.J f3--h4 to hold
up or prevent the . . . f5 advance
(70).
The ideal (but not indispens­
able) conditions for carrying out
39
The Petrosian Centre
this manoeuvre obtain when Black
has played . . . h7-h6 and . . . tLlf6-
h5. I n this case, after tLl f3-h4 the
opening of the d 1- h 5 diagonal
creates the threat of J.. e 2xh5, and,
moreover, the . . . f5 ad vance would
simply lose the g-pawn. If neces­
sary, White can increase the press­
ure on f5 by .te2-d 3 .
White c an also play t hi s idea
whilst maintaining the central ten­
sion (see Diagram 49), when he
has placed the bishop on f1 (0-0,
ld: f1 -e 1 , J.. e 2-f1 ) since the weak­
ening caused by g2-g3 is then
almost irrelevant, and even if
Black manages to play . . . f7 -f5
the bishop will find useful work
on h3.
The tLl h4 almost always comes
back into play on g2 where it is
well placed to support the advance
f2--f4 in answer to Black's . . . f7-
f5, as previously examined.
40
Tempti ng the tLl f6 ( J.. e3
tLl g 4 )
Another way for White to try to
disrupt Black's standard kingside
counterplay is to tempt him into
. . . tLl f6-g4 by playing J.. c l -e3
without any preparation, e.g. h2-
h3 ( 7 1 ).
71
Following the attack ..te3-g5
and the logical response . . . f7-
f6, White's main ideas are the
maintenance of the pin on f6 by
i.g5-h4 and/or the exploitation
of the exposed position of Black's
KN.
The development of the bishop
on e3, which is characteristic of
the Gligoric system, is generally
played before resolving the central
tension, and can result in a divers­
ity of plans according to whether
or not Black opens the c-file and
on which side White consequently
decides to castle.

The retreat .tg5-h4
The purest form of the idea of
tempting Black's KN is seen when
the c-file i s still closed and White
retreats the bishop to h4 after
having provoked . . . f7-f6 (72).
72
White prevents the standard
development of Black's k ingside
counterplay and threatens to util­
ize the fact that he has not yet
castled to seize the initiative on
the kingside by h2-h3 and g2-g4,
followed by putting the k ing into
safety o n the queenside. In this
type of position Black m ay choose
from three different plans :
( 1) To try to prevent the advance
g2-g4 by playing . . . h7-h5 (which
threatens to encircle the White's
QB). In this case White can pro­
vide an escape route for his bishop
by playing tZ:lf3-d2 followed by
f2-f3, but only after having first
driven away the k night by h2-h3
(if Black has not already voluntar­
ily retreated), as otherwise it could
be played to e3. The resulting
The Petrosian Centre
positions are flexible for White in
that he can either continue with
his k ingside operations or once
again turn his attention to the
queenside and the advance c4--c5.
(2) To assent to playing opposite
side attacks by opening the c-file
with . . . c7-c6xd5.
(3) To unpin the f-pawn with
the advance . . . g6-g5 and retreat
the knight to h6 in preparation for
the advance . . . f6-f5. In this way
Black gives White control of e4
after the exchange e4xf5 tZ:lh6xf5,
but obtains in return some chances
of using d4.
The retreat ..tg5-d2 (or -c1)
When Black has already played
. . . c7-c6, it would clearly be dang­
erous for White to opt for opposite
side attacks by castling queenside
because of the imminent opening
of the c-file, and therefore in this
case after . . . tZ:Jg4, ..tg5 f6, White
normally retreats to d2 (7 3).
73
41
The Petrosian Centre
Now if Black plays . . . f5 White's
idea is to gain control of e4 by
playing exf5 gxf5, t2J g5 followed
by ii.xg4 di verting the control
of Black's f-pawn. Alternatively
White can obtain a dangerous
queenside pawn majority in play­
ing dxc6 bxc6 which can be mobi­
lized immediately by b2-- b4--b5,
at the same time aiming to gain
control of d5. I n addition, i n the
situation shown in the above diag­
ram Black cannot lightly capture
on d5 because after . . . cxd5, t2J xd5
White would have gained con trol
of d5.
The best way for Black to neu­
tralize these ideas passes through
two di stinct phases : (I) to open the
c-file before moving the t2J f6, thus
not losing control of d5; (2) to
preface the . . . f5 advance with the
retreat of the k night to h6, and
further to f7 according to the
necessity of controlling g5 (after
having played . . . t2Jg4, �g5 f6,
�d2). A different approach for
Black in place of playing for . . . f5
is to try to get rid of his bad
bishop and revitalize his k ingside
counterattack by retreating the
knight to f7 and then continuing
with . . . �g7--h6 and . . . ct:Jf7 -g5.
White, meanwhile, will try to
take advantage of the open c-file,
as we have seen in the preceding
chapter.
42
The o pening of the c-file
In general, the opening of the c-file
is in White's favour (one specific
exception, fo r example, being with
opposite side attacks when White
has castled queenside), particu­
larly on account of the further
weakening of Black's q ueenside
(d6) and the availability of c4 for
the KN ( lZJf3-d2--c4). It can
ha ppen, however, that Black rad­
ically alters his plans and decides
to open the c-file and confront
White head on the queenside.
With this approach Black will only
obtain approximately balanced
chances if he succeeds in gaining
space on the queenside by . . . a 7-
a5 and especially . . . b7-b5 (74).
Thanks to his pressure on the
e-pawn Black is able to play . . . b7-
b5 gaining space and preventing
occupation of c4, although White
can still look to increase the press­
ure on Black's b-pawn by playing
b4 axb4, l::t x b4.
These kind of conditions gener-

ally arise when White maintains
the central tension for a long time
(see Diagram 49) thereby discour­
agi ng the opponent from p ursuing
. . . t7-f5 in view of the possible
opening of the centre.
The bad bishop
Here too, as in the preceding
chapter, the bad bishop can pre­
sent Black with serious difficulties
in a possible ending. We have
already touched on the q uestion
of the bad bishop in passing (see
commentaries to Diagrams 58, 68
and 73), a problem which Black
generally attempts to solve by
seeking its exchange along the
diagonal h6-cl. Of course, the
problem does not exist when
White opens the centre by playing
f2-f4 (see : The ad vance f2-f4).
A typical case occurs, for exam­
ple, when White transfers the KN
to the queenside for a likely occu­
pation of c4 (7 5).
75
The Petrosian Centre
Of course Black will seek to
exchange his bishop for its white
counterpart as otherwise White
might be able to exploit the weak­
ness of the black squares.
The square e6
Norm ally Wh ite cannot exploit
the weakness of the sq uare e6
following the advance . . . f5
because of the protection afforded
by the .tc8 and often also by a
knight on c5. In a few specific
cases, however, White can try to
achieve something with the
manoeuvre ttJf3-g5-e6 even at
the likely cost of a pawn. The
most favourable circumstances for
making this idea work exist when
Black has blocked the centre with
. . . c5 and obstructed the QB with
the QN (76).
Here is an exceptional example
where White can gain an advan­
tage from the weakness of e 6 :
Black cannot respond to ttJg5
43
The Petrosian Centre
with . . . CLJc7 because after CLJe6
CLJxe6, dxe6 CLJ b8, exf5 gxf5, J.e3
e4, CLJxe4 White wins material
due to the vulnerable position of
Black's Q R. Thus Black is obliged
to reply to CLJg5 with . . . CLJdf6
but after CLJe6 .ixe6, dxe6 White's
pieces develop a very dangerous
dynamism through the attack on
the pawn o n f5 co upled with the
general weakness of the light
squares.
The simplifying manoeuvre
. . . J.c8--g 4xf3
Sometimes the type of centre we
are considering arises after Black
has played . . . i. g4 followed by . . .
CLJfd7 and . . . e5. White generally
gains the two bishops in such
cases, playing h3 if necessary. After
the exchange . . . �g4xf3 the fol­
lowing strategic characteristics
arise (77).
77
Black's idea is to blockade c5
with both knights whilst p reparing
44
the ad vance . . . f7-f5 as rapidly as
possible.
Although the greater part of the
positional ideas remain the same,
following the exchange of Black's
light-squared bishop White can
try to gain some advantage on the
light squares in general and on the
diagonal h 3-c8 in particular after
a possible . . . f5 -f4 advance.
When White has yet to castle,
he can magnify the white square
weakness and try to take the
initiative on the k ingside by push­
ing the h-pawn (h3 -h4-h5xg6).
2 Tactical Ideas
Apart from a few specific vari­
ati ons which have a pronounced
tactical bias, the Petrosian type
of centre does not feature many
recurring tactical ideas in t he
opening phase. We will mention
the m ost i mportant and the most
common.
The weakness o f the h5-e8
diagonal
When Black combines the devel­
opment of his QN on d 7 with
the unpinning . . . �d8 -e8 he can
sometimes fall into traps as a result
of the congestion of his pieces (78).
If Black plays . . . f5? there comes

78
exf5 gxf5 ( . . 1.1 xf5 does not lose
.
material but is positionally hope­
less) ..th5 (79)
79
and he will have to give up the
exchange in order to save the
queen. Black also needs to pay a
lot of attention to h5 (which is
considerably weakened after the
recapture . . . g6xf5) when the
square is occupied by, say, a pawn
or k night as very similar motifs
can arise based on discoveries by
the k night on f3 .
The Petrosian Centre
The pseudo-sacrifice ...
4.J xe4
On the other hand, White m ust
always be careful regarding com­
binations based on the pseudo­
sacrifice on the k night on e4 (80).
80
Here, for example, Black can
play . . . 4.Jfxe4 as after 4.Jxe4
4.Jxe4, 'tlfxe4 ..tf5 (81 )
81
. . . he regains the material sacn­
ficed with interest.
A variation on this type of sacri­
fice, based this time on opening the
h8-al diagonal, can come about
when White's QR is still on al :
after sacrificing on e4 Black
45
The Petrosian Centre
attacks the piece which recaptures
with . . . t7-f5 and follows up with
. . . e5-e4 m aking a double attack
on the lLlf3 and l:t a 1 .
Sometimes, however, this type
of combination can rebound (82).
82
Here, for example, Black can
play the pseudo-sacrifice . . . lLlxe4
as after lLlxe4 f5, he will regain
the piece. However, White can give
up the bishop by lLlc3 g5, j_g3
f4, lLle4 fxg3, hxg3 (83)
83
. . . obtaining a strategic superior­
ity due to the domination of e4
and the accentuated bad bishop.
46
3 Illustrative games
Game 3
Weingold-Kasparov
USSR 1979
Petrosian System
1 d4 lLlf6
2 lLlf3 g6
3 c4 j_g7
4 lLlc3 d6
5 e4 0-0
6 i.e2
Even at this early stage, if Whi te
intends to close the centre after . . .
e7-e5, he can immediately begin
counter measures against a future
. . . t7-f5 by preparing the advance
g2-g4 with 6 h3. Setting aside the
fact that Black is by no means
obliged to play . . . e7-e5, let us
take a look at some possible devel­
opments following 6 . . . e5 7 d 5 :
( 1 ) 7 . . . lLlbd7 8 j_e3 lLlc5 9 tZJd2
a5 1 0 g4 tZJe8 1 1 h4, and White
begins to assume the initiative on
the k ingside, naturally reserving
the possibility of castling q ueen­
side; (2) 7 . . . c6 8 j_e3 cxd5 9 cxd 5
tZJbd7 1 0 .te2 lLl c 5 1 1 tZJd2
a5 1 2 a3 and in this case White
intends exploiting his regular
queenside advantage; (3) 7 . . . l2J a6
8 �e3 l2J h 5 9 l2J h 2 �e8 (a useful
move for threatening . . . t7-f5) 1 0
j,e2 l2Jf4 1 1 .tf3 f5 and i n order
to get rid of the troublesome
k night White will have to play h 3 -
h4 a n d t h e n g2-g3.

6 e5
Black can try to get in a quick
. .. f5 advance by playing 6 . . .
.tg4 7 .te3 lLlfd7, e.g. : 8 .U.c 1
(this removes the rook from the
a 1- h8 diagonal in order to be
able, according to circumstances,
to protect the c-pawn by b2-b3,
which would not be possible after,
for example, 8 h3 .txf3 9 .txf3
lbc6 1 0 d 5 lLla5) 8 . . . e5 9 d5 a5
1 0 h 3 .txf3 1 1 �xf3 lLla6 1 2 h4
f5 1 3 h5, with the aim of highlight­
ing the white square weakness
created by the exchange of Black's
QB.
7 d5
This is the only m ove with
which White can force the creation
of the Petrosian centre. Mainten­
ance of the central tensi on gives
Black the possibility of bringing
about an Orthodox centre (see
Chapter 6). White can either keep
the central tension by playing 7 0-0
(for possible developments from
this move see Game 4) or choose
7 .te3 with the idea of tempting
Black's K N to g4. When this latter
possibility does not transpose to
Chapter 1 (e.g. 7 . . . lbc6 8 d5
lLle7) or to Chapter 6 (e.g. 7 . . .
exd4) it will develop this type of
centre, e.g. 7 . . . "i/e7 8 d5 lLlg4 9
.tg5 f6 1 0 .th4 and now : ( 1 ) 1 0
. . . h 5 1 1 lLld2 a 5 1 2 h 3 lbh6 1 3
The Petrosian Centre
f3 lLla6 1 4 a3 and White's position
still retains a certain flexi bility; (2)
1 0 .. . "i/e8 1 1 h 3 lbh6 1 2 g4 a5
1 3 g5 fxg5 14 .txg5 lLl a6 1 5 "ifd2
intending to castle queenside and
begin opposite side attacks.
For cases where .te3 is played
in conj unction with castling king­
side see the commentary to Whi­
te's eighth move in Game 4.
7 a5
The most flexible continuation
and nowadays the most common.
Black secures the c5 sq uare and
intends to continue with . . . lba6
thus slowing down the b4 advance
and preparing a possi ble unpin­
ning by . . . "i/d8-e8. There are
many other variations (such as 7
. . . c5, 7 . . . lbh5, 7 . . . h6, 7 . . .
lba6), but the most important
alternative to the text move is 7
. . . lLlbd 7 . Some possible develop­
ments from this move : 8 ..tg5 h6
9 .th4 g5 10 .tg3 lbh5 1 1 h4
and now: ( 1 ) 1 1 . . . lbxg3 1 2 fxg3
gxh4 1 3 lLlxh4 'jj'g 5 14 ..tg4 with
advantage to White even if he
loses the right to castle and the g­
pawn as well, e.g. 1 4 . . . •e3 + 1 5
ije2 "ifxg3 + 1 6 <>ttd 1 etc. ; (2) 1 1
.. . lLlf4 1 2 hxg5 hxg5 1 3 •c2 f5
(after 1 3 . . . lbxg2 + 1 4 <>ttd 2 and
White has a considerable advan­
tage given that he can transfer his
Q R to the kingside) 1 4 exf5 lbc5
with a complicated position; (3) 1 1
47
The Petrosian Centre
. . . g4 1 2 tt:Jd2 (or 12 tt:Jh2 tt:Jxg3
1 3 fxg3 h5 1 4 0-0 and the control
of f5 is the most important factor)
12 . . . f5 1 3 exf5 tt:Jdf6 14 �xg4
tt:Jxg3 1 5 fxg3 tt:Jxg4 1 6 �xg4
.ixf5 and it is unclear whether
the bishop pair is adequate com­
pensation for the sacrificed pawn.
8 �g5
White pins the K N whilst
retaining his options regarding the
placing of the king. Another inter­
esting idea is to tempt Black's K N
to attack t h e bishop b y playing 8
.ie3, e.g. 8 . .. tt:Jg4 9 �g5 f6 1 0
.th4, with similar developments
to those considered in the note to
White's seventh.
8 h6
Necessary in order to free h 7
for the KN.
9 .th4 tt:Ja6
10 tt:Jd2 �e8 (84)
84
w 12
Black has com pleted his unpin-
48
ning operation, while the
opponent has still to declare his
intentions. At this point White can
choose between two diametrically
opposed plans: to castle kingside
and direct his efforts towards a
queenside breakthrough (the stan­
dard plan), or to try to gain the
initiative on the k i ngside with 1 1
g4 k eeping the option of castling
queenside.
11 0-0 tt:Jh7
The pseudo-sacrifice 1 1
tt:Jxe4? does not work here
because after 1 2 ttJ dxe4 f5 1 3
tt:Jd2 g5 1 4 ..tg3 f4 1 5 .i.. h 5 �d7
1 6 tt:Jde4, White obtains a clear
advantage thanks to the domin­
ation of e4.
12 a3
White can play this move only
when he has control of a4. I f Black
on the previous move had played
1 1 . . . .i.. d 7 then White would
have had to preface a3 by 1 2 b3 .
f5?!
Black underestimates the
importance of giving away e4
which this move implies. The nor­
mal continuation would be 1 2 . . .
�d7 1 3 b3 h 5 ( 1 3 . . . f5!? is n ow
possible, although after 14 exf5
gxf5 1 5 ..th5 �b8 1 6 ..te7 l:tc8
the position is completely unclear)
1 4 f3 h6 and now White does best

with either 1 5 llb 1 or 1 5 <it>h 1
rather than 1 5 j_f2 which allows
Black to reply w ith 1 5 . . . 'Wie7
with the idea of reinforcing the
pressure on the kingside by . . . h5-
h4 and . . . 'Wie7-g5.
13 exf5! j_xf5
Black cannot recapture by 1 3
. . . gxf5? because after 1 4 ..th5!
'i!t'd7 1 5 b4! he would remain
behind in development and be
very cramped.
14 g4!
White wants to gain control
of e4 while avoiding too much
simplification which would occur,
for example, after 1 4 l2Jde4 l2Jf6.
14 ..td7
15 l2Jde4 a4 (85)
85
w
Black probably hoped that the
blockade of the queenside would
provide adequate compensation
for the loss of e4. However, despite
the blocking of the queenside,
The Petrosian Centre
White's position is preferable as
the acquisition of the e4 square
and the opening of the bl-h7
diagonal gives him k ingside
attacking chances, whereas Black
no longer has his standard
counterplay available.
16 f3 b6
17 ..td3 ..tf6
1 7 . . . l2Jc5? cannot be played
immediately because of 1 8 l2Jxc5
bxc5 19 'Wi c2 and so on.
18 l2Jxf6 +!
With the disappearance of the
fianchettoed bishop the weakness
of Black's k ingside becomes accen­
tuated .
18 l2Jxf6
19 'Wid2 l2Jc5
20 ..tc2 �g7
In a commentary to this game
Kasparov opined that this king
move is a mistake, and rec­
ommended instead the risky v ari­
ation 20 . . . g5 2 1 ..tf2 �f7 22 h4
.tt g8 23 hxg5 hxg5 24 ..te3 �e7
25 ..txg5 'Wif7, judging that Black
has sufficient compensation for the
sacrificed pawn. However, it seems
to us that after 26 f4! Black's
position i s not easy to defend, to
say the least. Consequently, the
text move appears in fact to be
virtually forced.
49
The Petrosian Centre

21 .tt a el tt:Jb3 play.

If 2 1 . . . 'i!Vf7 22 f4 exf4 23 'tlt'xf4 23 tt:Jc5

g5 24 .txg5 hxg5 25 'i!Vxg5 + 24 iVd2 iVf7
� h8 26 .ttxf6 and wms.
Or 24 . . . tt:Jb3 25 'tlt'e3, main­
22 'i!Vd3 taining the threat of h2-h4.

Kasparov considered this move 25 h4 tt:Jh7

to be a mistake and suggested It is clear that Black's position
instead the continuation 22 .txb3 would be hopelessly compromised
axb3 23 f4! T h is l in e is undoubt­ after 25 . . . gxh4 26 .txh4.
edly very strong, e.g. 2 3 . . . tt:Jxg4
24 h3 g5 25 hxg4 (25 fxg5?! 'i!Vh5! 26 .i!.xh7
is very unclear) 2 5 . . . gxh4 2 6 f5 Because of Black's pressure on
with a vi rtually decisive advan­ f3 White i s no longer able to rectify
tage. It seems to us that the text the placing of his QB, and m ust
move is also sufficien t to maintain therefore continue with his plan.
a sufficiently clear advantage.
26 gxh4
22 g5 27 .txe5 + dxe5
Unable to find a satisfactory If 27 . . . �xh7 then 28 .td4
continuation, Black decides to with clear advantage to White.
prevent the f4 advance by drastic
methods. Hoping for a repetition 28 .t b l 'i!t'f4 (86)
by 22 . . . tt:Jc5 would not work
86
due to 23 'i!Ve3 threatening to
p ush on with g4-g5. w

23 �g3?!

Beginning a dubious attacking

plan. I t would have been better to
play 23 .tf2! in order to play h2-
h4 and then .tf2-e3, thus bring­
ing terrific pressure to bear on g5.
White would thus have obtained
a clear positional advantage, Black correctly forces the
whereas the text move risks letting exchange of queens, as otherwise
slip the fruits of his hitherto precise the threats along the diagonal b 1 -

50
 The Petrosian Centre

h7 could quickly assume decisive would be m uch better to keep the

proportions, e.g. 28 . . . �f6? 29 f4 k nights by playing 3 3 ..te4, thus
exf4 30 �c2 l:t f7 3 1 l:t xf4! and gaining a decisive advantage as
wins. the black king could not advance
on the black squares, e.g. 3 3
29 jVxf4 n xf4
� f6? 34 lLle2 a n d wms.
After 29 . . . exf4 Black would not 33 lLl b3?
have even the slightest dynamic
compensation for the structural
Black returns the favour. After
kingside weaknesses.
the correct 33 . . . lLlxe4 34 ..txe4
30 l:txe5 l:t a f8 �f6 it would not be easy for
White to break down the blockade
After 30 . . . l:t xc4? the black
on the dark squares, e.g. 35 �f2
king would fall into a m ating net,
..txg4 36 �e3 �e5 37 l:t g l
e.g. 3 1 l:t e7 + �f6 (3 1 . . . �f8
..th 5 ! 3 8 l:t g 7 l:t f7 etc. The text
32 .tt h7 with advantage) 32 l:t h7
move permits a rapid conclusion.
�g5 3 3 l:. g7 + �f4 (33 . . . �f6
34 l:t g6 + etc.) 34 l:t f7 + �e3 34 <t>f2 .i.xg4
(the alternatives would also have 35 'it>e2 l:tf5
dire consequences, e.g. 34 . . . �g3 36 .tt f2 .i.h5
3 5 lLle2 + � h 3 36 l:t f2 etc., or 37 lLld6 + cxd6
34 . . . �g5 3 5 f4 + �xg4 36 38 ..txf5 �f6
l:t g7 + �h3 37 l:t f3 mate; or 39 ..tc2 lLlc5
again if 34 . . . �e5 35 l:t e l + 40 l:th2 �g5
�d6 36 l:t f6 + etc.) 3 5 l:t e l + 41 Ad1
�d2 (3 5 . . . �d4 36 .tH4 + etc.) 1-0
36 .l:te2 + �cl 3 7 l:t c2 mate!

31 l:te7 + l:t8f7?

Black makes a mistake in time Game 4

trouble; 3 1 . . . �g8, maintaining Plaskett- N unn
pressure o n f3, would have given England 1982
more hope. Petrosian System
1 c4 g6
32 .l:txf7+ � xf7
2 lLlc3 ..tg7
33 lLle4?!
3 lLlf3 lLl f6
White is also in time trouble 4 e4 d6
and does not appreciate that it 5 d4 0-0

51
The Petrosian Centre
6 �e2 e5
7 0-0
White keeps the central tension,
allowing Black to develop his QN
on c6 if he wants.
7 liJbd7
The positional alternative to the
aggressive 7 . . . liJc6.
8 d5
By castling first before creating
the Petrosian centre with the
advance of the d-pawn White's
positi on loses a certain amount
of flexibility. On the other hand,
having played . . . liJbd7, Black
loses the possibility of . . . liJa6
and is committed to playing . . .
liJc5 in o rder to complete his
development, and thereby also
offers White a clear target for the
b2-b4 advance.
In place of the text move White
can contin ue to mai ntain the cen­
tral tension by 8 ..te3, 8 �c2 or
8 l::r el. Note that by playing 8
.te3 after castling, White would
again lose a little bit of the typical
flexibility of the Gligoric system
in comparison to developing the
bishop on the previous move (see
the note to White's seventh move
in Game 3).
Let's look at some possible vari­
ations: 8 .te3 c6 9 d 5 and now
(1) 9 0 0liJg4 10 j__g 5 f6 1 1 .td2
0 'tic2 "Wia5 with a slight advantage
52
(or 1 1 .th4 "W/e7 1 2 'tic2 tLJh6
1 3 l::r ad 1 g5 1 4 .tg3 f5 1 5 exf5
tLJxf5 with a complicated game)
1 1 . . . 'tie7 1 2 b4 f5 1 3 tLJg5 tLJdf6
1 4 f3 tLJh6 1 5 dxc6 bxc6 1 6 b5 c5
1 7 liJd5 with advantage to White;
(2) 9 . . . cxd5 1 0 cxd5 tLJg4 1 1
.tg5 f6 1 2 .td2 liJh6 (or 1 2 . . .
liJc5 1 3 b4 liJa6 1 4 a3 f5 1 5 tLJg5
tLJc7 1 6 exf5 gxf5 1 7 .txg4 fxg4
1 8 f3 gxf3 1 9 l::r xf3 and White
stands better due to the control
of e4) 1 3 "W/c2 with a position
basically similar to those exam­
ined in the first chapter.
Alternatively, after 8 .te3 c6 9
d5 Black may choose to close the
centre completely by playing 9 . . .
c5, e.g. 1 0 liJe 1 liJe8 1 1 liJd3 f5
1 2 f4 and here, in addition to other
possibilities, 1 2 . . . g5 has been
tried.
A brief exam pie of 8 'tW c2 : 8 . . .
c6 9 d5 c5 1 0 a3 liJe8 1 1 b4 b6 1 2
l::r b 1 etc.
White can opt to m aintain the
central tension a little longer by 8
l::r e 1 c6 9 .tfl, e.g. ( 1 ) 9 . . . l::r e8
10 d 5 c5 1 1 g3 l::r f8 1 2 a3 liJe8
1 3 l::r b 1 f5 14 tLJg5 liJdf6 1 5 exf5
gxf5 1 6 liJe6 .txe6 1 7 dxe6 tLJc7
1 8 .th3 with advantage to White
because of the weakness of the
white squares; (2) 9 . . . a5 1 0 l::r b 1
l::r e8 1 1 d 5 liJc5 1 2 b 3 ..td7 1 3
tLJd2 .th6 1 4 a3 cxd5 1 5 cxd5 b5
1 6 b4 axb4 1 7 l::r xb4 l::r b8 1 8

for White.
8 'Llc5
The attack on the e-pawn per­
mits Black to play this move
without a preliminary . . . a7-a5.
9 �c2 a5
10 jLgS (87)
87
B
Whether the pm IS effected
before or after castling causes con­
siderable conceptual differences in
Whi te's plans. When White has
not yet castled, the main aim of
the pin is to provoke the response
. . . h7-h6 and . . . g6-g5 (which is
why the bishop retreats to h4)
and then to exploit the resulting
weakness and begin a kingside
attack by h2-h4 (see the note to
Black's seventh in Game 3). The
same concept lies behind the
enticement of . . . 'Llf6-g4 before
having castled: in this case, too,
the bishop retreats to h4, and it is
possible to commence an attack
on the kingside (see note to
The Petrosian Centre
Whi te's seventh in Game 3).
The implementation of either of
these ideas after White has castled
kingside naturally excludes the
possibility of following up with
an all-out attack on that flank.
Instead, in this case White will
withdraw the bishop down the c 1 -
h6 diagonal (after . . . h7-h6 or . . .
f7-f6 accordingly) to help in the
queenside attack (see the note to
Whi te's eighth move above, and
the continuation of the present
game).
Of course, amidst all the turmoil
of this variation, with various
ideas and theoretical innovations,
these concepts are not always
respected, but nevertheless ·they
provide a valid and valuable key
to comprehending most things.
10 h6
11 jLe3
As we have explained, retreating
to h4 wo uld greatly lose in efficacy
seeing that Whi te has castled king­
side. Black could then exploit the
weakness of f4 without danger, e.g.
1 1 jLh4 g5 1 2 jLg3 'Llh5 1 3 'Lld2
'Llf4 etc. Note the difference in
comparison to when an analogous
manoeuvre is attempted before
White has castled (see the second
ill ustrative line given in the note
to Black's seventh move in Game
3). With the text move, t he bishop
takes up the correct post for meet-
53
The Petrosian Centre

ing Black's . . . f5 counterplay with 12 f5

the exchange exf5 gxf5 and then 13 exf5
f2 --f4.
An essential precautionary mea­
11 l2lfd7 sure to weaken Black's pawns.
White must not play 1 3 f4?!
If Black allows himself to be
immediately as after 13 . . . exf4 1 4
tempted into 1 1 . . . l2lg4 Wh ite
�xf4 g S IS �e3 f4 Black would
gains the advantage here with the
gain control of e5 w hilst also
following fo rced variation : 1 2
retaining the attack ing potential
�,xcS dxc5 1 3 h 3 l2lf6 1 4 tt:J xe5
of his pawns.
tt:lxd5 1 5 cxd5 (not 1 5 tt:J xf7?
lLl b4 1 6 tt:lxd8 tt:Jxc2 1 7 .U. ac I 13 gxf5
tt:ld4 and White's knight Is 14 f4 (88)
trapped) 1 5 . . . �xe5 1 6 f4 �.d4+
17 �h2 (after 1 7 � h 1 ?! 'iVh4
Black has counterplay) and White
threatens either 1 8 0_, b5 followed
by � ad 1 with advantage, or 1 8 e5
which opens the way to exploiting
Bl ack's weakened king's position.
Although the text move han­
dicaps Black's development, it has
the merit of reinforcing the knight
on c5 and preparing the advance
. . . f7 f5 . Black can also play 1 1 Here we see the implementati on
0 0 tt:lh5, e.g. i 2 g3 b6 1 3 l2lh4
. of one of Wh ite's standard
�.h 3 1 4 .U.fe 1 'iVd7 with a com­ methods of countering Black's
plicated game, or eq ually 1 1 . . . b6 ad vance, which also occurs in
(the most usual mo ve) 1 2 tt:ld2, other variations. If Black now
and now Black has tried various closes the centre with 14 . . . e4,
possibilities: 1 2 .. . tt:J g4 1 3 J�xg4 Wh ite's position would undo ubt­
�.xg4 1 4 a3 tt:la6 1 5 .U.ab l �d7, edly be preferable because of the
or 1 2 . . . 4J h 5 1 3 1t�xh 5 gx h5, or latent threat of breaking up
12 Jkg4 1 3 f3 �d7 14 b4 l2lh5,
0 0 0 Black's centre by g2-g4 and the
or 1 2 tt:lh7, or 1 2 . tt:J fd7.
0 0 . 0 0 possibility of gaining control of
d4, e.g. 1 5 tLl b 3 a4 1 6 l2ld4 with
12 tt:Jd2
a clear ad vantage.
Wh ite prepares the reply f2--f4. The intention behind the text

54
 The Petrosian Centre

move is to open up the centre to 22 .td1! .i:tf7!?

try to exploit Black's shaky king's
Commencing an interesting
position.
plan which combines k eeping h 6,
14 exf4 f5 and d6 safely covered whilst also
counterattack ing against White's
Black's best policy is to accept
undefended c-pawn.
a structural inferiority in the hope
of obtaining adequate dynamic 23 .tc2 i¥f8
compensation in the activity and 24 4Je2
centralization of his pieces.
Now White threatens 25 4Jg3
15 i, xf4 4Je5 (intendi ng to go to h5) and if 25
16 C'Llf3 . . . f4 then 26 .t xc5 it'xc5 2.7
it' d3 with a strong attack.
The alternative was 1 6 4Jb3.
24 4Jb7!
16 i,d7
The key to Black's plan : the
Or 1 6 . . . 4Jg6 1 7 i,e3 'W/e7
knight comes to the blockading
1 8 'Wi d2 f4 1 9 .t f2 4Je5 with
square d6 from where it protects
approximately equal chances.
f5 and attacks c4.
17 l:tae1 'Wie7
25 b3 a4
18 4Jxe5!
Instead of contenting himself
A well thought out decision.
with the solidification of his pos­
White allows the reunification of
ition following 25 . . . 4Jd6, Black
the opponent's pawns in order to
seeks counterplay at any cost and
increase his dynamic possibilities
White accepts the challenge.
in the centre.
26 b4 4Jd6
18 dxe5
27 c5 4Jc4
19 .te3
28 �·c3 4Jxe3
The players will now try to fi nd 29 it'xe3 bxc5
the best disposition of their pieces 30 bxc5 l:ta5!?
to fit the newly changed pawn 31 c6 kc8
structure. 32 i¥d2! l:tc5

19 b6 Black sacrifices the a-pawn in

20 �h1 �h8 order to keep the rook in an active
21 'Wid2 i¥d6 position.

55
The Petrosian Centre

33 iixa4 � d6 46 ll h5 � g4
47 ll f6!? (89)
The possession of the bishop
pair and the pressure against the
89
pawns on d 5 and c6 should pro­
B
vide compensation for the pawn.
Instead of simply hanging on to
his material advantage White now
initiates a very interesting and
complicated tactical sequence.

34 ii b3!? ll xc6
35 'Llc3 ll b6
36 'Lle4! � fB
37 d6 ll d7
An astonishing rook offer which
38 �c2 cxd6
should not have been accepted.
39 ll xf5! � d8!
White threatens mate by 48 � xg4
Not 39 . . . � xf5? 40 � xc8 + ll xg4 49 ll hxh6 + iixh6 50
�h7 4 1 'Llg3 and WillS . n xh6 + �g7 5 1 ti.Jf5 + �[8 52
ll h8 + etc.
40 ll c l
47 iixf6?
40 ll h5 would have obliged
Black to find 40 . . . d 5 ! 4 1 'Llg5 A losing move, as are the follow­
�g8 with an unclear position. ing : 47 . . . � xe2? 48 ll hxh6 +
iixh6 49 n xh6 + �g7 50
40 ii b7
ti.Jf5 + � f8 5 1 ll h 8 mate; or 47
41 � e2 � h4!?
. . . d5? 48 � xe5 with a decisive
Both players take risks in order advantage; or also 47 . . . � h7? 48
to play for the win. 4 1 . . . iixe4 'Llf5 ! ! n xb3 49 n hxh6 + ! �g8
42 � xe4 d 5 wo uld have giVen 50 'Lle7 m ate.
equal chances. Black can parry the opponent's
threats only by protecting f5 either
42 tLJg3 n b4
by 47 . . . iic8 ! or 47 . . . ll f8 ! ,
43 ll h5 � f6
with an equal game i n each case.
44 ll f5 � h4
45 ll cfl 48 ll xh6 + �g7
49 �xg4 + ll xg4
Im plicitly refusing the d raw.
50 ti.Jf5 + �fB
45 ll d8 51 llxf6 + �e8

56
 The Petrosian Centre

52 4J xd6 + ? 53 ld:xd6 � xg2 +

Returning the favour. The win­ 54 �g l �d5+
ning move was 52 h 3 ! ! ld:xg2 (if 55 �f2 .txb3
52 . . . .t xg2 + 5 3 �h2 t!.g5 54 56 axb3 ld:b4
.ta4 + ld:d7 5 5 ld:xd6 and wins) 57 ld:d3 �e7
53 .t a4 + ld:d7 54 .t xd7 +
� xd7 5 5 ld:f7 + �e6 56 ld:xb7
ld: xa2 5 7 4Jg3 with a won ending A fitting conclusion to this no­
52 J:Ixd6 holds-barred fighting game.

57
3 The Samisch Centre

Main Line: Samisch Variation 1 Strategic Ideas

1 d4 4Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 4Jc3 1Lg7 4
e4 d6 5 f3 0-0 6 1Le3 e5 7 d5 (90) The link ing idea of all these vari­
ations is simple : White closes the
90
centre but does not develop his
K N on f3, thereby retaining the
B
possibility of creating a strong
attack on the k ingside by advanc­
ing the h- and/o r g-pawns. Thus
we f]nd ourselves with a type of
centre presenting the following
characteristics : (9 1)

91

Similar strategic cond itions can

also arise in other variations when
White delays or even tries to omit
the move f2--f3. For example, 1 d4
4Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 4Jc3 iLg7 4 e4 d6
and now :

Averba kh Variation
5 1Le2 0-0 6 �g5 h6 (or 6 . . .
4Jbd7 7 i!Vd2 e5 8 d5) 7 .i�e3
e5 8 d 5
Systems with h2--h3
5 h3 0-0 6 j,e3 e5 7 d 5
Other Variations
5 4Jge2 0-0 6 4Jg3 e5 7 d5
The fact that White has not yet
castled gives him a very flexible
position: depending on Black's
reacti on he can either castle long
and attack on the kingside or
castle short and exploit his natural
queenside space advantage.

58

The kingside attacking plan
with the KN on e2
White can rapidly create strong
attacking threats against the
opponent's king by fol lowing a
very simple plan : placing the QB
and the queen on the c l--h6 diag­
onal (e.g. �e3, "+IV d2); developing
the KN on e2 wit h t he intention
of transferring it to g3 after the
advance g2-g4; advancing the h­
pawn to h5 and swinging the
queen to the h-file (92).
92
Evidently, such an attacking
plan envisages completing devel­
opment by castling q ueenside.
Given the sharp nature of the
game stemming from opposite side
cas tling, it is clear that Black must
promote his q ueenside counter­
play as quickly as possible whilst
also taking counter-measures on
the kingside in order to upset the
planned development of White's
attack.
The Samisch Centre
The o pening of the c-file
and the flexibility of
White's plan
Black's most logical counteraction
on the queenside is to open the c­
file as quickly as po ssible (with the
advance . . . c7-c6 followed by the
capture . . . c6xd5) (93).
93
H owever, White is then by no
means obliged to keep to his origi­
nal attacking plan and may
instead count himself satisfied
with having provoked the opening
of a file in his naturally advanta­
geous sector, and consequently
castle kingside in order to con­
centrate on his q ueenside pressure.
This explains why Black some­
times develops his q ueenside coun­
terplay without the opening of the
c-file.
Thus the game may feature
opposite side castling either with
or without an open c-file, or same
side castling with an open c-file.
59
The Samisch Centre

Op posite side castling: counters on the kingside with . . .

Black's kingside h7-h5.
prophylaxis This rule of thumb, whilst not
rigidly adhered to in practice,
If White decides to go in for
nevertheless has a logical basis
opposite side castling, especially
(which we will explain later on)
when the c-file is open, he is faced
and thus provides a useful guide
with a technical problem : (94)
to understanding and orientation.
94

The central counter . . . f7-f5

A common counter measure

ad opted by Black against White's
k ingside attack is the central
advance . . . f7-f5 . This advance is
normally prepared by moving the
KN to h5 (95).

He must decide both how long i o 95

keep his k i ng i n the centre, and

whether to first castle queenside
and then play g2-g4 or advance
g2-g4 while the k ing is still i n the
centre.
Black's kingside prophylaxis
(carried out, of course, alongside
the essential queenside counter­
play) may be affected to some
extent by the order of moves This strategy is generally
employed by White. Generally designed to anticipate the advance
speaking, we can say that when g2-g4 which White would have in
White castles queenside before mind after castling queenside.
playing g2-g4 Black tends to do Black may then prevent the
best to cross White's attacking regular development of the
plans with the central counter . . . opponent's attack either by clos­
f7-f5, whereas when White ing the position with . . . f4, �f2
advances g2-g4 with his king still �f6 (96), i n which case, after g4
m the centre Black normally C£Jg7, h4 � e7, White cannot open

60

96
lines on the kingside (especially if
Black has the time to perfect the
blockading structure wit h . .. h6),
or by exchanging in the centre ( . . .
fxe4), especially if White should be
obliged to recapt ure with the f­
pawn ( 97).
97
H ere the advance g2-g4 is
deprived of the natural support of
a pawn on f3. In the implement­
ation of this strategy Black need
scarcely never fear t he 4Jh5 being
harassed by g2-g4 : it is normal
in fact for this knight to go to
f4 without being in the least
concerned that it might cost a
The Samisch Centre
pawn (98).
The dynamic compensation
that Black would have after J.. xf4
exf4, � xf4 f5, particularly from
the liberated bishop on the long
diagonal, is usually worth rather
more than the sacrificed pawn.
The same pawn offer also comes
into consideration even when
White has a k night on e2 and does
not have to cede the bishop pair.
Basically, White has two ways
of meeting the ideas behind the . . .
f7-f5 advance: to continue the
kingside attacking policy after the
exchange exf5 gxf5, or, in the event
of the blockading advance . . . f5 -
f4, to transfer the play to the
q ueenside.
In the fi rst case, after exf5 gxf5 ,
t he strategic character of t h e pos­
ition u ndergoes a considerable
change (99).
When White does not fear the
reply . . . f5 -f4 he can prepare the
advance g2-g4 immediately with
h2--h3, otherwise he can first play
61
The S�imisch Centre
99
g2 -g3 and then h2-h 3 . He may
also on occasion follow a more
central strategy by playing f3-f4
with intentions not too dissimilar
to those examined in the preceding
chapter (see Chapter 2, 'The
advance f2- f4').
For his part, Black has acquired
considerable dynamism in the cen­
tre stemming from the possibility
of carrying out the advance . . . e5-
e4 open ing the long diagonal and
freeing the e5 square.
In the second case the k ingside
blockade imposed by Black's . . .
f5- f4 advance generally ind uces
White to transfer his attention
to the queenside where he will
attempt to open a file, notwith­
standing the presence of his k ing
there. Consequently, the im ple­
mentation of this blockading strat­
egy is hardly ever mixed with
the opening of the c-file as White
would be able to exploit the open
file plus the other weaknesses
which can arise as a result of the
62
advance of the a- and b-pawns
(1 00).
Here we have two strategi es
which do not work well together:
the blockading of the k ingside,
and the opening of the c-file. Black
finds himself i n a type of situation
which we examined in the first
chapter, but with an even weaker
queenside pawn structu re and
without having an adequate point
of counterplay on the k ingside.
The advance ... h7-h5
Sometimes, especially when the
opponent opens the c-file quickly,
White m ay continue his attack
immediately by playing g2--g4
before castling queenside. In this
case the weakness of the h4-e 1
diagonal permits Black to threaten
the g-pawn with the forceful
advance . . . h 7 -h5 ( 101).
This m ove, which m ust be
played before White has time to
bring his KN to g3, contains two

101
diverse ideas (as in the . . . f7--f5
counter above), namely to block­
ade or to exchange.
After . . . h7-h5 White m ust
decide how to defend the g-pawn.
Basically, there are three possible
reactions : (1) to defend the pawn
with h2-h3; (2) to advance with
g4-g5; (3) to defend the pawn
indirectly by pinning the 'Llf6 with
�.g5.
The fi rst case sees the realization
of the blockade : after h3 Black
plays . . . 'Llh7 (not . . . h4 immedi­
ately because of �g5) with the
idea of continuing with . . . h5-
h4 and then exchanging the bad
bishop by . . . �g7 -f6-g5 (102).
102
The Samisch Centre
This blockading manoeuvre is
underpinned by the fact that after
h2-h3 the increased weakness of
the h4-e1 diagonal means that
White cannot open the g-file by
gxh5 because after . . . � h4 + the
k night cannot go to g3 and after
the further �f2 �xh 5 Black has
advantageously crossed White's
plans. This shows clearly why the
. . . h7-h5 strategy is playable only
when White has advanced g2-
g4 before castling queenside, and
consequently why Black generally
reacts with . . . f7-f5 when \Vhite
has castled first before playing g2-
g4. The key point is that the black
queen m u st come to h4 with check.
In the second case, when White
pushes on with g4-g5. the 'Llf6
retreats to h7 (103).
Here Black may either content
himself with the blockade he has
obtained on the k ingside and
throw all his efforts into his queen­
side counterplay or seek to acti­
vate all his k ingside forces by
63
The Samisch Centre
opening the f-file with . .. f7-f6,
e.g. h4 f6, gxf6 n xf6.
Finally, in the third case, after
i,eJ-- g5 (threatening to open the
g-filc by gxh5), Black may
implement the exchange idea of
the . . . h 7- h 5 advance, w hich
enables him to weaken White's
e- and g-pawns and attack both
simultaneously. After hxg4,
fxg4 (1 04) . . .
. . . Black continues with . . . tt:Jc5
and White must sacrifice his g­
pawn because the reply h3 wo uld
fail to the simplifying combination
. . . tt:Jcxe4! , tt:Jxe4 tt:Jxe4, i,xd8
tt:Jxd2, i,c7 .:6!: e8, i,xd6 tt:Jc4
with fine play for Black.
The kingside attacking plan
with the KB on e2
White has explored a modification
of the attacking system shown in
Diagram 92 by pinning the tt:Jf6
by i,c 1 -g5 and preparing the
kingside pawn storm by i,f1 -e2
64
in place of f2--f3 (1 05).
It will be readily appreciated
that after the advance h4-h5 and
the openi ng of the h-file White's
attack could soon become quite
crushing. Moreover, the arrange­
ment of White's pieces i s princi­
pally di rected at preventing
Black's thematic kingside counters
with . . . f7- f5 or . . . h7-h5. I t is
clear, therefore, that Black m ust
avoid such positions by quickly
reactivating these defensive possi­
bilities. Essentially, this necessi­
tates achieving two things : to get
out of the pin in order to be able
to move the k night and have the
possibility of playing . . . f7-f5, and
to oblige White to play f2-f3 thus
cutting off the bishop's control of
h5. Black has two ways of getting
out of the pin : (l) by moving the
queen either to e8 or a5 (which
could follow the always useful
move . .. c7 -c6); (2) to play . . . h 7--­
h6 before White plays 't!Vdl -d2.
I n this latter case it follows that
 The Samisch Centre

if White wants to continue his 106

attacking plan involving the
ad vance of the g- and h-pawns he
m ust withdraw the bishop to e3.
The retreat of the bishop to h4
combined with the development
of the KN on f3 would merely
transpose to the type of centre
examined in the preceding chapter.
In order to force f2 -f3 Black
has recourse to the manoeuvre . . .
If we rule out the possibility of
CZJ b8-d7-c5, which fits in well
White protecting the e-pawn with
with the unpinning methods men­
the artificial � e2-f3, normally
tioned above. This manoeuvre
White decides t o modify his plans
also shows its utility in all the
by playing either 'iW d1-c2 or f2-
variations where White attempts
f3, which are both moves that
to save the f2-f3 tempo in carrying
imply different plans.
out his kingside assault (for exam­
I n the fi rst case, given that the
ple, when White prepares the g2-
d l-h 5 diagonal has been left open,
g4 advance with h2-h3).
White intends to continue with the
bayonet attack h2-h4-h5, obtain­
Unpinning by . . . h7-h6 ing a likely blockade on the king­
side after the normal response . . .
When Black gets out of the pin
g6-g5 (107).
by anticipating 'itfd l -d2 with an
early . . . h 7-h6, and White retreats
the bishop to e3, he will normally
continue with the m anoeuvre . . .
CZJ b8-d7-c5 in an attempt to
encourage White to play f2-f3
(106).
The main aim is to prevent
White reaping all the benefits of a
straightforward pawn storm on
the kingside, as co uld happen here,
for example, after g2- g4 and h2- In such situations, which gener­
h4 followed by g5 hxg5, hxg5 ally arise with an open c-file given
CZJh7, �g4 etc. Black's natural search for q ueen-

65
The Samisch Centre

side counterplay, White's inten- breakthrough ! ( 1 09).

tion is to cement the kingside
block ade (by f2- f3 and g2-g4), put
the king into safety (by castling
kingside), and then try to exploit
his natural queenside space advan­
tage plus the weak ness of [5 and
Black's bad KB.
In the second case, after f2-f3,
White intends to continue with
'+.\Vd l -d2 which actually invites
the thematic reply . . . h5 (1 08).
108
Whilst the . . . h5 advance is
a normal defensive measure, the
situation is now considerably
different from the analogous pos­
itions already encountered where
White is put under pressure by the
advance of the h -pawn (e.g. see
Diagram I 01 ). The point is that
here White does not have a pawn
on g4 already under attack, which
gives him time first to fix the
enemy h-pawn in h2 - h4 and then
play ct:J g l -h3 - [2 in preparation
for g2--g4, wh ich then becomes a
I t is evident that the advance . ..
h5 has lost the greater part of its
defensive worth, as after g2-g4
and .te3-g5 White threatens to
open things up with gxh 5 . Apart
from pursuing his queenside
counterplay as fast as possible,
Black can also try to counter with
a timely . . . f7-f5 advance, with t he
idea of either smothering White's
play with . . . f5-f4 or gaining
sufficient space to withstand a
direct confrontation on the king­
side (e.g. after the likely further
exchange seq uence gxf5 gxf5, exf5
j,xf5).
Moving the queen out of
the pin
When Black does not get out of
the pin with an immediate . . . h7-
h6 White can seek to prevent it
by piaying � d 1 --d2 ( 1 1 0).
However, the attack on the e­
pawn provided by the manoeuvre

66

. . . CLJb8-d7-c5 generally necessi­
tates the defence f2--f3, after which
Black has both the possibility of
reimposing the type of position
which we have just examined (by
utilizing the tactical unpinning
with . . . h7-h6--see tactical ideas),
as well as the option of a quite
different plan following getting out
of the pin by simply moving the
queen.
Un pinning by 'iWd8-e8
. . .
In unpinning by . . . �d8-e8 Black
intends once again to fall back on
the defensive . . . h7-h5 in the event
of White continuing with a direct
kingside a ttack (I 1 1 ).
Black can play . . . h5 without
worrying about ii.xf6 followed by
gxh5 thanks to a tactical idea
b ased on the fact that White has
yet to castle : after ii.xf6 ii.xf6,
gxh5 'iWe7!, and Black can bring
about a kind of blockade on the
k ingside, e.g. hxg6 ii.xh4+ , � d 1
The Samisch Centre
111
fxg6, � h 6 g5 etc. After . . . h5, this
position appears to be very similar
to that already shown in Diagram
109, but here the advance of the
h-pawn is more positive because
of the attack on White's g-pawn.
Un pinning by 'i!lfd8-a5
. . .
After having played . . . lZJb8-d7-
c5 Black m ust almost always safe­
guard the position of this knight
with . . . a7-a5 . In such conditions,
unpinning the queen with . . .
� d 8-a5 reqmres a certain
amount of time since it is necessary
to play . . . c7-c6 and . . . a5-a4
before moving the queen. I n fol­
lowing this plan Black renounces
any ideas of defending on the k ing­
side and thus White's attack can
develop in its m ost basic form
( 1 1 2).
It is important here to outline
the principal ideas of both players :
while Black seeks to reinforce his
queenside counterplay by occupy-
67
The Samisch Centre
ing the c-file, advancing the b­
pawn, or even playing against the
points c3 and d4 with such
involved manoeuvres as . . . l2Jc5 -
a6-c7-b5, White m ust decide
whether to offer to go into a
sli ghtly favourable endgame (due
to the weakness of the d6 pawn
and Black's bad bishop) by playing
l2Jc3-dl, or to continue with the
attack, i n which case he will send
his k ing into safety by <;t>e 1 -fl­
g2 if necessary.
Should Black occupy the c-file
with . . . .l:tf8-c8, White can try to
force matters by hxg6 fxg6, �xf6
� xf6, "*'h6, but it should be
observed that Black can then
calmly sacrifice the h-pawn as
White has n o decisive continu­
ation after . . . .ie8, � xh7 + <;t>[8
producing a sharp position with
everything still to play for.
B lack's queenside counter­
play
Black will pursue his q ueenside
counterplay m various ways
68
depending partly on the attacking
system chosen by White, partly on
whether the c-file is open or not,
and partly on the attacking role
played by the black a- and b­
pawns.
We will now examine the most
usual methods of counterplay, not
forgetting that they can hardly
ever be separated from the defens­
ive measures which we have
already examined.
The c4 square and the
undermining of the lLlc3
When the c-file is open Black will
generally try to make the most of
it by removing the defensive l2Jc3
with the advance of his b-pawn.
This operation is frequently car­
ried out in conjunction with the
manoeuvre . . . l2J b 8-d7-b6 with
the intention of exploiting the
weakness of the c4 square should
the occasion arise ( 1 1 3).
Black plays . . . b4 (but not . . .
 The Samisch Centre

CL:Jc4, � xc4 and White retains queenside counterplay more ener­

his QB and thus all his k ingside getically. The most vigorous
attacking chances) and the action available is the sacrificing
opponent cannot avoid the of the b-pawn in order to open
exchange of his dark squared lines (114).
bishop for Black's QN: after
�xb6 (or CL:Je2 CL:Jc4, whilst CL:Jb l
would leave the white king very
exposed along the c-file) Black can
either reply with . . . bxc3, � f2
cxb2 +, or simply with . . . � x b6
as White cannot blockade the
queen side ( CL:Ja4 �a5, b3 �d7
etc.). In such positions it is very
dangerous for White to protect c4
by playing b2-b3 on account of
the pawn-storming breakthrough This common pawn sacrifice is
with . . . b5-b4 followed by . . . a6- aimed at obtaining open a- and b­
a5 -a4. files after . . . b 5, cxb5 a6, bxa6
Therefore, in order to avoid CL:Jxa6. Of course, the advance . . .
such problems White m ust be able b7-b5 can also be p refaced with
to retreat his QN to d 1 at the righ t the necessary support ( . . . a 7 -a6,
moment. This can sometimes be . . . � d 8-e8) thus avoiding the
arranged by managing to play sacrifice.
� c l -b 1 and l:rd l -cl i n good
time which removes the k ing from
its exposed position and enables The advance b2-b4
White to contest t he c-file. The When Black links the advance of
advance b2-b3 is really only feas­
the b-pawn with the placing of
ible when White has not yet
a k night on c5 (see for example
castled queenside as the d1 square
Di agram 1 1 4) White can some­
is immediately available and the
times find an opportune m oment
king will not be in any danger from
to play b2- b4, generally with the
the weakening of the q ueenside.
intention of setting up a kind of
block ade (115).
The sacrifice of the b-pawn
Here is an example where White
When the c-file is closed it is has grouped his forces ( �fl -d3-
clear that Black m ust pursue his c2, CL:Jg l -e2-cl) in such a way

69
The Samisch Centre

� c8, or b4 which is well answered

that he can consider pre-empting by . . . tt:Ja4, tt:Jxa4 � xa4, etc.
the opponent by playing b2-b4
himself, obtaining a sufficiently
solid and satisfactory position The simplifying ... lZJc5-a4

after either . . . lLJ b7. �d3 (to
prevent . . . a5 because of tt:Jx b5)
followed by tt:J b 3, or . . . tt:Ja4,
tt:Jxa4 bxa4, a3 when the k ing can
shelter on a2.
Sometimes Black seeks the
exchange of the tt:Jc3 by . . . l2:lc5 -
a4, either merely in order to sim­
plify the position or in pursuit of
various strategic aims (117).

Black's bayonet attack

with the a-pawn

It is logical therefore, in view of

the above, that when Black places
a knight on c5 he secures its pos­
ition with .. . a7-a5. Occasionally
this advance turns into a bayonet
attack ( 1 16).
Black's idea is evidently to Here is an example where Black
loosen the enemy king's position: obtains two strategic bonuses in
after . . . a3 the castled position add i tion to the simple liquidation
is weak ened following either b3, following . . . tt:J a4, l2:lxa4 �xa4,
which invites exploitation of the namely the prevention of q ueen­
diagonal a5 -e 1 and the c-file by side castling and the possi bility of
. . . c6 followed by . . . 'ti' a 5 and . . . blockadi ng the position on the

70
 The Samisch Centre

k ingside with . . . f4 without allow­

ing White to gain control of e4
as would be the case after an
immediate f4, �xc5 dxc5,
'2le4.

Same side castling:

queenside play by White

When Black begins his counter­

play by opening the c-file i n the
early stages of the game, White,
as we have already observed (sec
Diagram 93), can radically alter
his plans by cas tling k i ngside and
trying to use the open file to pen­
etrate on the queenside. The
method used by Wh ite to i ncrease
his pressure on the queenside var­
ies according to what Black has
done with his a- and b-pawns and
the length of time the wh ite king
stays i n the centre.
Occupation of the b6 square
Gi ven that Black has already
opened the c-file, he need only
play . . . a7 - a6 for Wh ite to be in
a position to try to fix the weak
b6 square by advancing the a­
pawn to a5 (frequently supported
by b2-- b4) with the intention of
occupying it with the manoeuvre
'2lc3-a4- b6 (1 1 9).

Undermining the lLlc5

When Black has placed a knight

on c5 and supported it by . . . a7--­
a5, one typical method of increas­
ing the pressure on the queensidc
is to undermine the k night with
the advance b2-- b4 ( 1 1 8).
This advance serves not only to
clear the c-file but also i nvites the The obvious aim of this
opening of the a-file which would manoeuvre is to occupy b6 in
help White's minor pieces to order to control c8 and thereby
exploit Black's queenside weak­ guarantee White uncontested con­
nesses (e.g. the b6 square). trol of the open file.

71
The S�imisch Centre

Attacking the b5 pawn natural queenside initiative.

Normally the key to Black's
When Black has his pawns on a6
counterplay is the advance . . . f7-
and b5 White can usually advanta­
f5 which will be prepared by mov­
geo usly pressurize this structure
ing the lLlf6 either to e8 or h5
with the advance a2-a4 ( 1 20).
(12 1 ).

White generally prefaces the

After the advance . . . f7-f5 Black
attack o n the b 5 pawn by fixing it
IS m a position to continue either
with b2-b4. The aim is to oblige
with . . . f5--f4, signalling a k ingside
Black to make the capture . . .
pawn storm, or occupy f4 with the
b5xa4 as after l:i. a 1 xa4 the black
knight even at the cost of a pawn
a-pawn beco mes extremely vul­
if necessary. White almost always
nerable.
seeks to defuse this flank demon­
The advance of the a-pawn can
stration by opening up the centre
also be prepared by b2-b3 in
by exf5 gxf5, producing the follow­
which case the idea is to provoke
ing structure { 1 22) .
. . . b5-b4 after which White will
be able to exert strong pressure
on Black's queenside with the
manoeuvre lZ:Jc3 -d 1-b2-c4.

Same side castling: Black's

kingside counterplay

In games where both players have

castled kingside it is logical for
Black to seek counterplay on that
wing to counterbalance White's Black has now obtained

72

dynamic central pawns, the half­
open g-file, and possibilities of
pressurizing White's weakened d­
pawn. I n retu rn, White no longer
has to fear the advance . . . f5-
f4 which would cede him total
control of the important e4 square,
and this strategic immobilization
allows him to pressurize the white
squares on the k ingside (in par­
ticular f5 and h5) by occupying
the b l -h 7 diagonal and placing a
k night on g3. Alternati vely, White
sometimes decides to play f3 -f4
with similar ideas to those previ­
ously examined in the p receding
chapter (see Chapter 2, 'The
advance f2-f4', p. 3 5).
Another way for Black to pur­
sue his kingside counterplay is to
push the h-pawn. This method is
especially suitable when White has
played an early l2J g l -e2-g3 ( 1 23).
The plan shown in the above
diagram (utilizing manoeuvres
very similar to those already seen
in Diagram 1 02) becomes a posi-
The Samisch Centre
tive attacki ng one when the kings
are castled on the same side. Black
can also implement this plan in
the absence of the l2Jg3 when
White has provoked the advance
. . . h5 (see Diagram 1 08) and then
opted to castle short after the
opening of the c-file.
2 Tactical ideas
In the early phase of the game
with this type of centre it is White's
position which is most vulnerable
tactically. The tactical themes can
be divided according to whether
or not White has played f2-f3.
The pseudo-sacrifice
. . . l2J xe4
When Wh ite omits the m ove f2-
f3, a t actical theme can arise (in
more than one variation and in
more t ha n one way) based on
the weakness of the long diagonal
created when White tries to chase
away the l2Jc5 by b2-b4 (1 24).
If White plays b4?, there follows
. . . l2J cxe4. l2Jxe4 l2J xe4, 'i¥ xe4
� f5 , 'iWf3 e4 ( 1 25 ) and Black
regains the material with interest.
Evidently, in order for this type of
combination to work there must
be a white piece on e2 in order to
73
The Samisch Cent re

l2J xe4 l2Jxd5, with very promising

compensation for the piece.

Exchanging the bad bisho p

As in the preced i ng chapter, the

bad bishop i s also a positional
problem for Black in this type of
centre. When White plays f2-f3,
Black sometimes obtains a tactical
possibility either to exchange the
bad bishop or bri ng it i nto active
block the protective retreat � f3-
play ( 1 2 7).
dl.

The real sacrifice of the

b l ack knight

A theme substantially analogous

to the forego ing i n its execution,
although markedly different in its
aim, arises when the c-file has been
opened, that is to say when the d ­
pawn is no longer protected by a
pawn on c4 ( 1 26). Here it is possible to play . . .
After b4'?! Black can destroy <� h6 because after i.xh6 � h4 +
White's pawn centre by means of Black regains the piece. Of course,
the knight sacrifice . . . l2J xce4, White can decline the exchange by

74
 The Samisch Centre

retreating his bishop to f2 but in

this case Black has clearly suc­
ceeded in activating his bad
bishop.

The tactical unpinning of

Black's KN

Black can utilize a very similar

idea to the above in o rder to get
out of the pin on his K N ( 1 28).
f6? White can open up the position
with the pseudo-sacrifice tt:Jxh 5 !
intending after . . . gxh 5 to play
g6, regaining the material with
advantage.

3 Illustrative games

Game 5
Spassky-A. Rodriguez
By playing . . . h6 Black obliges
To luca 1 982
his opponent to retreat the bishop
Siimisch Variation
since .txh6? tt:J xe4!, tt:Jxe4
�h4 + would be an advanta­ 1 d4 tt:Jf6
geous simplification. 2 c4 g6
3 tt:J c3 .t g7
The pseudo -sacrifice 4 e4 d6
tt:J g 3 xh5 5 f3

From White's point of view there
are scarcely any recurri ng tactical
themes in the early phase of the
game, but there is o ne idea worth
mentioning which arises from a
typical k ingside blockading situ­
ation ( 1 29).
If Black plays the thematic . . .
The origi nal idea of the Samisch
variation was to develop the que­
enside rapidly ( Ji.c l --e3, �d 1 -­
d2, 0-0-0) and at the same time
prepare a kingside pawn storm
(g2-g4, h2-h4-h 5). Similar ideas
can be seen in the variations 5 h3,
5 tt:J ge2 and in the Averbakh

75
The Samisch Centre
Variation (for which see G ame 6).
In all these variations, one of
White's major ideas is to reserve
the possibility of attacking on the
kingside after having blockaded
the centre with d4-d5 in answer
to the opponent's . . . e7-e5. For
example : ( 1 ) 5 h3 tLl bd7 6 �e3 e5
7 d5 tLlc5 8 � c2 a 5 9 tLl ge2 �d7
10 0-0-0 a4 1 1 g4 etc. (2) 5 tLlge2
0-0 6 tLlg3 e5 7 d5 c6 8 �e2 tLla6
9 h4 tLlc5 10 h 5 cxd5 1 1 cxd5 a5
1 2 �g5 �d7 1 3 � d2 etc.
It should be noted that White
is only committed to a k i ngside
attacking strategy when he has
castled queenside and frequently
draws on the flexibility of his pos­
ition to castle k ingside especially
when Black has opened the c-file.
5 0-0
Black can also delay castling by
first playing, for exam ple, 5 . . . c6
or immediately 5 . . . e5 using the
fact that 6 dxe5 dxe5 7 � xd 8 +
�xd8 does not promise White
any advantage. Such deviations
will usually merely revert t o the
main lines.
6 �e3
The normal continuation.
White can also slightly change the
order of moves as well as the
placing of the pieces by playing 6
tLlge2 or 6 �g5.
76
6 e5
This is the main line and histori­
cally the most important although
nowadays the continuation 6 . . .
tLl c6 has become more popular
(for which see Chapter 7).
Holding back the text-move in
favour of 6 . . . tLl bd7 gives White
the extra possibility of playing the
somewhat uncommon 7 tLl h 3 .
7 d5
White may also opt for a m ore
elastic central strategy by playing
7 tLlge2, albeit at the cost of losing
his flexi bility with castling, as the
development of the kingside is
delayed. I t should be observed
that White cannot keep all of his
options open by playing a move
such as 7 � d 3 because of a typical
tactical ri poste which exists when
White fails to clarify the central
situation- 7 . . . tLl g4! and White
finds himself in big trouble.
7 c6
Preparing the opening of the c­
file, which is Black's most direct
method of pursuing his queenside
counterplay, but it is also this
very openi ng of the c-file which
encourages White to maintain
flexibility with regard to his
castling i ntentions. The text-move,
therefore, represents an important
strategical choice directly opposed

to the strategy of keeping the c-file
closed with the idea of anticipating
the opponent's attack by aiming
for a rapid . . . t7-f5 . Am ongst
the various possibilities at Black's
disposal the most popular and
di rect method of preparing . . . t7-
f5 is to play 7 . . . Cb h 5 . Here
are various possible continuations
after the further 8 � d2 f5 : ( 1 ) 9
0-0-0 f4 1 0 �f2 �f6, and although
Black has cons tructed a good
blockade on the kingside, White
can shift the strategical emphasis
to the queenside, always having
the possibility of an advantageous
ending on his side due to Black's
bad K B; (2) 9 0-0-0 Cbd7 10 �d3
ct:l df6 1 1 Cbge2 fxe4 12 Cb xe4
Cb xe4 1 3 j, xe4 J.. f5 1 4 t2Jc3
ct:lf6 1 5 .tg5 ..t xe4 1 6 J.. xf6
�xf6 1 7 t2J xe4, and White has
avoided being obliged to capture
on e4 with a pawn; (3) 9 exf5 gxf5
1 0 0-0-0 t2Jd7 1 1 �d3 t2Jc5 1 2
.�c2 j_d7 1 3 t2J ge2 'ij'e8 1 4
h3, and White i s not i n the least
worried about 1 4 . . . f4 on account
of 1 5 � xc5 dxc5 1 6 Cbe4 with a
terrific position for White.
8 t2J ge2 ( 1 30)
Now White makes a move
which i mplies the taking of two
important strategic decisions. In
devel oping the KN before the KB
White shows himself ready to
castle long rather than short,
The Samisch Centre
although equally by developing
the K N before the q ueen White
indicates that he is in no h urry to
castle and is prepared to attack
whilst temporarily maintaining his
king i n the centre.
By playing 8 �d3 White co uld
have prepared kingside castling
with the intention of utilizing the c­
file to penetrate on the q ueenside,
e.g. : ( 1 ) 8 . . . cxd5 9 cxd5 Cb h 5 I 0
t2Jge2 f5 1 1 exf5 gxf5 1 2 0-0 t2Jd7
1 3 'ij' d2 Cbc5 1 4 �c2 a5 1 5
a3 �d7 1 6 b4, with complicated
play; (2) 8 . . . b5 (inviting 9 cxb5
which wo uld be well met by 9
. . . cxd5; note however that this
gambit would not be possible after
either 8 Cb ge2 or 8 'ij' d2 both of
which would maintain control of
d5) 9 t2Jge2 bxc4 1 0 �xc4 c5
after which Whi te's most solid
continuation is 1 1 0-0, again with
a rich middlegame to come.
White's final possibili ty, 8 � d2,
would suggest the intention of
castling queenside before advanc-
77
The S�imisch Centre

ing with g2---g4 . . . , but also leaves 10 a6

open the possibility of castling
By preparing b7-b5 Black
kingside! The following examples
more or less forces the opponent
show why we have stressed the
to get on with his kingside play
flexibility of White's position : 8
while keeping the king in the cen­
"iW d2 cxd5 9 cxd5 4Ja6 and now :
tre. In fact if White now plays 1 1
( 1 ) 1 0 0-0-0 �d7 1 1 � b 1 4Jc5
0-0-0? ! there follows 1 1 . . . b5 and
1 2 g4 "iW b 8 1 3 4Jge2 b 5 etc.; (2) 1 0
there is insufficient time to deal
�b5 4J h 5 1 1 4Jge2 f5 1 2 exf5
with the threat of . . . b5 -b4, e.g.
gxf5 1 3 0-0 etc.
1 2 � b l (if 12 g4?! 4J b6 1 3 g3 b4
Naturally, all of the above does
with advantage) 1 2 . . . 4J b6 1 3
not mean that when White plays
lLl c l (if 1 3 n e t 4J c4) 1 3 . . . .i.d 7
8 �d3 or 8 "iW d2 he is rigidly
1 4 4Jb3 b4 1 5 �x b6 "iW xb6 1 6
committed to following this or
4Je2 a5 with advantage t o Black.
that exact fo rmula-such absolute
rules do not exist in practice. Our 11 g4 h5 ( 1 3 I )
observ ations, whilst logically
founded, can embody no more 131

than a broad-based general truth.

8 cxd5
9 cxd5 4J bd7

Of cou rse, it is possible to play

several other moves here, some of
which (for example 9 . 4Je8 or
. .

9 . 4J h 5 ) specifically prepare the

. .

plan of a straigh tforward . . . f7-

f5 and thereby a totally different
method of counterplay to the one
which we shall see in the present
game.
10 "iWd2
At this point it is rare but not
impossible fo r White to prepare
kingside castling by playing 4Je2 -
c 1 followed by the development of
the K B.
In the interest of accu racy it
sho uld be noted that the present
game actually arose via the mo ve
order 1 d4 tt:Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 4J c3
.i.g7 4 e4 d6 5 f3 e5 6 l2J ge2 c6
7 d5 0-0 8 �g5 h6 9 �e3 cxd5
10 cxd5 a6 1 1 "iWd2 tt:J bd7 1 2 g4
h5.
The text-move constitutes t he
usual defensive reaction w hen
White begins the k ingside attack

78
 The Samisch Centre

with his king still in the centre. With his two last moves Black
has prevented Whi te's k night
12 g5
manoeuvres and now threatens to
The alternatives are as follows : win the h-pawn by playing
( 1 ) 1 2 h3 lLl h 7 1 3 0-0-0 (not 1 3 �, g7-f6.
gxh5 � h4 + ) 1 3 . . . h4 1 4 � b 1 lLld3 lLl xd3
18
i, f6 with the intention of continu­ 19 � xd3 i, £6
ing with . . . i,g5; (2) 1 2 i,g5 hxg4 20 i,f2 lLl f8
1 3 fxg4 lLlc5 and if 1 4 h3 Black
can play 1 4 . . . lLl cxe4! 1 5 lLl xe4 T h e weakness o f t h e f- a n d h ­
lLl xe4 1 6 i, xd8 lLl xd2 1 7 i,e7 pawns limi ts t h e mobility and
ld e8 18 i, xd6 lLl c4 etc. efficiency of White's pieces and
this helps Black fi nd the time to
12 lLl h7 bring his other knight on to the
13 h4 f6 scene.
The reactivation of Black's 21 0-0-0 lLld7
kingside pieces m ust be carried 22 �bl lLlc5
out q uickly as if he gi ves White 23 �e3?
time to play lLle2 -g3, the advance
of the f-pawn wo uld be bad on This m ove upsets the delicate
account of the pseudo-sacrifice balance of the position. White
lLlg3xh5. should have played 23 � d2 in
order to retain the possibility of
14 gxf6 ld xf6 answering the manoeuvre . . .
15 i,g2 i, f6-g7 and 'i¥ d 8-f8 with
The weak ness of his f-pawn i,f2---e3.
gives White problems with the 23 � g7!
development of his pieces. 24 tZJg1
15 b5 Now 24 � d2? would fail
16 lLl d l against 24 . . . lLl xe4. With the
tex t move White intends to meet
Heading for f2 from where the
Black's projected manoeuvre by
knight can be di rected either to
lLl g 1 -h3-g5.
the ki ngside ( ct:Jf2-h3 -g5) or to
the queenside ( lLl f2-d 3- b4-c6). 24 'if f8
25 �a t
16 lLlc5
17 lLlf2 ld fi! Spotting that 25 tZ:lh3? would

79
The Samisch Centre

lose a pawn to 25 lb xe4! 26

fxe4 J.. xh3 27 n xh3 n xf2 28
J.. f3 �c 8 !

25 a5
26 '2l h3 J.. xh3!

Th warting White's plans.

27 ll xh3 ll c7
28 ll hh l a4

Threatening . . . lbb3 + .
Bringing the k ing to the defence
29 'tt b l J.. h 6
of the d-pawn, but this should
Black increases his grip on the have been prefaced by . . . � f6 in
position. order to p revent White improving
the position of his KB.
30 �et b4
31 � xb4! 34 J..fl ! 'tt e7
35 J.. e2 J.. e3
The best c hance of salvation in 36 a3 � f4
a very difficult situation. 37 ll d3 J.. d 4
31 ll b8?! 38 J.. d 2 � g3
39 � g5 + 'ltf7
Black would have obtained an 40 ll hd l � f2
extremely dangerous attack after
3 1 . . . a 3 ! 32 b3 ll ac8 with t he F o r the second time the grip o n
threat of . . . lbd3. The text move the white king tightens.
appears very strong but permits 41 n t d2 n b7?
White to m uddy the waters with
a queen sacrifice. To keep winning chances Black
ought to have played 41 . . .
32 J.. xc5! ll xb4 �e l + ! 42 J.. d l J.. f2 43 ll e2
33 J.. xb4 ( 132 ) � fl with the idea of renewing the
siege on the h-pawn after . . . J.. g3.
A difficult position giving Spas­
sky the chance to squeeze the 42 n xd4!! exd4
maximum from his defensive 43 J.. d l 1W fl
possibilities.
Trying to hold on to the d-pawn
33 'ltf7?! by 43 . . . 1W g 1 ?! wo uld be asking

80
 The Samisch Centre

for trouble after simply 44 �a2 6 � g5

threatening �xa4 followed by e5.
This pre-pinning of the CZJ f6 is
44 � xd4 � c7 m uch the most played continu­
45 � a2 � c4 ation and characterizes the Aver­
46 � xc4 � x c4 bakh Variation. While it is clear
47 �bl � fl that the placement of the white
1 1
2-2 pieces is rather different from that
D raw! There is no way for Black in the Samisch Variation, the
to force victory, e.g. 48 � c2 � e 1 underlying affinities between the
49 � c l �e8 50 �c2 �d7 5 1 two variations nevertheless
� c l �c7 5 2 �c2 � b6 53 become evident i n a line such as
�d8 + �b5 54 �e7 � c4 5 5 6 �e3 e5 7 d5 CZJ bd 7 8 g4 CZJc5
�g5 � f2 + 56 � b l ! �d3 57 9 f3 h5.
� xa4 � xf3 5 8 � b 3 � xe4 59 The text move illustrates one of
�a2 and White's king has found the differences between the two
an impregnable fortress. vari ations in that 6 . . . e5? is now
unplayable on account of 7 dxe5
dxe5 8 � xd8 � xd 8 9 i.xf6
..txf6 1 0 CZJd5 etc.
Game 6
Agzamov-Kupreichik 6 CZJ bd7
USSR Ch. 1 98 1
Generally speaking, when Black
A verbakh Variation
plays this move and continues
1 d4 CZJ f6 with . . . e7-e5 he intends to get
2 c4 g6 out of the pin by moving his queen.
3 CZJ c3 � g7 Alternatively, he can put the ques­
4 e4 d6 tion to the bishop i mmediately by
5 � e2 6 . . . h 6 7 �e3 e5 8 d 5 after which
White's attack can develop i n two
An elastic move which leaves
ways, according to w hether he
open the future role of the f-pawn
defends the e-pawn with � d l -c2
and K N. Whilst it may simply
or f2-f3 following Black's stan­
transpose to o ther main lines, it
dard manoeuvre . . . CZJ b8 -d 7-c5,
can also lead to independent vari­
e.g. : ( 1 ) 8 . . . CZJ bd7 9 h4 CZJc5 1 0
ations with conceptual affinities to
'iW c2 c6 1 1 h 5 cxd5 1 2 cxd5 g 5 1 3
the Samisch Variation.
f3 ( 1 3 b4?! CZJ cxe4 1 4 CZJ xe4 CZJ xd5
5 0-0 15 'iW d2 �e6 16 g4 a 5 ! with

81
The Siimisch Centre
a dynamically superior game for
Black) 1 3 . . . a5 1 4 g4 �d7 and
Black fi nds himself in a passi ve
position where White will put his
k ing into safety on the ki ngside
and then try to take advantage of
the weak f5 square, Black's bad
bishop, and his spatial superiority
on the queen's wing; (2) 8 . . . tt:l bd 7
9 � d2 tt:Jc5 10 f3 aS 1 1 h4 ( 1 1
j, xh6? tt:Jfxe4! 1 2 fxe4 � h4 +
with advantage to Black) 1 1 . . . h5
and White has a promising version
of a typical Samisch type of pos­
ition given that he can now set
about opening up the position
by means of tt:Jg 1 - h3-f2, g2-g4,
j"e3-g5, g4xh5 etc. It is not
surprising, therefore, that Black
has explored the advantage of his
K N no longer being pinned with
variations such as 8 . . . ttJ bd 7 9
�d2 h5 1 0 f3 tt:J h 7 hoping to
cross White's plans by organizing
the advance . . . f7-f5.
Of cou rse, Black can also meet
the A verbakh Variation with 6 . . .
c5, which would lead, after the
natural 7 d5, to a type of a centre
which we will examine in the next
chapter.
7 �d 2
Preventing . . . h 7- h 6 a nd pre­
paring queenside castling.
7 eS
8 dS
82
Here the basic idea of the A ver­
bakh Variation becomes clear :
White prepares the pawn storm
g2-g4 followed by h2-h4-h 5, and
thanks to the particular placing of
the bishops Black is unable to
implement any of the k ingside
defensi ve measures typical of the
Samisch centre. To change this
state of affairs i t is essential fo r
Black to force f2-f3 (to regain
control of h 5) and to unpin the
KN.
8 tt:Jc5
The thematic m ove to provoke
f2-f3.
9 f3
The artificial defence 9 �f3 fails
to keep control of g4, e.g. 9 . . a5.
1 0 0-0-0 �d7 1 1 h 4 h5, whilst the
unclear variation 9 b4 tt:J cxe4 1 0
tt:J xe4 tt:J xe4 1 1 �xd8 !LJ xd2 1 2
�xc7 tt:Je4 1 3 f3 tt:Jf6 1 4 �xd6
has yet to appear in practice.
9 �d7
This move parries the threat of
b2-b4 as would the more direct 9
. . a5.
.
I t should be observed that Black
could still have unpinned the K N
b y playing 9 . . . h 6 , since after 1 0
�xh6? tt:J fxe4! 1 1 fxe4 � h4 +
he would regain the piece with
advantage.
After having succeeded in get-
 The Samisch Centre

ting White to play f2-f3 Black's advantage to Black.

most pressing problem is to get out
11 h5 (133)
of the pin on his KN. Normally he
does this by moving his queen
either to e8 (as we will see in the
present game) or to a5, e.g. 9 . . .
a5 1 0 h4 c6 1 1 g4 a4 1 2 h5 '*'a 5
13 tZ'l h 3 cxd5 14 c x d5 �d7 1 5
tZ'l f2 with a double-edged position
where, however, the Averbakh
Variation has chalked up the small
theoretical success of preventing
the opponent from carrying out
any defensive counter-measures
on the kingside while maintaining The key j ustification of this
his king in the centre. move lies in the fact that White
has not yet castled. The attempt
10 h4
to open up the position by 1 2
After 1 0 b4 tZ'la4 1 1 tZ'lxa4 �xf6 �xf6 1 3 gxh5 would run
�xa4 the exchange of the k nights up agai nst the reply 13 . . . '*'e7!
and prevention of White's castling exploiting the weakness of the h4-
queenside represent two definite e 1 diagonal and permitting Black
gains for Black, given that the to create a k ind of blockade on
attempt to trap the bishop by 1 2 the kingside after 14 hxg6 ilxh4 +
b5?! can be well met by 1 2 . . . a6! 1 5 � d 1 fxg6 1 6 '*' h6 g5 1 7 tZ'l h 3
'*' g7.
10 '*' e8
I t m ust be emphasized that the
The thematic unpinning which necessary defensive move 1 1 . . . h5
is also useful for the control of b5 is also an active move as it attacks
and queenside co unterplay which the g-pawn and White is too late
would follow should White decide to protect i t by tZ'l g 1 -h3 -f2 (which
to castle long. White manages to do in the second
line in the note to Black's sixth
11 g4
move above).
The sacrifice of the h-pawn
12 0-0-0
would have no j ustification, e.g. 1 1
h5? tZ'l x h 5 1 2 g4 tbg3 1 3 l:t h 3 A necessary move which, how­
tt:J xe2 1 4 tt:Jgxe2 f5 w i t h clear ever, gives Black a precise object

83
The Samisch Centre

of counterplay on the queenside.

12 hxg4
13 j,xf6

Forced as otherwise White

would lose a pawn.

13 j, xf6
14 fxg4 � d8

Black encourages White to play

g4-g5 which would cut off t he
white queen's access to h6. be ignored, e.g. 1 9 h5 b4 20 l2J b 1
15 �et? e4 2 1 h6 j,e5 22 g6 � f6 23 l::r d2
e3! 24 :a. c2 b3 etc.
White wo uld have done better
to play 15 g5 followed either by 19 cxb5 a6
l2Jg l -f3 or h4-h5. 20 b4

15 j, g7 With this move White shows

16 l2J h3 f5 that he is ready to accept the
This move is necessary as B lack sacrifice implicit in Black's 1 8th
needs to gain space in order to move. I n any case, it is impossible
be able to defend himself on the to keep the q ueenside files closed
k ingside. since Black could answer 20 b6
with 20 . . . l::r b8 ! E qually, after 20
17 exf5 gxf5 bxa6 l2Jxa6 Black's open a- and
18 g5 b-files would provide a sharp
After 1 8 gxf5 j,xf5 Black's counterbalance to White's threat­
defensive task would be easier. ening g- and h-pawns.

18 b5! ( 1 34) 20 axb5!

21 bxc5 b4
Black's hitherto dormant coun­ 22 lb b l :a. xa2 ( 1 35 )
terplay comes alive with the blind­
ing speed of a snakebite! All of Despite t he exposed position of
a sudden, White, who had seen hi s k ing, White wo uld appear not
himself as the attacker, is unex­ to be mistaken in hoping for a
pectedly confronted with real successful defence thanks to the
defensive problems, which cannot superior m obility of his pieces.

84
 The Samisch Centre

25 �e2
1 35

w After 25 cxd7 ll c5 26 4Jd2

� a7 Black suddenly has a crush­
ing attack.

25 b3!

Beginning a decisive attack in

which the b-pawn plays a vital
role.

26 cxd7
23 il.c4
Gi ven the unexpected reply to
A very natu ral move, given that his 24th, he might as well see
after 23 c6 b3 Black's threats things through to the bitter end.
would have become, to say the
26 � b4
least, pressing (24 . . � c2 mate!).
.

Threatening 27 . . . ll a 1 fol­
23 ll a5
lowed by 28 . . . � c3 + .
24 c6
27 ll d2
Evidently (and understand­
ably!) White expects to be able to In order to answer 28 ll a I with
force the black bishop back to the 28 . . . :a b2.
back rank before capturing the
b-pawn, but a shocking surprise 27 e4
awaits him. With hindsight one 28 4J f4 ll a l
might ad vise 24 � xb4 as a better 29 ll h3 ll. c3!
possibility, although after 24 . . . White has been able to prevent
ll xc5 25 �d2 f4 Black would the deadly incursion of the black
have more than sufficient com­ queen, but cannot prevent the equ­
pensation for the sacrificed ally fatal arrival of the black
material. bishop.
24 � b8!! ll.xb3
30
This stunning second sacrifice There is no way of defending
enables Black to keep his ( 30 ll b2 ll.x b2 + etc.).
impo rtant b-pawn and shatters
White's defensive hopes. 30 ll. xd2 +

85
The Samisch Centre

White's last hope lay in the 31 ll xbl +

conti n uation 30 � x b3? 3 1 32 �xb1 � xd2
ll b2! 33 l2Je6 ll b8
34 d8� + ll xd8
31 � xd2
35 l2J xd8 e3
Or 3 1 � b2 � d4 + 3 2 l2J c3 36 l2Je6 e2
ll e l and W ill S , e.g. 3 3 � h 5 37 ll h 1 f4
j, c t + etc. 0- 1

86
4 The Aver b a kh Centre

Main Line: A verbakh Variation Other Variations

1 d4 l2Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 t2Jc3 �g7 4 5 t2J f3 0-0 6 �e2 c5 7 d5 5
e4 d6 5 �e2 0-0 6 �g5 c5 7 d5 t2J ge2 0-0 6 tt:Jg3 c5 7 d5
(136)
All of these variations, including
the main variation, can arise via
the following move order: 1 d4
l2J f6 2 c4 c5 3 d5 g6 4 t2Jc3 �g7
5 e4 d6, which allows White the
extra possibility of continuing his
development by 6 �d3 followed
by l2Jge2.

1 Strategic Ideas

This type of centre can arise in The strategical ideas common to

many different ways when White the above variations can be
discourages the traditional . . . e7- ded uced from the pawn structure
e5 or when Black simply prefers (137).
to play . . . c7-c5. For example, 1
d4 tLJf6 2 c4 g6 3 lLJc3 i.Lg7 4 e4
d6 and now :

Four Pawns Attack

5 f4 0-0 �e2 (or 6 lLJf3 c5 7
d5) 6 . . . c5 7 d5

Systems with h2-h3

5 t2J f3 0-0 6 h3 c5 7 d 5
5 h3 0-0 6 �g5 c5 7 d 5

87
The A verbakh Centre

It is clear that White has a

considerable spatial advantage i n
t he centre a n d th a t passive play
by the opponent would allow him
to organize the i mportant
breakthrough e4-e5 (possibly sup­
ported by f2-f4) which would
make things critical for Black.
Thus Black is obliged to react
positively and chip away at the
opponent's spatial advantage by
challenging White's c- and d­ gives Black's queenside counter­
pawns, either by . . . b7-b5 or . . . play a welcome boost. Given that
e7-e6, attacking the base and head it is not good for White to trade
of the pawn chain respectively. pawns by t2Jc3xb5 t2Jf6xe4, White
Sometimes these two ideas can has no other choice but to accept
co-exist, the one acting as the the pawn by c4x b5 leading to the
complement of the other. The following situation (139).
order in which they are played,
however, has important conse­
quences for the subsequent strat­
egies, and therefore we will exam­
ine them separately according to
which move is played first.

B lack's flank attack

. . . b7-b5

This attack almost always gambits

the b-pawn without any prep­
aration ( 138).
White cannot support his b­
pawn by b2-b3 because of the
action of the opponent's KB on
the long diagonal. Also, should
White protect his e-pawn (against
the threat of . . . b5-b4) then the
openmg of the b-file ( . . . b5xc4)
Here Black's main aim is to
maximize his prospects of q ueen­
side counterplay by opening the
a- and b-files with . . . a7-a6. Bas­
ically, White has two ways of
reacting to this advance : to simply
accept the gambit with b5xa6, or
to keep the queenside relatively
closed by supporting the b-pawn

88

with a2-a4 (which is more com­
monly seen in practice).
The capture b5xa6
When White continues with the
capture b5xa6 Black obtains his
aim of openi ng lines on the q ueen­
side ( 1 40).
A very similar situation can
arise when Black prepares the
gambit . . . b7--b5 by playing . . .
a7--a6 and there follows c4x b5
a6xb5 and i.( ct:J)xb5.
It should be noted that Black
almost always welcomes the
exchange of light-sq uared bishops
along the a6-fl diagonal when
possible. There are two reasons
for this : to generally weaken the
light squares in the enemy camp
(especially d3), and to facilitate his
development and thereby the com­
m unication of his rooks.
I t is also logical that following
the captures on b5 and a6 White
falls behind in development to a
The A verbakh Centre
certain extent and therefore Black
is particularly motivated to mobil­
ize his forces as q uickly as possible
( 1 4 1 ).
The diagrammed positiOn
shows a typical development of the
black pieces. Amongst the various
plans at Black's disposal, he can
increase the pressure on the b-file
and on White's e-pawn by playing
. . . .l:t b8-b4, or di rect his pieces
towards the weakened d3 square,
e.g. by . . . ct:J a6-b4, . . . ct:J f6-d7-
e5, . . . � a 5 -a6 and/or . . . c5-
c4. The . . . c5-c4 advance almost
always plays a part i n Black's
plans due to its versatility and
general usefulness : it fixes both the
b-pawlLJlnd the d3 square, and
also frees the c5 square for a
k night. When Black's QN has not
been used to make the recaptu re
. . . lZJ b8 xa6, it can pressurize Whi­
te's b-pawn by means of the
manoeuvre . . . ct:Jb8-d7-b6-a4.
On White's side, when he is
unable to disrupt the harmony of
89
The A verbakh Centre
the enemy forces by achieving the
advance e4-e5, he can hardly do
more than defend as well as poss­
ible and try to carry his m aterial
advan tage into the ending.
Supporting the b-pawn
with a2-a4
When White protects his b-pawn
with a2-a4 Black finds i t rather
more difficult to develop his que­
enside pieces as shown in the fol­
lowing Diagram ( 1 42).
Generally speaking, Black can
choose between two plans accord­
ing to whether he wants to persist
with his queenside play or switch
to the central counter . . . e7-e6 in
order to complete his attack on
White's centre.
In the first case, Black must
sooner or later make the capture
. . . a6xb5 so as to solve his develop­
ment problems and thereafter try
to dismantle White's blockade on
a4 and b5 by attacking the b5
90
point with all the resources at his
disposal. Placing the black q ueen
on a5 plays a useful role in this
plan, setting up potential pins on
both the a-pawn and the QN ( 1 43).
In this k ind of position White
not only needs to protect the e 1 -
a 5 diagonal by either retreating or
developing the QB to d2 (as shown
in the diagram), but must at the
same time pay attention to the
possible sacrifice of the black
q ueen : . . . j, xb5, � xb5 "i¥ xb5,
axb5 .ll xa 1 + . In view of this
possibility and/or to escape the
pressure along the long diagonal
h8-a 1 , White not infrequently has
recourse to the stabilizing move
.ll a l -a3.
For his part, Black can increase
the pressure on the j, b5 with
manoeuvres such as . . . �f6-e8-
c7 or (before playing . . . j,c8-
a6) . . . � b8-a6- b4, . . . � c8-a6
followed by . . . .ll f8-b8. Another
possibility for B lack is to delay the
capture . . . a6xb5 using the q ueen

sortie to a5 to attack White's e­
pawn by . . . "iW a5-b4 ( 1 44).
144
The threat to the b-pawn is
illusory (on . . . "iW xb2? comes ldb l
"iW a3, ld b3 trapping the queen),
but that to the e-pawn is real. After
White protects the e-pawn, Black
can either bring about a very simi­
lar type of game to that shown in
diagram 1 43 by playing . . . a6xb5
or try to interfere with the bishop's
protection of b5 by playing . . . c5-
c4. It is also quite evident that the
black queen is walking a tightrope,
since it is in danger of being
trapped by, for example, f2-f3,
� d 1 -c 1, ti:lc3-d I etc.
In the second case (when Black
switches to the central counter . . .
e7-e6) Black sees the attack on
the c4 pawn as merely the first
stage in the destruction of White's
pawn centre and spatial advan­
tage. The intention of the further
advance . . . e7---e6 is to weaken the
white d-pawn by . . . e6xd 5 and
simultaneously open the e-file,
The A verbak h Centre
which explains why White norm­
ally decides to capture first with
d 5xe6. After the recapture
�c8xe6 (the pawn capture . . .
f7xe6 is more vulnerable to an
eventual breakthrough with e4-
e5) Black's principal strategic aim
is to achieve the liberating advance
. . . d6-d5 ( 1 45).
To resolve the remaining prob­
lems of queenside development,
Black generally takes on b5 and
then manoeuvres the k night to
either c7 or b4 via a6.
T h e centra l c o u n t e r ... e7-
e6
When Black opts to challenge the
oppone-ftt'' s centre with the central
counter . . . e7-e6, White has to
make an important strategic
decision ( 1 46).
He must make the choice
between taking on e6, with the
intention of creating a concrete
target in the weak pawn on d6
91
The A verbak h Centre
(albeit at the cost of some of his
spatial advantage) or sitting tight
in order to maintain his structural
advantage, leaving Black the
option of exchanging if he wishes.
In the latter case, if f2 --f4 has
been played, White gains the extra
possibility of answering . . . e6xd5
with the breakthrough e4-e5
(1 47).
The situation shown in the diag­
ram is extremely volatile, given
that Black has several ways of
meeting White's e-pawn thrust ( . . .
4Jf6-g4, . . . 4Jf6-e4, . . . dxe5)
each leading to different complica­
tions. The theory of this possibility
92
is still far from being definitively
worked out.
The o p e n i n g of the e - f i l e
Apart from this last case, t h e fol­
lowing pawn structure can arise
( 1 48) when White leaves the
opponent the option of exchang­
ing in the centre with . . . exd5,
exd5 (the recapture cxd 5 would
transpose to the main type of
centre of the M odern Benoni).
Generally speaking, the opening
of the e-file can be interpreted by
Black in two very different ways :
as a route to simplification of t he
heavy pieces, or as the beginning
of an underm ining of the d-pawn
to be completed by attacking the
c-pawn with . . . b7--b5 (either with
or without the support of . . . a7-
a6).
The former approach first and
foremost aims at simplifying to a
drawn ending or even one favour­
able to Black should he manage

to obtain a knight against the
opponent's light-squared (bad)
bishop. This strategy of simpl­
ification revolves principally
around the squares e5 and e4,
the occupation of which is often
supported by some pressure along
the open file. The rapid mobiliz­
ation of his k ingside allows Black
to take the initiative on the e-file
in the early phase of the opening
by playing . . . Jdf8-e8 . Thus in the
development of his forces White is
obliged to place at least one piece
on the e-file in order to cover his
king.
The second approach is more
dynamic and basically aims to
weaken White's d-pawn and,
occasionally, to open lines on the
q ueenside in order to exert press­
ure on White's a- and b-pawns. To
attain these ends Black frequently
gambits his b-pawn.
These two diverse plans can also
co-exist given that the advance (or
the gambit) . . . b7-b5 can follow
at any time, even after an initial
phase of simplification. I t should
not be forgotten, however, that the
choice of plan is often circum­
scribed by the position of the white
pieces.
Not surprisingly, White pursues
diametrically opposed objectives
to those of the opponent. Given
his spatial advantage, he will try to
avoid simplification of the position
The Averbakh Centre
and prevent the undermining
ad vance . . . b7-b5 by meeting . . .
a7 -a6 with the restraining a2--a4.
In addition, White has a certain
struct ural advantage since Black's
d-pawn is potentially vulnerable.
His long-term idea is to gain con­
trol of the open e-file by blending
a prudent nurturing of his space
advantage with pressure against
the weak d6 pawn.
White can pursue his plans with
various modes of development,
each of which has its individual
characteristics and affects the stra­
tegic choices of both players.
Therefore, before examining both
the basic and particular strategic
ideas we will briefly review White's
various piece layouts.
T h e i d e a l set-u p a n d the
a d va n ce h 2- h 3
We can define the ideal set-up as
that which fulfils the following :
( I ) s ufficient control of e4 and e5;
(2) prevention of the active devel­
opment of Black's QB; (3) pressu­
rization of the weak d-pawn or
pinni t\g of the L'Llf6; (4) clearance
of the e-file for the rapid inter­
vention of the rooks ( 1 49).
This ideal set-up is possi ble only
when Black delays the opening of
the e-file until after White has
castled, whereas with correct play
White will be obliged to place a
93
The A ve rba k h Centre
piece on the e-file in order to
protect his king from Black's
pressure.
The advance h2 - h 3 frequently
recu rs in White's plans, as we shall
see, and has the clear but not sole
purpose of preventing Black's QB
developing actively by . . . iic8-­
g4.
P rotect i n g t h e k i n g by
iic1 -e3
White may decide to cover the e­
file with ii c l -e3, intending to
reach the ideal set-up by moving
it to f4 or g5 after castling kingside
( 1 50).
94
White's control of f5 and g4
restricts the development of
Black's QB and consequently
makes the communication of the
black rooks more difficult to
achieve. This in turn encourages
and helps White to try to obtain
control of the open file.
In such positions, the move h2-
h3 is indispensable as it not only
prevents both . . . iic8-g4 and
. . . tZJf6-g4 but also provides a
retreat for the QB if it goes to f4
and is attacked by . . . tZJf6-h5.
Again, in such positions Black
has j ust sufficient space to organ­
ize his queenside counterplay (by
means of . . . 4J b 8 -- - a6-c7, . . . a7-­
a6, . . . .ll a8-b8, . . . iic8-d7)
which, however, can be hampered
by a2--a4-a5 or by creating press­
ure against the d6 pawn. Thus it
can be readily understood that
Black's principal objective is to
simplify the position in order to
gain greater freedom of move­
ment, and he will generally seek
to do this either by occupying
e5 or e4 with a k night, or by
exchanging the dark-squared bish­
ops by . . . ii g7-h6, as we shall
see later on.
P rotect i n g the k i n g by
tZJ g 1 -e2
The ideas behind this set-up are
not very different from those we

have just examined above. I n this
case too, White hopes to disrupt
the opponent's queenside develop­
ment, and will place the Q B on f4
or g5 and then clear the e-file
by playing 4Je2-g3 after having
castled ( 1 5 1 ).
.I ..t
,...---.
...-::- .=-=----;:
-
151
Here the advance h2--h3 Is
mainly directed against the
manoeuvre . . . 4Jf6 -g4--e5 since
the bishop sally . . . �c8--g4 can
be rebuffed by f2 f3. Although
it is i nitially easier for Black to
occupy the e5 square, White can
always challenge its control with
the advance f2- f4. This can some­
times be followed by a later f4--f5
(if Black i s not in a position to
exploit the e5 square immediately)
which can either be the i ntroduc­
tion to a kingside attack or simply
herald renewed pressure along the
h 2 --b8 diagonal.
P rotect i n g the k i ng by
�f1 -e2
The development of the KB on e2
can be interpreted i n various ways
The A verbak h Ce ntre
according to whether it is primar­
ily combined with either 4Jg 1 -
e2--g3, lLlg 1 -f3 o r � c l --g5.
In the first case White first
manoeuvres his knight to g3
before protecting the k ing by
�f1 -e2 (1 52).
Now White has a very similar
position to that in the preceding
diagram, where \Vhite can try to
dispense with the move h2-h3 (at
least in the early stages of the
game) since after castling the g4
square is controlled by the KB
and the queen. Additionally, from
g3 White's k night controls the
i mportant squares e4 and f5.
In the second case, White has
improv� control over e5 thanks
to the k night on f3 (1 53).
On the other hand, even when
White has played h2-h3, Black
has no problem in developing his
QB or simplifying by . . . 4Jf6-e4.
In the third case, where White
develops his Q 8 to g5, the pin on
the 4J f6 can prove every bit as
95
The A verbak h Centre
troublesome to Black, in the devel­
opment of his pieces, as the press­
ure against the d-pawn previously
noted ( 1 54).
White's idea here is to keep
some flexibility regarding the
development of his KN so as to
be able to play either h 2 -h3 and
ttJ g l -f3 (as in Diagram 1 53), or
even expend an additional tempo
with ke2-d3 and ttJgl-e2 (as in
Diagram 1 5 1 ) according to cir­
cumstances.
Black can get out of the pin
either by playing . . . h 7-h6 (which
of course must be done before
White has time to play 'Wdl-d2)
96
or simply by moving the queen
(usually to b6).
G i v i n g u p c a st l i n g
White has also tried giving up his
right to castle in order to achieve
the i deal set-up for his minor
pieces ( 1 55).
After �e 1 -fl White can resolve
the problem of linking his rooks
by playing g2-g4 followed by
�fl -g2. It is not at all clear
whether the loss of castling rights
is too high a price to pay for the
advantages obtained.
The wea k n ess of B l a c k ' s
d-pa w n
One of the most important struc­
tural features of this type of pos­
ition, as we have already observed,
is the weakness of Black's d-pawn.
The way in which White goes
about pressurizing it depends on
whether he has developed his KN
on e2 or f3.

When White has played l2J g l ­
f3 and manoeuvred the Q B t o h2,
he can bring up the queen in order
to increase the pressure on d6
( 1 56).
156
In this kind of situation the
basic threat is � f4 tt:Je8, tt:Je4.
When White has played tt:Jg 1 -
e2, on the other hand, the pressure
on d6 can be increased by the
manoeuvre tt:Je2--g3-e4 ( 1 5 7).
The utility of the advance h2-
h3 in implementing this type of
plan is clear both in providing a
retreat for the bishop, in case of a
continuation such as lZ'lge4 tt:J h 5,
The A verba k h Centre
iih2 (not ii xd6? f5 and Black
wins material, and preventing
Black from blocking the pressure
on d6 with the manoeuvre . . .
tt:Jf6-g4-e5. Normally it is best
for the tt:Jg3 to go to e4, not only
because the tt:J c3 must keep b5
under control, but also because
after l2Jce4 there could follow . . .
tt:Je8 exposing the white pieces
to possible harassment by Black's
kingside pawns (e.g . . . . h7- h5-h4
or . . . f7-f5 followed by . . . g6-g5).
B l a c k ' s d a rk s q u a re p l ay
a n d t h e i m p o rt a n c e of e 5
From Black's point of view, occu­
pation of e5 is important, not only
for simplification, but also to cover
a possi ble attack on d6. It is poss­
ible for Black to manoeuvre both
knights to e5 : . . . tt:J b8-d7-e5 or
. . . tt:Jf6-g4-e5. Of course, this
second possibility is only possible
if White delays or omits the
prophylactic h2-h3. When White
has played tt:Jg l-f3 Black must
provide extra piece support for e5
in order to avoid a situation where
Black is obliged to recapture with
the d-pawn, which not only cedes
White a protected passed pawn
but also closes both the e-file and
the h8-a 1 diagonal. Occasionally,
also, it can be the case that the
simple . . . .i::rf8-e8 gives White the
upper hand with a tempo-gaining
97
The A vcrbak h Centre

exchange 4:Jxe5 � xe5, �f4. This

explains why Black often has
recou rse to the move . . . 4:J f6-h5,
which not only reinforces e 5 with
the K B but also increases the
pressure on the dark squares m
general. ( 1 58).

always in a hu rry to make since it

means giving up a well centralized
knight for a potentially bad
bishop.

The exc h a ng e of B l a c k ' s

d a rk-s q u a red b i s h o p
Here, Black's control of f4
When White covers his k i n g b y
enables him to seek simplification
playing � c l -e3 Black can utilize
by . . . 4:Jd7-e5 without having to
the pin on the e-file to exchange
worry about any possible negative
dark-squared bishops by . . . �g7-
effects of an exchange. Black might
h6. White can simply respond by
also consider the optimistic . . . f7
--­

castling and leaving the pawn en

f5 which. however, has the draw­
prise ( 1 60).
back of permanently weakening
e6. In fact, White has· even played 160
(after castling, of course) the
manoeuvre �g5 f6, kd2 so as to
leave Black with li ttle option but
to continue with . . . f6-f5.
Obviously, when White
develops the K N on e2 it is easier
for Black to occupy e5 ( 1 5 9).
I n such positions the pressure
on the c-pawn prevents White avo­
iding the possible exchange of his The pawn is taboo because . . .

KB which, however, Black is not � xe3,if d2 would rapidly give

98

White a mating attack by �h6
and t'Llg5. After the capture fxe3
the pawn structure changes and
supplies White with new possibilit­
ies of attacking along the f-file, as
well as solidifying the centre with
e3-e4 (not forgetting to keep an
eye constantly on possible e4-e5
breakthroughs), whilst Black will
tend to try to obtain further simpl­
ification by, for example, . . . t'Llb8-
d7--e5, and dig in on the k ingside
with moves such as . . . � g7, . ..
t'Llg8 and . . . f6.
B l ac k ' s use of e4
It is obviously easier for Black to
simplify the position using the e4
square when White has played
.tfl - e2 and t'Llgl-f3. This nat­
urally tends to lead to Black
obtaining control of e4 ( 1 6 1 ).
161
For example, here Black has
broken the pin on the K N by
playing . . . h 7--h6 and is now ready
to simplify with . . . t'Llf6-e4. White
The A verba k h Ce ntre
sometimes decided to complicate
matters by playing g2--g4 in order
to prevent . . . cuf6--e4 and force
. . . �tf5 -e4 instead (as otherwise
.te2- d3 would follow).
The same basic ideas apply
when Black unpins by . . . �d8-
b6 ( 1 62).
White can now harass Black's
QB by t'Llh4 t'Lle4, t'Llxe4 itxe4,
f3 after which the safest reaction
utilizes a counterattack on White's
offside knight : . . . � xb2, .id: cl h6
(the unclear sacrifice . . . � xd2 + ,
�xd2 .txd5!? has also been
tried), .txh6 � xd2 + , .txd2
.tf6 and Black has almost equa­
lized.
Alternatively, when White
places his KB on d3 Black can
react with the radical and anti­
positional . . . .tc8--f5 if he wants
to maintain control of e4 ( 1 63).
After . . . .tf5, .txf5 gxf5 Black
obtains control of e4 and active
piece play in compensation for his
shattered kingside pawns (1 64).
99
The A verba k h Centre
After . . . ct:Je4 White normally
plays ct:Je2 and tries to exploit
Black's kingside weaknesses with
manoeuvres like ct:Je2-f4-h 5 .
Finally, Black h a s yet another
way of fighting for control of e4
by deflecting White's QN with the
gambit . . . b7 -b5 ( 1 65).
1 00
Following . . . b5, ct:Jxb 5 (for the
consequences of cxb5 see below)
Black succeeds in his aim of occu­
pying the e4 square with . . . ct:Je4,
after which the tactical threats
( . . . � a5 + and . . . ct:Jg3) almost
always enable Black to regain the
b-pawn.
The b - p a w n g a m b i t
Apart from the previous example,
the b-pawn gambit is almost
always played with the idea of
weakening White's d-pawn. To
this end it is obviously necessary
to make White play cxb5, as other­
wise the d-pawn would remain
protected. As we have already
observed. this gambit can be
played at various stages in the
game.
Black has three ways of trying
to force the capture with the c­
pawn. Firstly, he can prepare the
gambit with the advance . . . a7-
a6 (J 66).

Of course, White can easily
counter this idea by answering . . .
a7--a6 with a2-a4.
Secondly, Black can play the
preparatory manoeuvre . . . 4Jb8-
a6-c 7 ( 1 6 7).
167 .I
Now 4Jc3xb5 would be fol­
lowed by the exchange of k nights
producing the same pawn struc­
ture as if White had initially cap­
tured with the pawn.
Lastly, the gambit can be played
after first exchanging White's Q N
which is almost always achieved
by playing . . . 4J f6-e4 ( 1 68).
168 J..
The attack on White's d-pawn
is generally carried out by the
The A verbak h Centre
queenside pieces, e.g. . . . 4Jb8-
a6-c7 or . . . 4Jb8-d7-b6 (-f6),
and . . . �c8- b7 (unless the bishop
already finds itself on e4). Some­
times the queen can reinforce the
pressure via . . . � d 7-f5 .
W h i t e ' s p ress u re o n t h e
f-fi le
Positions with an open e-file,
where White h as advanced his
f-pawn early on, deserve special
mention. These generally occur i n
combination w i t h t h e develop­
ment of the KB on e2 ( 1 69).
White's plan is to castle and
then play ..te2-d3 in preparation
for the opening of the f-file. The
pressure down this file can be
increased by moves such as tt:Jf3-
g5 and � d 1 -f3. A ttempts to hold
up the f-pawn's advance by . . .
�c8-f5 tend to produce some
simplification (after ..te2-d3), but
are ineffectual in the long run since
W hite can always arrange support
by h2-h3 and g2-g4. Normally,
101
The A verbak h Centre
therefore, Black reacts either by
trying to play . . . t7--f5 himself or
by seeking to exploit the weaken­
ing of e3 by . . . tt:Jf6-g4-e3 in the
hope of depriving White of his
dark-squared bishop, without
which his attack loses much of its
force. These two ideas can some­
times be played together.
Wh ite plays d 5xe6
As we observed in talking about
Diagram 1 46, White can answer
Black's central counter . . . e7 -e6
with the capture d5xe6. In order
to speed his development, Black
normally prefers to recapture with
his bishop producing the following
type of situation (1 70).
The kingside pawns might be
arranged slightly differently, given
that Black m ay have a pawn on
h6 having driven off a pinning
bishop and White may have
played f2-f4.
By taking on e6 White above
1 02
all exposes the weakness of Black's
d-pawn which he can then set
about exploiting in two different
ways according to whether he
decides to try to win it or to mount
a kingside attack under its cover.
In the latter case, White does not
give up his threat against the cl­
pawn but keeps it, as it were, in
reserve, in accordance with the
maxim that the threat is stronger
than the execution.
Sa c r i f i c i ng t h e d-pawn
Given the ease with which White
can attack the d6 pawn (.tf4), and
the fact that Black's structural
inferiority makes passive defence
rather hopeless, it is entirely under­
standable that Black sho uld have
recourse to the sacrifice of his
d-pawn ( 1 7 1 ).
171
I n compensation for the pawn
Black gets a lead in development
and active piece play : the black
queen will be usefully placed on

the queenside, while the QN will
observe d4 from c6 and a rook will
come to the d-file. No definitive
evaluation of the gambit can be
given yet, as the diagrammed pos­
ition is the starting point of many
complicated theoretical variations
which have frequently seen
improvements for both sides.
W h i t e ' s k i n g s i d e att a c k
White can opt to build a kingside
attack, as we have already
observed, which can be based
either on the advance of the f­
pawn or the h-pawn. We will
examine both possibilities in turn
( 1 72).
The weakness of d5 becomes
even more apparent after the Sl.e6
is chased away and the tt:Jf6 is
pinned. This attacking set-up
implies castling kingside since fl
is the natural square for the KR.
The h-pawn advance is only
used when Black has previously
The A verba k h Centre
weakened his castled position with
. . . h 7-h6 ( 1 7 3).
In s uch positions White can
further weaken Black's position
either by playing h4-h5, which
forces the reply . . . g6--g5, or by
making the pseudo-sacrifice
tt:J g l -f3--g5 + breaking open the
h-file. In the latter case, the KR is
best placed on h 1, and conse­
quently White will seriously con­
sider castling q ueenside.
Sim ultaneously with the imple­
mentation of this strategy White
can maintain pressure against the
d6 pawn, with the idea of captur­
ing it at a sui table moment.
T h e d 4 sq u a re
Black's occupation of d4, which is
his most frequently used weapon
in combating White's plans,
shields the d-pawn and invites a
structural alteration of the pos­
ition ( 1 74).
The blocking of the d-file
1 03
The A verbak h Ce ntre
reduces the weakness of the d­
pawn and White gains no appreci­
able advantage from doubling t he
pawns by capturing on d4. I n fact
after 'Llxd4 cxd4, 'Ll d 5 (so as not
to lose the e-pawn) . . . �xd5, exd5
'Lld 7 ( 1 75)
. . . Black's position is only appar­
ently compromised, as in reality
he has strong counterplay on the
dark squares and the dou bled
pawns are also much less vulner­
able than they look.
1 04
B l a c k ' s p ress u re a g a i nst
the e- a n d c - p a w n s
Another element in Black's coun­
terplay is the possibility of organ­
izing annoying pressure against
White's central pawns ( 1 76).
The thematic sortie . . . "iWd8-
b6 allows Black to increase the
pressure against e4 or c4 and
White is frequently constrained to
defend by tLJf3-d2, which cedes
Black control of d4 and creates
problems with developing the
queenside. In additi on, when
White chases Black's QB away
from e6 with f2-f4-f5 Black can
augment the pressure against e4
with . . . � d7-c6.
I n general, Black is quite happy
if White meets the pressure by
playing tLJc3-d5 as this permits
him to cover the d-pawn by cap­
turing on d5 .
B l a c k a n sw e rs d 5xe6 w i t h
.. . f7xe6
Black sometimes decides to
answer d 5xe6 with . . . f7xe6,

especially when an attack of the
type shown in Diagram 1 72 is
clearly looming on the horizon.
The position then takes on the
following strategic characteristics
( 1 7 7).
The occupation of d4 with his
knight remains one of Black's
prime objectives especially since
its capture would give Black a
passed pawn, moreover one which
could be protected by . . . e6-e5
after White's QN moves away.
Sometimes, however, either
because White is threatening e4-
e5 or simply through the necessity
to protect a knight on d4, Black
commits himself to playtng . . . e6 -
e5 even when Whi te's knight can
occupy d5.
For his part, White rests his
hopes on the possible break­
throughs with his central pawns
coupled with his attacking chances
on the kingside which he can aug­
ment by moves s uch as lZJf3 --g5
and/or ifd l ---e 1 -h4.
The Averbak h Centre
2 Tactical ideas
There are not that many establ­
ished, recurring tactical ideas in
the Averbakh type of centre but
we detail those which exist as
follows.
T h e p i n o n W h i t e ' s a - pa w n
When Black employs a . . . b7 - b5
type gambit attack against White's
c-pawn the following basic situ­
ation tends to arise ( 1 7 8).
When White's rook on a 1 IS
unprotected he must always be on
the lookout for attempts by the
opponent to exploit the pin on his
a-pawn tactically. For example, in
the above diagram Black can play
. . . .txb5, 'Llxb5 ifxb5, axb5
1l xa 1 + winning material. Some­
times such combinations can be
made not necessarily in order to
win material but so as to gain a
strong initiative in sacrificing the
queen for rook and minor piece.
1 05
The A verbak h Centre

The wea k n ess of the g3 180

sq u a re

When the e-file is open Black can

sometimes take advantage of the
weakness of g3 caused by White's
common prophylactic advance
h2 -h3 ( 1 79).

181

After . . . 'Ll h 5-g3 White can

no longer castle kingside. This
tactical resource is also possible,
albeit a little more hidden, when
Black's knight is on e4.
D i sc ove r i es on t h e l o ng
d i a g o n a l h8-a1
As we have already seen, when
White captures on e6 Black fre­
quently has recourse to the defens­
ive occupation of d4, which is often
helped by the existence of a tactical
theme ( 1 80).
At first it seems that Black does
not have enough cover to occupy
d4 but in fact after . . . tt:l d4, tt:l xd4
cxd4, White cannot play 'tl¥xd4
on account of . . . � xd4, l:t.xd4
'Ll h 5 ( 1 8 1 )
. . . and the discovered attack on
the long diagonal leads to material
gam.
Atta c k i n g B l a c k ' s
wea k e n ed k i n g s i d e
When White plays d5xe6 and
Black recaptures with the f-pawn
his king's position becomes some­
what vulnerable and there is a
constant possibility that White
can try to exploit it with a charac­
teristic attack based on a knight
foray ( 1 82).
Black must avoid getting into
this type of position with White

1 06
 The A verba k h Centre

2 d4 �g7
3 4Jc3 4Jf6
4 e4 d6
5 � e2

The notes to the present game

will feature a resume of the Four
Pawns Attack and the A verbakh
Variation. The remaining opening
variations will be dealt with in the
following game.
to move as his k ingside is ripe for Before beginning our investi­
destruction by playing e5, e.g . . . . gations it should be remarked that
dxe5, fxe5 4Je8, 4Jxh7! �xh7, the decision to create the A vcr­
� h 5 + ( 1 83) bakh centre basically lies in
Black's hands as White can only
force it (more or less) by playing
the Four Pawns Attack . In fact,
after 5 f4 0-0 6 4Jf3 Black has
little option but to play 6 . . . c5
since 6 . . . e5? comes unstuck after
7 dxe5 dxe5 8 �xd8 ll xd8 9 4J xe5
1::1e8 10 �d3 4Jxe4 1 1 � xe4! f6
1 2 �d5 + � h 8 1 3 �f7 nrs
1 4 4J xg6 + hxg6 1 5 �xg6 and
White has a decisive advantage.
. . . obtaining a violent and often As in all variations with this
winning attack. type of centre, including the Four
Pawns Attack, Black has two ways
of proceeding following the block­
ading of the centre after (5 f4 0-0
3 Illustrative games 6 t2Jf3) 6 . . . c5 7 d5 : ( 1 ) 7 . . . b5 8
cxb5 a6 9 a4 (or bxa6 't�Va5 10
Game 7
�d2 �xa6 1 1 �xa6 4J xa6 1 2
Alburt-Kasparov
0-0 c4 with compensati on for the
Lucerne Ol I 982
pawn) 9 . . � a5 (or 9 . . . e6
.

Averhakh Variation
10 dxe6 �xe6 1 1 �e2 axb5 1 2
c4 g6 �xb5 4Ja6 1 3 0-0 4J b4 1 4 � h l

1 07
The A verbakh Cen t re
'ii b6 and again Black has com­
pensation for the pawn) 1 0 �d2
� b4 1 1 � c2 c4 12 tLJd 1 'ii c5
1 3 �e3 � b4 + 14 j_d2 � c5
with equal play; (2) 7 . . . e6 8 dxe6
(or 8 �e2 exd5 9 exd5-9 e5 leads
to extremely complicated and
unclear play-9 . . . .l::te 8 1 0 0-0
t2Jg4 with the idea of continuing
with . . . t2Je3) 8 . . . fxe6 (8 . . . � xe6
9 i.d3 t2Jc6 10 f5 .1d7 1 1 0-0
t2J g4 leads to a complicated
position 9 �d3 t2Jc6 1 0 0-0 ct:J d4
with a rich m iddlegame in view,
perhaps slightly more promising
for White.
5 0-0
6 ..tg5
This characteristic move of the
Averbakh variation prevents the
immediate advance . . . e7-e5 (see
the commentary to White's sixth
move i n Game 6).
6 t2J bd7
Normally when Black plays this
move he intends continuing with
. . . e7-e5 although, as we will see
in the present game, things can
also turn out rather differently.
The A verbakh centre usually
comes about here through Black
playing 6 . . . c5 and White replying
7 d5, after which subsequent devel­
opments depend on whether Black
decides to base his counterplay on
. . . b5 or . . . e6, either with or
1 08
withou t playing . . . h6. For exam­
ple : ( 1 ) 7 . . . b5 8 cxb5 a6 9 a4
'1Wa5 (or 9 . . . h6 1 0 �d2 e6
1 1 dxe6 Jlxe6 1 2 t2Jf3 axb5 1 3
�xb5 t2J a6 1 4 0-0 t2Jc7 1 5 .l::te 1
ct:Jxb5 1 6 ct:Jxb5 d 5 with sufficient
compensation for the pawn) 1 0
�d2 axb5 ( 1 0 . . . 'ii b4 i s riskier,
e.g. 1 1 'ii c2 axb5 1 2 �xb5 �a6
1 3 f3 and now both 13 . . . c4
and 1 3 . . . ct:Jfd 7?! are possible,
although the latter entails a queen
sacrifice which is favourable for
White after 1 4 t2J d 1 '1W d4 1 5 �c3
�xb5 16 �xd4 cxd4 1 7 .l::ta 3 !
etc.; also after 1 0 . . . 'ii b 4 White
can play 1 1 f3 ct:Jfd 7 1 2 '1W c 1 c4
1 3 tLJd l 'ii c 5 1 4 '1W xc4 axb5 1 5
'i!t'xb5 �a6 1 6 � xc5 t2Jxc5 1 7
.l::ta 3 ! and i t i s not clear if Black
has sufficient compensation for the
two pawns) 1 1 i.xb5 (or 1 1 t2J xb5
'ii b6 12 � b 1 e6 13 dxe6 fxe6 14
ct:Jf3 d 5 with complicated play) 1 1
. . . t2Ja6 1 2 t2J ge2 t2J b4 1 3 0-0
�a6 with sufficient compensation
for the pawn; (2) 7 . . . e6 8 'ii d 2
exd5 9 exd5 't!¥b6 10 ct:Jf3 �f5 1 1
0-0 (for the consequences of 1 1
t2Jh4 see the commentary to Diag­
ram 1 62) 1 1 . . . t2J e4 1 2 ct:J xe4
Jlxe4 1 3 n ae 1 'i!t'xd2 1 4 'ii f4
with promising play for White;
(3) 7 . . . h6 8 �f4 (or 8 �e3 e6-
of course 8 . . . b5 is also possible-
9 h3 exd5 1 0 exd5 .l::te 8 1 1 �d3 b5
1 2 cxb5 ct:J bd 7 with compensation
for the pawn; of course, White can
 The A verbak h Centre

also play 9 dxe6 in this line) 8 . . . intention of the text move is to

e6 9 dxe6 iLxe6 1 0 iLxd6 (White prevent . . . h7-h6. Its deeper sign­
can decline the sacrifice by playing ificance is shown in the variation
1 0 ifd2 leading to unclear play 7 . . . e5 8 d5 CZ'lc5'? 9 b4! and
after 1 0 . . . ifb6 1 1 j(.xh6 c�xh6 thanks to the queen's position
1 2 'ii"x h6 'ifxb2 1 3 � c l ttJc6 1 4 Black cannot capture on e4 and
h4; Black can avoid this line by must retreat the k night. This
delaying the . . . e6 advance, e.g. 8 explains why Kasparov prefers the
. . . 'ifb6 9 � d2 �h7 1 0 h4 e6 1 1 advance . . . c7-c5 in the game.
dxe6 iLxe6 and now White has
7 c5
tried both 1 2 h5 g5 1 3 iLxd6
8 d5 (I 84)
� d8 1 4 � c2 with a complicated
position, and 1 2 ttJ f3 intending to
continue the attack with CZ'Jg5 + )
1 0 . . . � e8 1 1 CZ'Jf3 CZ'Jc6 ( 1 1 . . .
ifb6 1 2 j_�xb8 � axb8 has also
been played) 1 2 0-0 CZ'Jd4 ( 1 2 . . .
'iVa5'?! seems to be inferior on
account of 1 3 CZ'Jd2 ! � ed8 1 4 iLf4
CZ'le8 1 5 CZ'Jd5 with advantage to
White) 1 3 e5 CZ'Jd7 1 4 CZ'Jxd5 cxd5
1 5 'ii"x d4 CZ'Jxe5 1 6 iLxe5 'ii"x d4
1 7 iLxd4 iLxd4 1 8 � ac 1 � ad8
This position normally occurs
1 9 b3 is a sacrificial line which has
without the moves ifd 1 -c 1 and
often occurred in practice.
. . . CZ'Jb8-d7 when Black can
It must be remembered that
choose between continuing with
all of these lines are essentially
. . . e7-e6 or . . . b7-b5 (ei ther with
illustrative and that improvements
or without the advance . . . h7-h6).
might well be found for both play­
It is clear that the extra moves
ers.
considerably reduce Black's
7 'ii" cl!? options and Black therefore plays
his sole remaining possibility m
The usual move at this point is
tune with the position.
7 ifd2 after which follows 7 . . . e5
8 d5 CZ'lc5 and White must protect 8 b5
his e-pawn with 9 f3 (see the note 9 cxb5 a6
to move nine in Game 6). As 10 a4 ifa5
with 7 ifd2, the most obvious 11 iLd2 axb5

1 09
The A verbakh Centre
Attacking the e-pawn by 1 1 . . .
�b4?� would not be advisable
here because of 1 2 f3� and Black
would be faced with the immediate
threat tLl c3-d 1 .
12 tLlxb5!
After 1 2 iLxb5 Black would
have been able to turn the moves
� c l and . . . tLl bd 7 to his advan­
tage by playing 1 2 . . . iLa6 1 3
tLlge2 �b4! 1 4 f3 tLle5!, with
sufficient dynamic compensation
for the pawn.
12 iWb6
13 "iWc2?!
White wants to keep f3 free for
his K N so as to facilitate kingside
castling. However, it is clear that
White has lost the theoretical bat­
tle since comparison with the first
line given in the note to Black's
sixth move in the present game
shows that Black has gained the
move . . . tLl bd7. Quite simply,
the tempo lost with the q ueen
manoeuvre �d 1 --c 1 --c2 cannot
be j ustified. The right move was
1 3 f3 ! leading to a complicated and
difficult position for both sides.
13 iLa6
14 tLlf3?! ( 1 85)
The consistent, but erroneous,
continuation, based on a hidden
tactical idea : 1 4 . . . tLl xe4? 1 5
110
� xe4 iL xb5 1 6 iLxb5 � xb5 1 7
axb5 .!lxa 1 + 1 8 �e2 .!lxh 1 and
although at first sight Black stands
well, in fact after 1 9 � xe7! White
obtains a clear advantage, e.g. 1 9
. . . tLl f6? 20 b6! .Id: b 1 (20 . . . .Id: e8
21 �xe8 + tLl xe8 22 b7 etc.) 2 1
b4! tLlxd5 2 2 � e4! with a winning
advantage. The apparently decis­
ive 22 "iW xf8 + ? in fact only leads
to a draw after 22 . . . iLxf8 23 b7
tLlf4 + ! 24 �e3 tLl d 5 + etc. since
25 �e4? would backfire because
of 25 . . . tLl xb4! 26 b8(� ) d 5 + !
and wins.
Black can, however, avoid this
trap and utilize the theme of the
pinned a-pawn in order to sacrifice
his q ueen for a rook and a piece
and thereby obtain a dangerous
initiative.
14 $Lxb5!
15 iLxb5 �xb5
16 axb5 .!d:xal +
17 iLc1 tLlxe4
18 0-0 tLlef6 ( 1 86)
 The A verbak h Centre

186 White sacrifices the pawn m

order to activate his queen.

w
25 tt:J xb6
26 � b5 tt:J bd7
27 .1Le3 j(f8
28 tt:Jd4?!

Up to this poin t White has

managed to wrest the initiative
with a series of exact moves but
now White probably makes a mis­
The position is very complex, take in transferring his k night to
but probably more dangerous for the queenside. According to
White given that his pawns are Kasparov, things would have
weak whereas Black's structure remained unclear after 28 h4.
is very sound. We see here an 28 � a2 +
excellent example of the type of 29 �f l �al +
sacrifice already mentioned which
can occur when White captures Black is in time trouble
the gambit pawn offered by . . . b7-
30 �e2 e5!
b5 and protects i t by a2-a4.
31 tt:Jc6 � a2 +
19 b4! 32 �fl � at +
33 �e2 � a2 +
Defence of the d5 pawn would �fl � a6
34
have been useless and White tries 35 lZJxc5?!
i. xc5
to get rid of his weaknesses.
3 5 . . � a l + 36 <;t>e2 tt:Jxc5
.

19 lZJxd5
was better. After the text move
20 .1Ld2!
White can hide the king behind
Threatening 2 1 � xa l .1Lxa l 22 his pawns.
� a2 etc. � a l+
36 g3
20 � fa8 37 �g2 tt:Je6
21 bxc5 � xf l + 38 � b8 �dl
22 � xfl �al +
N o t 38 . . . �g7? because of 39
23 �e2 tt:J xc5
tt:Jxe5!
24 �c4 e6
25 b6! 39 � b2 � d5

Ill
The A verbak h Centre

40 � b8 ld:c5 A typical blunder in a difficult

41 tZJe7 + �g7 situation. But in any case Black
42 tZJc8 would have maintained a con­
siderable advantage after either 5 1
After 42 � xd6? h5 ! White
� xd6 itc7! 5 2 � d 7 j, b6! 53
would be paralysed whilst Black
tZJxb6 (what else?) 53 . . . ld:xd7 54
can win the knight by . . . �h7
tZJxd7 f6, or 51 � g2 .txh4! 52
and . . . ld:c7.
� xd6 (52 gxh4? ld: xd5! etc.) 52
42 ld:d5 . . . .i.f6 with the idea of continuing
43 � aS ld:d2 with . . . h4.
44 tZJ b6 tZJ c5 51 ld:e2+ !
But not 44 . . . d5? 45 � a 5 ! 52 � d3 e4 +
ld: b2 4 6 tZJxd5 it c 5 47 tZJ e 3 with 53 �c4 ld:c2 +
equal chances. 54 tZJc3 .i.f6
55 � xe4 ld:xc3 +
45 tZJc4 ld:d4 56 �d5 ld:c5 +
46 tZJe3 ite7 57 � xd6 .i.e5 +
47 h4?! 0-1
Weakening g4 for nothing.

47 h5 Game 8
48 tZJd5 it d8! I vkov-G heorghiu
49 �f3 Buenos Aires 1 9 79
System with h2-h3
The ending after 49 � xd8
ld:xd5 would be hopeless. Equally, I d4 tZJf6
after 49 � c6 tZJe4! followed by 2 c4 c5
. . . tZJf6 Black would have the
decisive threat of breaking the cen­ Right from the start Black
tral blockade or occupying g4. decides on his choice of central
counter, preferring . . . c7-c5 to . . .
49 tZJe6 e7-e5.
50 �c6
3 d5 g6
50 � g2 tZJc7! is a wmnmg 4 tZJc3 .i. g7
simplification for Black. 5 e4 d6 ( 1 8 7)

50 ld:d2! We have here an A verbakh cen­

51 �e3?? tre arrived at by a different order

1 12

of moves where White can still
choose any set-up. In the commen­
tary to the preceding game we
examined the Four Pawns Attack
(which could be obtained here if
White plays 6 f4) and the Aver­
bakh Variation (6 �e2 followed
by 7 �g5) and we will now look
at White's remaining possibilities.
Given that Black has the central
counter . . . e7-e6 at his disposal
(as well as the flank attack . . . b 7-
b5) White must consider how he
will cover his king on the e-file if
he decides not to play d5xe6, as
Black will sooner or later play . . .
e6xd5. There are several possible
set-ups : tt:Jf3, �d3 and �e3
(which we will see in the present
game); �d3 and tt:Jge2; tt:Jge2-
g3 and �e2; or tt:Jf3 and �e2.
These set-ups are nearly always
combined with the move h2-h3
which not only stops Black play­
ing . . . �c8-g4 but also prevents
a possible tt:Jf6-g4-e5
manoeuvre. Here are some
The A verba k h Centre
examples of the various possibilit­
Ies :
( 1 ) 6 �d3 (the �d3 and tt:Jge2
plan changes character consider­
ably according to whether o r not
it is combined with the advance
f2-f4; note that this set-up with
�d3 and tt:Jge2 can really only
be played after a move order such
as that i n the present game, as
after the normal move order 1 d4
tt:Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 tt:Jc3 �g7 4 e4 d6
the move 5 �d3 could be well
met by an . . . e7-e5 advance) 6 . . .
0-0 7 tt:Jge2 (or 7 f4 e6-7 . . . a6!?
is interesting, e.g. 8 tt:Jge2?! b 5 ! 9
cxb5 axb5 1 0 tt:Jxb 5 �a6 with
sufficient compensation-S dxe6
fxe6 9 tZJge2 tZJc6 10 0-0 tt:Jd4 1 1
tZJg3 �d7 1 2 �e3 �c6 with
balanced play) 7 . . . e6 (the fact
that White's bishop protects his e­
pawn prevents Black playing the
immediate 7 . . . b5, as the knight
is free to capture the pawn) 8 0-0
exd5 9 exd5 tt:Jg4 with the inten­
tion of continuing with . . . tt:Jg4-
e5.
(2) 6 tt:Jge2 (in contrast to the
previous variation, this line gener­
ally arises after the normal move
order 1 d4 tZJf6 2 c4 g6 3 tt:Jc3
�g7 4 e4 d6 5 tZJ ge2 0-0 6 tt:Jg3
c5 7 d5, which has the merit of
preventing the . . . b7-b5 gambit
as the KN protects the e-pawn) 6
. . . 0-0 (with this particular move
order Black has the option of
11 3
The A verbak h Centre
transposing to a well known vari­
ation of the Benko Gambit by
playing 6 . . . b5 7 cxb5 a6 8 bxa6
ii.xa6 9 CLJg3 ii.xfl 10 lLlxfl etc.)
7 lLlg3 e6 8 ii.e2 (White covers
his king on the e-file as he has
decided not to capture on e6 him­
self and to answer . . . e6xd5 with
e4xd5) 8 . . . exd5 9 exd5 (as in
all these types of variations, the
alternative capture c4xd5 would
transpose to the M odern Benoni)
9 . . � e8 10 0-0 h5 1 1 Ji.g5 't�Yb6
. follows) 6 . . . 0-0 7 Ji.g5 e6 (of
1 2 't�Yd2 lLlbd7 1 3 a4 a6 1 4 � fe 1
with a freer position for White.
(3) 6 ttJf3 0-0 7 Ji.e2 e6 (the
central counter is more commonly
seen against White's quiet prep­
arations for castling than the flank
attack with . . . b7-b5 which is
nevertheless playable) 8 0-0
(another possibility is 8 dxe6
ii.xe6 9 Ji.f4 ttJ c6 1 0 ii.xd6 � e8
with an analogous position to that
examined in line 3 in the note to
Black's sixth move in the preced­
ing game) 8 . . . � e8 (beginning a
waiting policy directed against the
possibility of White recapturing
on d5 with the c-pawn, e.g. 9 lLld2
lLla6 1 0 a4 ttJc7 and whilst Black
can continue with the thematic . . .
a7-a6 and . . . � a8-b8 White no
longer has any useful waiting
moves and must sooner or later
take on e6) 9 h3 (by not protecting
the e-pawn White shows that he
is not interested i n capturing on
1 14
d5 with the c-pawn) 9 . . . ttJa6 1 0
Ji.g5 h 6 1 1 Ji.e3 exd5 1 2 exd5
Ji.f5 1 3 't�Yd2 <;th7 with chances
for both sides.
(4) 6 h3 (this move can be played
at almost any stage of the opening;
apart from simply transposing to
other lines, White can also give
the move individual significance
by renouncing castling in order to
obtain the ideal set-up for his
minor pieces as in the line that
course, 7 . . . b5 is also possible,
e.g. 8 cxb5 a6 9 a4 'ii a 5 1 0 Ji.d2
with a position recalling those
given in lines 1 in the notes to
Black's fifth and White's sixth
moves in the previous game) 8
Ji.d3 exd5 9 exd5 lLlbd 7 1 0 lLlf3 !?
� e8 + 1 1 <;tfl and it remains to
be established whether White is
justified in giving up the right to
castle.
6 lt_jf3 0-0
7 h3
This pos1t10n more frequently
arises via the normal move order
1 d4 ttJf6 2 c4 g6 3 lLlc3 Ji.g7 4
e4 d6 5 lLlf3 0-0 6 h3 c5 7 d 5 . The
text move is useful not only for
preventing the pin with . . . Ji.c8-
g4, given that White intends play­
ing ii.fl-d3, but also for covering
the e-file by ii.c 1 -e3 without hav­
ing to fear . . . lLlf6-g4.
 The Averbakh Cent re

7 e6

The central counter . . . e7--e6 is

by far the most explored continu­
ation although the alternative, 7
. . . b5 !?, also comes into consider­
ation. If he wishes, White can
avoid this possibility by adopting
the move order 6 jg,d3 0-0 7 h3
followed by l2J g 1 -f3. Even in this
case, however, Black can try to
implement the gambit, e.g. 7 ... a6
of obtaining control of e4) 1 1
8 l2Jf3 (the only way of completely
jg,xf5 gxf5 1 2 0-0 l2Je4 1 3 tt:Je2
stopping the gambit would be to
with a complicated position where
play 8 a4) 8 . . b5!? 9 cxb5 axb5
.
Black's structural inferiority could
10 l2Jxb5 l2Ja6 1 1 l2Jc3 l2J b4 with
well be offset by the superior dyna­
a measure of compensation for the
mism of his pieces.
pawn.
(2) 1 0 . . . �h6 1 1 0-0 �xe3 1 2
8 jg,d3 fxe3 ttJ bd 7 (White would get a
mating attack after 1 2 . . . 1::t xe3'?
Opening up the game by 8 dxe6 1 3 'tlkd2 followed by 'tlk h6 and
would not make sense given that tt:Jg5) with a tricky position where
White has spent an important White can often build up strong
tempo on the non-developing pressure on the f-file.
move h2-h3. (3) 1 0 . . . tt'lh5 (threatening . . .
8 exd5 l2Jh5 --g3) 1 1 0-0 tt'lbd7 1 2 'tlkd2
(two other possibilities are 1 2 g4
Black must open the e-file tt'lhf6 and Black will continue
immediately as otherwise White with . . . h7-h5, or 1 2 jg,g5 f6 1 3
would get his ideal set-up by jg,d2 f5 1 4 tt'lg5 looking to exploit
castling and then playing jg,cl-f4 the weakness of e6) 1 2 . . . tt'le5 1 3
(or -g5). tt:J xe5 .ll xe5 and Black should be
able to hold his own.
9 exd5 .ll e8 +
10 jg,e3 ( 1 88) 10 b5!?

I n this position Black has the Thematic, albeit rarely seen in

choice between three main plans : this position; Black sacrifices the
( 1 ) 1 0 . . . jg,f5 (a radical method pawn in order to gain control of e4.

1 15
The A verba k h Centre

11 l2J xb5 decisive attack o n the dark squares

after, for example, 1 4 � xa l �xe4
After 1 1 cxbS White's d-pawn is 1 5 itg5! �d7 1 6 ith6.
seriously weakened and Black can
continue with . . . l2Jb8--d7-b6 and 14 'ii' c 2! � xe3!
i1Lc8-b7.
A critical moment; after 1 4 . . .
11 l2J e4 .txa 1 15 'ii' xe4 Black's d-pawn
is fatally weak, e.g. 1 5 . . . itf6 1 6
Threatening l2Je4-g3 and 'ii' f4 ite7 1 7 l2Jg5 etc., or 1 5 . . .
opening up the bishop's diagonal itg7 1 6 'ii' h4! 'ii' b6 1 7 J1Lf4 �J8
against the b2 pawn. 1 8 ct:Jg5 h6 1 9 l2Je4 g5 20 'i¥ g3
etc.
12 0-0
15 'ii' x b2!
White rightly decides to return
the pawn in order to complete his Much more promising than the
development. Other continuations prosaic 1 5 fxe3 .txa 1 1 6 �xa 1 .
would be much riskier, e.g. 1 2
�xe4 �xe4 1 3 'iW c2 iiLfS or 1 2 15 �xf3?! ( 1 89)
� c2 � aS + 1 3 l2Jd2 a6� (much
better than 1 3 . . . l2Jg3 1 4 fxg3
�xe3 + 1 5 �f2 when Black has
problems) with good compens­
ation in both cases.

12 J1Lxb2?

With hindsight, this natural

looking move can be seen to be an
error. It was probably necessary to
play 1 2 . . . a6, e.g. 1 3 l2Jc3 l2Jxc3
1 4 bxc3 jt�xc3 1 5 � b 1 l2Jd7 and
White only has a small advantage.
The text move allows White
to advantageously lure the black
rook into the thick of the battle.
Jtxe4! �xe4
13
After 1 3 . . . j,xa 1 Whi te gets a
Black goes in search of an
apparently promising counter­
attack, but a nasty surprise lies in
store for him. It is not difficult to
understand why Black preferred
the active text m ove to passive
defence by 1 5 . . . �e8 1 6 �fe 1
�f8 (necessary in order not to

116
 The A verbak h Centre

leave the back rank unprotected 19 l2Jxd6 .i.. x h3

as would be the case after 1 6 . . . 20 l:t g1
l:t xe 1 + 1 7 l:t xe 1 when White
threatens both l2J b5-c7 and A pity! 20 � h 8 + ! would have
l2J b5xd6) when White's positional been a fitting conclusion to Whi­
advantage is so marked that he te's earlier play.
would be unlikely to be tempted 20 � f4
by the mere gain of a pawn by 1 7 21 l:tg3 � xd6
lbxa 7. 22 l:txh3 ne8
16 l:tfe 1 ! 23 �g2

W i t h the deadly threat o f 1 7 Threatening 24 l:t xh7.

l2Jc7.
23 h5
16 �d7
24 �c3 0Jc7
Resigning himself to loss of 25 l:te1 l:td8
material. The alternatives are no 26 l:th4 l2Je8
better, e.g. 1 6 . . . 1:t f6 1 7 l2J c7 ! , or 27 nhe4 � b8
16 . . . l2J a6 1 7 gxf3 �xh3 1 8 28 l:te7 0Jd6
f4 in both cases with a decisive
advantage, or, finally, 1 6 . . . l2J d 7 Black has made the most of
1 7 l2J xd6 ( 1 7 gxf3 l2Je5 would be his meagre defensive resources. At
dangerous) 1 7 . . . 1:t b8 1 8 � d 2 ! first sight it seems that it will take
( n o t 1 8 �e2 l:t f6 1 9 �e8 + some time for White to convert
� xe8 20 n xe8 + �g7 2 1 l2J xc8 his material advantage i nto the
1:t b2 with sufficient compensation
full point, but lvkov finds a way
for the pawn) 1 8 . . . l2J f6 1 9 l2J xc8 of wrapping things up in j ust a few
l:t a3 20 l2Je7 + �g7 21 l2J c6 moves.
and again White has a winning 29 � f6 n f8
position. 30 � f4 nd8
17 gxf3 31 1:t 1 e6! fxe6

Despite White's somewhat Or 3 1 . . . 0Jf5 32 � xb8 1:t xb8

exposed king the rest should be 33 l:t e8 + and wins.
merely a matter of technique.
32 � f6
17 � g5 +
18 �h1 l2Ja6 1-0

1 17
5 The Simplified
Centre

Main Line: Orthodox System 7 iie3 'Wie7 8 dxe5 dxe5) 7 . . .

1 d4 'Ll f6 2 c4 g6 3 'Llc3 Jig7 4 lbc6 8 iie3 lb g4 (or 8 . . .!::!: e8
.

e4 d6 5 'Ll f3 0-0 6 iie2 e5 7 dxe5 9 dxe5 dxe5) 9 �g5 f6 1 0 iih4

dxe5 ( 1 90). � h8 1 1 dxe5 dxe5 5 'Ll f3 0-0
6 iie2 e5 7 0-0 l2Jbd7 8 iie3
c6 (or 8 . . . h6 9 dxe5 dxe5) 9
'i\Vc2 lb g4 1 0 Ji gS f6 1 1 .t h4
l2Jh6 1 2 dxe5 dxe5

Systems with h2-h3

5 l2Jf3 0-0 6 h3 e5 7 dxe5 dxe5

Averbakh Variation
5 iie2 0-0 6 j_g5 h6 7 iie3 e5
8 dxe5 dxe5
There are several vanatwns
where White exchanges on e5 at
one stage or another, for example,
1 d4 l2Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 l2Jc3 .tg7 4
e4 d6 and now :
Orthodox System
5 ttJf3 0-0 6 .te2 e5 7 0-0 1 Strategic Ideas
'Llbd7 8 .!:!:e l (or 8 'Wic2 c6 9
As can be observed from the lines
.!:!:d 1 .!:!:e8 1 0 dxe5 dxe5) 8 . . .
given above, White can effect the
c6 9 .tfl a5 1 0 dxe5 dxe5 5
capture dxe5 in an assortment of
'Ll f3 0-0 6 iie3 e5 7 dxe5 dxe5
variations and at various stages
Gligoric System in the opening. As will become
5 l2Jf3 0-0 6 ..te2 e5 7 0-0 (or apparent in the course of our

1 18

investigations, Black's queenside
pawn structure has particular
relevance in this type of centre.
We begin by considering the type
of structure which is richest in
strategic elements but also, para­
doxically, easiest to explain and
understand ( 1 91 ).
191
Black has played . . . c7-c6 and
. . . a 7 -aS, and apart from the open
d-file it is evident at a glance that
Black has structural weaknesses
on d6 and b6 which can be fixed
by c4-c5 whilst White has a struc­
tural weakness on d4 already fixed
by Black's e-pawn.
As we will see, the advance c4-
c5 always forms the keystone of
White's plans, although i ts par­
ticular strategic significance
changes according to the con­
figuration of Black's queenside
pawns.
The a d va n c e c4-c5 w i t h
B l ack's q u eens i d e pawns
o n a 5, b7, c 6
When Black has played . . . c7-c6
The Simplified Centre
and . . . a7-a5, White's advance
c4-c5 is normally carried out with
the support of the QN ( 1 92).
The diagram shows clearly t he
control White has secured over
Black's weaknesses on b6 and d6,
his acquisition of the useful square
c4, plus the weakness of the a5
pawn and general paralysis of
Black's queenside development.
Basically, Black has two ways
of countering White's plans : ( 1 ) to
anticipate White's c-pawn
advance and seek the exchange of
a pair of k nights by playing . . .
� d8-e7 and . . . lZ:Jd7-c5; (2) to
allow White to play c4-c5 and
then organize a rapid attack on
the advanced pawn with the aim
of winning it in exchange for his
a-pawn.
In the first case White must
agree to the exchange of k nights
as otherwise he will not be able to
advance his c-pawn ( 1 93).
After lZ:Jxc5 'Wxc5, .li.e3 �e7
White can still manage to play c4-
1 19
The Simplified Centre
c5 but the effects are much less
incapacitating given the disap­
pearance of a pair of knights and
the consequently greater ease of
development of the queenside.
In the second case Black's aim
i s to take the pawn on c5 ( 1 94).
Here we see a rapid and efficient
implementation of Black's plan :
after . . . tZ:lg4 White cannot avoid
the trading of pawns following
.�.g5 f6, .td2 tZ:lxc5, tZ:lb6 ld:b8,
itxa5.
1 20
The a d va nce c4-c5 w i t h
B l ack's q u eens i d e pawns
o n a 7, b 7, c6
When Black has restricted himself
to playing . . . c7-c6 White can
achieve the advance c4-c5 with
the support of the b-pawn ( 1 95).
1 95
Here White has attained his aim
of freeing the pivotal c4 square
and fixing the weakness on d6
(which he will su bsequently seek to
occupy by the typical manoeuvre
tZ:lf3-d2-c4-d6). When White has
not already developed the QB it
can go to b2 in order to exert
pressure on Black's e-pawn.
When Black has not played . . .
a7-a5 his position is much
sou nder and he can conduct the
struggle on an equal footing, try­
ing to exploit the weaknesses i n
t h e opponent's camp a n d i m ple­
menting the normal counter­
attacking ideas such as advancing
his kingside pawns, as we will see
later on.

T h e a d v a n c e c4-c5 w i t h
B l a c k ' s q u eens i d e p a w n s
o n a 7, b7, c 7
When Black's queenside pawns
remain absolutely i ntact the main
effect of White's c4--c5 advance is
to gain some space and increase
the scope of his light-squared
bishop ( 1 96).
196
Such underlying strategic features
as those shown in the above diag­
ram frequently arise following a
sequence of the type �e3 tt:lg4,
�g5 f6. After the advance c4-c5
White's light-squared bishop can
exert awkward pressure on either
the a2-g8 or a4-e8 diagonals.
The wea k n ess o f t h e
sq u a res d 4 a n d f4
In the simplified t ype of centre
Black's counterplay generally
centres around the occupation of
the weak square d4. W hite usually
defends this square with his KN
and QB ( tt:lf3 and .i.e3), but these
The Simplified Centre
two pieces are often diverted to
other tasks (e.g. tt:lf3-d2-c4 and
�e3-g5-h4) which makes the
occupation of d4, even when Black
has not developed his QN on c6,
considerably easier than appears
at first sight.
Black's simplest way of going
about occupying d4 consists in
playing . . . tt:lb8-c6 and exchang­
ing White's KN by . . . �c8 -g4
( 1 9 7).
To prevent this type of idea
White does best to anticipate the
development of Black's QB by
playing h2-h3.
When Black develops his QN
on d7 (generally i n conj unction
with . . . c7-c6), the key to the
exploitation of d4 lies i n transfer­
ring this k night to e6 via either f8
or c5 ( 1 98).
From e6 the black k night can
go to either d4 or f4. It should be
remarked that occupation of f4
becomes an attractive proposition
for Black after White has castled
121
The Simplified Centre

1 98 199

ki ngside, as the weakening of the

assault (by playing f3, thus permit­
kingside by g2-g3 would hardly
ting . . . f4 followed by . . . g5) or
be advisable. Black can also
replying with exf5 in the hope of
manoeuvre his KN to e6 by vari­
significantly exposing the black
ous routes : . . . l2Jf6-e8-c7-e6, . . .
king.
l2Jf6-h7-g5 (or -f8) -e6, . . . l2Jf6-
In the diagrammed position, the
g4-h6-f7-g5-e6. Black's KB can
necessity for White to bring his
also converge on d4 by means
QB back into play and to control
of the m anoeuvre . . . .i.g7-f8-c5,
the weak square d4, plus the fact
which almost always represents a
that after . . . g5, .i.g3 f5, exf5 .i.xf5
strategic success for Black as it
Whi te's QB is not particularly well
brings Black's bad bishop to life.
placed, often conspire to induce
White to play f2 -f3 in order to
The a d v a n ce of B l a c � 's
retreat the QB to f2 which in turn
k i n g s i d e pawns
permits Black to set in motion a
Notwithstanding the fact that the classic kingside pawn storm (200).
open central file discourages Black
from the standard advance of his
kingside pawns, it is nevertheless
possible from time to time to carry
out a pawn storm, especially when
White implements the manoeuvre
.i.e3 l2J g4, .i.g5 f6, .i.h4 (1 99).
When White's Q B is on e3 or
d2 he usually has the choice (after
the advance . . . f5) of allowing
Black to carry on with his pawn

1 22

As usual, Black's attack is based
on the breakthrough . . . g5-g4.
T h e d5 sq u a re
White can attempt to make use of
the d5 square, especially in the
early stages of the opening, by
exchanging queens along the d-file
and trying to profit from the fact
that c7 is then vulnerable and
somewhat awkward for Black to
defend (20 I ).
White's plans will change
according to the way in which
Black meets t he attack on c7 ( . .
ti:Jxd5, . . . ti:le8, . . . ti:J a6, . . .
l::t d 7), but in each case he will
seek to exploit Black's backward
queenside development.
When Black exchanges k nights
on d 5 White recaptures with the
c-pawn in order to continue his
pressure on c7 along the file, w hich
Black will logically seek to defuse
by playing . . . c7-c6. W hite meets
this challenge to his d-pawn by
The Simplified Centre
protecting it with J.c4, intending
to post the KB on d 5 if given the
opportunity (202).
In addition to simply capturing
on d5, Black has tried maintaining
the tension by . . . b5, .tb3 ..tb7,
but this suffers somewhat from the
drawback of renewing the sensitiv­
ity of the c-file and weakening t he
dark squares on the q ueenside, as
well as giving extra force to a
possible advance of White's d­
pawn.
Black's most common continu­
ation is to capture on d5 despite
. the fact that this falls in with
White's plans and allows the K B
to take up a dominating position
(203).
White h opes to be able to utilize
the open files first thanks to his
pressure on b7 and f7 plus Black's
lagging queenside development. I t
should b e noted that White i s not
at all obliged to castle kingside,
but may instead castle q ueenside
or keep the k ing in the centre
1 23
The Si mplified Centre
203
according to circumstances (for
examples see the note to White's
seventh move in the following
illustrative game).
Black must be careful not to
underestimate the strength of
White's straightforward plan and
as a first step to completing his
development he should not tarry
to expel White's strong bishop by
either . . . ct:J b8-c6--b4 or . . . ct:Jb8-
a6-c7. Subsequently he may seek
further simplification either by
offering the exchange of bishops
by . . . �c8-e6 or playing . . .
�c8-g4 i n order to remove Whi­
te's ct:Jf3 and try to occupy d4.
Returning to Diagram 20 1 ,
when Black protects his c-pawn by
. . . 1d: d8-d7 instead of exchanging
knights, W hite will himself
exchange knights in order to elim­
inate the attack on his e-pawn
and then play c4-c5 in order to
activate the KB (204).
The advance of the c-pawn not
only frees c4 for the KB but also
124
makes the development of Black's
QN rather more problematical,
given that both . . . ct:J a6, � xa6
and . . . ct:Jc6, � b5 (xc6) i nflict
considerable structural weakness.
Of course, in this latter case Black
can avoid the doubling of his
pawns by first moving the rook
before playing . . . ct:Jc6. The simi­
larities with the position shown in
Diagram 1 96 are worth noti ng.
2 Tactical Ideas
By its very nature the simplified
type of centre does not provide
fertile ground for recurring tactical
themes. It is, however, wise to
be acquainted with the following
ideas, even though they are rather
specific.
I nte rfe re nce on t h e d - f i l e
Variations where White exchanges
queens early on can easily lead
 The Simplified Centre

to the following type of position White's e-pawn is under attack,

(205). but he is by no means obliged to
defend it directly and can also
bring a rook to the d-file either
by 0-0-0 or Il: d 1 after which . . .
ttJ xe4? is i mpossible on account
of tt:Je7 + and wins.

3 Illustrat ive game

Game 9
K arpov-Quinteros
Here Black has challenged Whi­
Malta Ol. 1 980
te's invasion of the seventh rank
Gligoric System
and the automatic reinforcement
Il: ad 1? would be refuted by . . . 1 d4 tt:J f6
tt:Jd4 + w inning the exchange by 2 c4 g6
means of the interference theme 3 ttJc3 ..tg7
on the d-file. 4 e4 d6
5 tt:J f3 0-0
6 �e2
The i n d i rect d efence o f t h e
e4 p a w n One way of preparing spe­
cifically to enter the simplified cen­
Again in those lines featuring a
tre is to play 6 ..te3, e.g. 6 . . . e5
quick exchange of queens, the fol­
7 dxe5 dxe5 8 'i!V xd8 .a xd8 9
lowing kind of situation crops up
tt:Jd5 (the attack on c7 is the
quite frequently (206).
logical follow-up to the exchange
of queens) and now : ( 1 ) 9 . ttJe8. .

is rather passive; (2) 9 . ttJ xd 5 1 0

. .

cxd5 c 6 1 1 i.. c 4 gives White a

slightly improved version of the
analogous line to be examined in
the following note, as here the
square g5 is free for a possible
tt:Jf3 -g5; (3) 9 . . tt:Ja6 appears to
.

be as good as the following defence

with the rook although it is not

1 25
The Simplified Centre
played as often; White can reply
with 1 0 0-0-0 or 10 � d 1 utilizing
the fact that 10 . . . <1J xe4? loses to
1 1 <1Je7 + ; (4) 9 . . . !i: d7 (the most
popular move) 10 <1Jxf6 + �.xf6
1 1 c5 � d8 ( 1 1 . . . <1Jc6 1 2 �b5
� d8 13 �. xc6 bxc6 leaves Black
with weak pawns) 1 2 i,c4 <1J c6
with practically equal chances.
6 e5
7 .t e3
The most classical exchanging
variation (leading to the simplified
centre) occurs after 7 dxe5. The
following lines are typical : 7 . . .
dxe5 8 1W xd8 � xd8 9 .tg5 � e8
(much the most popular move; 9
. . . c6 1 0 <1J xe5 � e8 has also been
tried) 1 0 <1J d 5 <1J xd5 1 1 cxd5 c6
12 j.c4 cxd5 ( 1 2 . . . b5 1 3 .tb3
�� b7 has been played) 1 3 �.xd5
and here Black can either try to
occupy d4, e.g. 1 3 . . . <1Jc6 14 �e2
tZ:lb4 1 5 .tc4 �g4 16 � hc 1
<1Jc6 I 7 �ft .txf3 1 8 gxf3 tZ:ld4,
or seek the exchange of light
squ ared bishops, e.g. 1 3 . . . <1J a6
1 4 0-0-0 <1Jc7 1 5 .t b3 .te6 1 6
j,xe6 <1J xe6 1 7 �.e3 f5 and in
both cases chances are approxi­
mately equal. It will be observed
how Wh ite's QB on g5 hampers
White in building pressure on f7
with a timely <1J f3 --g5 in compari­
son with the 6 �.e3 line which is
designed expressly with this in
mind .
1 26
The simplified centre can arise
in many different forms after the
natural 7 0-0, as the following
examples show :
( 1 ) 7 . . . <1Jc6 8 .te3 � e8 9
dxe5 dxe5 1 0 1W xd8 tZJ xd8 ( 1 0 . . .
� xd8 1 1 .tg5 � d 7?! 1 2 .td 1 !
h6 1 3 .txf6 .t xf6 1 4 .t a4 .l:. d6
1 5 c5 � e6 1 6 <1J d 5 .td8 1 7
� fd 1 and White threatens .txc6
followed by tZJ b6) 1 1 tZJ b5 ( 1 1
<1Jd5 <1Je6 1 2 <1J g5 <1J xd5 1 3
cxd 5 has also been played) 1 1 . . .
<1Je6 1 2 <1Jg5 1:. e7 1 3 <1J xe6
( 1 3 <1J xa7 tZ:l f4 14 .txf4 exf4 1 5
<1Jxc8 � xc8 1 6 f3 <1J d 7 with
compensation for the pawn has
been suggested) 13 . . . i.. x e6 14 f3
b6 1 5 a4 c6 1 6 a5!? (or 1 6 <1Jc3
� b7! with equality) 1 6 . . . cxb5
1 7 axb6 with an unclear position
which shows how complications
can be generated even in appar­
ently quiet variations.
(2) 7 . . . tbc6 8 i.. e 3 <1Jg4 9
.tg5 f6 1 0 i..h4 � h8 1 1 dxe5
dxe5 12 c5 (or 1 2 <1Jd5 tZ:le7 with
approximate equality) 12 . . . tb h 6
1 3 h 3 .t e 6 1 4 'i!Va4 �e8 1 5
� ad 1 f5 1 6 .tb5 with complex
play.
(3) 7 . . . <1J bd7 8 �e3 c6 (8 . . .
h6 deserves consideration, e.g. 9
dxe5 dxe5 1 0 tZ:ld2 tZJ h 7 1 1 c5
lbg5 12 b4 f5 1 3 f3 f4 14 �f2
lLl e6 1 5 .i.c4 lLl f6 16 lLlb3 't!Ve8
with chances for both sides; 1 0
tZ:le 1 lLl h 7 1 1 iYd2 <1Jg5 1 2 � d 1

has also been played) 9 �c2 (or
9 dxe5 dxe5 10 lt:Jd2 �e7 1 1 � c2
lt:Jc5 1 2 lt:J b 3 lt:Je6 1 3 .tHd 1 '2Jd7
14 c5 f5 1 5 f3 f4 16 �f2 g5 with
complicated play) 9 . . . lt:J g4 I 0
�g5 f6 1 I �h4 (or 1 1 �d2 f5
1 2 exf5 gxf5 1 3 dxe5 dxe5 1 4 lt:Jg5
lt:Jdf6 with rich play) 1 1 . . . lt:Jh6
1 2 dxe5 dxe5 13 b4 'Wle7 14 c5
'2Jf7 1 5 l:Hd 1 .U e8 16 �c4 lt:J f8
with a slight advantage to White.
(4) 7 . . . lt:J bd 7 8 .U e 1 (or 8
� c2 c6 9 .U d 1 .U e8 1 0 dxe5 dxe5
1 1 lt:J a4 b6 1 2 b4 �c7 1 3 �b2
lt:Jf8 1 4 c5 �g4 with roughly even
chances) 8 . . . c6 (8 . . . h6 9 it' c2
lt:J h7 1 0 dxe5 dxe5 1 1 �e3 .U e8
1 2 c5 lt:J hf8 merits attention) 9
�fl a5 1 0 dxe5 dxe5 1 1 lt:J a4
it'e7 (or 1 1 . . . .U e8 1 2 � c2 �f8
1 3 c5 �e7 1 4 �e3 lt:Jg4 1 5 �g5
f6 16 �d2 lt:Jxc5 1 7 lLJ b6 .U b8-
after 1 7 . . . .U a7 1 8 h3 lt:J h6 1 9
�e3 White threatens 20 .U ec 1 -
1 8 h 3 '2Jh6 1 9 �.xa5 and now
even after Black's best defence 1 9
. . . '2Jd7 White's position remains
preferable) 1 2 'ij"c2 lt:Jc5 1 3 lt:J xc5
'ij" xc5 1 4 �e3 'ij"e7 1 5 c5 .U d8
1 6 �c4 � g4 1 7 lt:Jd2 �e6 1 8
�xe6 'ij" xe6 1 9 lt:J c4 with a slight
advantage to White.
7 � e7
Black refuses to be tempted into
7 . . . lt:Jg4 and instead attacks the
e-pawn indirectly hoping thereby
The Simplified Centre
to bring about a clarification of
the centre.
8 dxe5 dxe5 (207)
In general it can be said that
the i mposition of the simplified
centre which follows the capture
on e5 is rather less ambitious than
closing the centre with the space­
gaining advance d4- d5 (as might
be inferred from the fact that this
latter took up the first three chap­
ters). Nevertheless, this method
contains more poison than i s
apparent at first sight, as i t is no
easy matter for Black to neutralize
the opponent's play on the open
d-file and the weak points d5 and,
potentially, d6. Black must, there­
fore, defend with precision and
take care not to weaken his q ueen­
side excessively, at the same time
manoeuvring to exploit the weak
square d4 (absolutely the pivotal
point of Black's co unterplay) as
well as bringing his bad bishop
into play via f8--c5 if possible.
1 27
The Simplified Centre

9 0-0 of the a-pawn.

9 lLJ d 5 liJ xd 5 1 0 cxd5 is also 17 .i:!: d2 liJ e6

possible since 10 . . . 't1V b4 + 1 1 18 'tlV d l (208)
liJd2 't1V xb2 1 2 0-0 would be good
for White.

9 c6

Black protects d5 at the cost of

weakening d6. Karpov now begins
an extremely simple and natural
plan which highlights the latent
strength and insidious nature of
the ideas underpinning the simpl­
ified centre.

10 'ii' c 2 j,g4 Although at first sight it seems

11 ll fd 1 liJ a6 that White stands a little better,
12 ll d2 j, xf3 objectively speaking in fact White
13 j, xf3 lLJc5 has obtained nothing from the
14 ll ad l liJe6 opening although it still requires
Black has reacted equally nat­ sophisticated defence from Black
urally and by manoeuvring his in order to show this to be the
knight to e6 he not only observes case. For example, 1 8 . . . h 5 ! ,
the squares d4 and f4 but also intending t o gain control o f d 4 b y
protects d8, thus ensuring that exchanging dark-squared bishops
Black will be able to challenge by . . . �h7 and . . . j,h6 ( 1 8 . . .
control of the d-file. 'ii' f8 with the same idea in mind
is also possible), and now if 1 9
15 g3 j,g2?! liJ g4 20 ll d7 'ii' b4 White
would find himself with some
White has no qualms about pro­
problems. Quinteros chooses a
tecting f4 in this manner given that
different route for seeking t he
Black has lost his light-squared
exchange of the dark-squared
bishop.
bishops, but one in this case which
15 .ld: fd8 takes too much time.
16 .ld: xd8 liJ xd8
18 �f8?!
The rook is tied to the defence 19 j,g2!

1 28
 The Simplified Centre

The queen's control of g4 approved manner, White never­

enables White not only to transfer theless has an incontestable
his KB to h3 with the aim of advantage due to the domination
eliminating Black's active k night of the open file and the fixing of
but also of securing the light the weak d6 square. This position
squares with f2-f3. is a clear warning that it can often
take more than straightforward
19 'iW e8
defence to equalize against this
20 i. h3 i. b4
deceptive variation.
Perhaps it would have been
26 'iWc4
better to try and find a more active
defence even at the cost of a pawn, Black continues his policy of
e.g. 20 . . . i.c5 2 1 i.xe6 i.xe3 simplification but this only high­
22 i.d7 tt:Jxd7 23 ld:xd7 i.d4 lights the passivity of his remain­
24 ld:xb7 and Black has some mg pieces.
chances due to his well placed
27 'iW b3 'iW xb3
bishop.
28 axb3 �f8
21 f3 'iW e7
22 �g 2 i.c5 Black does not have time to
23 i. xc5 tt:J xc5 blockade the queenside, as White
24 b4 tt:J e6 would then be able to gain the
25 i. xe6 'iW xe6 initiative on the opposite flank,
26 c5 (209) e.g. 28 . . . a6 29 ld:d6 ! �g7 30 f4
(30 tt:J a4 intending tt:Jb6-c4 is
also good) 30 . . . ld:e8 3 1 �f3
with a marked advantage.

29 b5 �e7
30 ld: a2!

The precision of Karpov's play

is truly remarkable.

30 tt:J e8
31 b6 a6
32 tt:J b 1
Despite the fact that Black has
Heading for d6.
made no great errors and appears
to have defended himself in the 32 tt:Jg7

1 29
The Simplified Centre

33 'Lld 2 lt:le6 mised position.

34 b4 � d8
35 'Llc4 � d4 40 ttJd6 � xc5
36 ttJd6 � xb4 40 . . . � b 1 would be no better :
Passive defence by 36 . . . 'Lld8 4 1 ttJxf7 tt:J xc5 42 ttJxe5 + with
would be hopeless in the long run a winning advantage, e.g. 42 . . .
after simply 37 � b2. �c8 43 � c2 etc.
37 ttJ x b7 � b5 41 l:i. b2
38 h4 h5 1 -0
3 8 . . . ttJxc5 39 'Llxc5 � xc5 40
� b2 would lose on the spot. After 4 1 . . . � b5 42 ttJ xb5 axb5
(42 . . . cxb5 43 l:i. c2 etc.) 43 � a2
39 �f2 �d 7? f6 44 :t a7 + �c8 45 �e3 t he
A decisive error i n a compro- ending is hopeless.

1 30
6 The O rthod ox Centre

Gligoric System
5 li:lf3 0-0 6 i.. e 2 e5 7 i..e3
exd4 8 li:lxd4 5 li:l f3 0-0 6 i.. e 2
e5 7 0-0 c6 8 i.. e 3 exd4 9 li:l xd4
(or 9 i.. xd4)

Averbakh Variation
5 i.. e 2 0-0 6 i.. g 5 li:l bd 7 7
� d2 c6 8 CL\f3 e5 9 0-0 exd4
l 0 li:l xd4

1 Strateg ic Ideas
Black can make the capture
As can be observed from the lines
. . . e5xd4, which characterizes the
given above, Black can make the
Orthodox centre, in a number of
exchange . . . e5xd4 in an assort­
different situations as the follow­
ment of variations and at various
ing examples show : 1 d4 li:lf6 2
stages in the opening. Obviously,
c4 g6 3 li:lc3 i.. g 7 4 e4 d6 and
there exists a multitude of different
now :
strategic elements in all of these
Orthodox System variations following the capture
5 li:l f3 0-0 6 i.. e 2 e5 7 0-0 . . . e5xd4, but we can extract the
li:l bd 7 8 l:. e l (or 8 ir'c2 c6 9 most important as follows : ( 2 1 1 )
l:. d l exd4 1 0 li:l xd4) 8 . . c6 9
. ( 1 ) a degree o f vulnerability of
i.. f l a5 (or 9 . . exd4 1 0 li:lxd4)
. the e-pawn following the opening
l 0 1:1 b l exd4 l l li:l xd4 5 tbf3 of the e-file
0-0 6 i.. e 2 e5 7 0-0 c6 8 � e l (2) Black's utilization of the
exd4 9 li:lxd4 squares c5 and e5

131
The Orthodox Centre
211
(3) White's utilization of the
squares d4 and d 5 (or, when Black
plays . . . c7 --c6, of pressurizing the
d6 pawn)
(4) White's space advantage
which can be increased on both
wings with the advances b2-b4
and f2-f4.
The a d va n c e . . . c7-c6
This advance constitutes the key­
stone i n Black's plans as it serves
three important goals : it prevents
White u sing d5, it prepares the
freeing advance . . . d6-d5, and
enables Black to augment play on
the dark squares with the q ueen
sortie . . . 'i!f d8-b6 ( 2 1 2).
The disappearance of White's
d-pawn not only weakens his con­
trol of the squares c5 and e5 but
also of the black squares m
general. Essentially, Black's two
1 32
guiding strategic principles in the
Orthodox centre are clearly illus­
trated i n the diagram : the struc­
tural one of getting rid of the weak
d-pawn, and the dynamic one of
using the important black diag­
onals. These ideas are certainly
not m utually exclusive as some
typical strategic operations con­
tain both.
T h e a d va n c e . . . d 6-d5
This advance can occur in so many
diverse variations and phases of
the game that it would be useless
to try to catalogue the various
possibilities. I nstead, we will illus­
trate the basic ideas by means
of the following composed and
condensed position (21 3).
The fundamental objective of
the advance . . . d6-d5 is to get rid
of the weak pawn on d6 and
 The Orthodox Centre

dismantle the opponent's pawn after cxd5 cxd5, �f4 dxe4, t2J db5
centre, thus obtaining structural ( 2 1 5).
eq uality. This could come about
in our example if cxd5 cxd5, exd5
t2J xd 5 were played, in which case
the pawn structure would be com­
pletely level, although the opening
of the centre would promote all
kinds of tactical possibilities fav­
ouring the side with a lead in
development. Apart from such
attempted combinative solutions,
it is possible to distinguish two
Although this example and the
strategic methods which White
continuations that we have given
has used to combat Black's
do not come from a real variation,
advance. The first is to accept an
we hope nevertheless that in this
isolated e-pawn. In our example
way we have been able to condense
this would come about after cxd5
the principal implications of the
cxd5, f3 dxe4, fxe4 (21 4).
advance . . . d6- d5.
In this type of situation White
usually tries to generate pressure
T h e p ress u re a g a i nst
on the f-file, particularly against
Wh i t e ' s e - p a w n
f6 and f7.
The second method is based on When Black decides to base his
trying to exploit the weakness of play around his dynamic possi­
the squares d6 and c7. In our bilities on the dark squares, rather
example this would come about than trying to get rid of his struc-

1 33
The Orthodox Ce11 t re

tural weakness with the advance The same strategic idea can also
. . . d6-d5, one of his most common be used to facilitate the advance
strategic operations is to exert . . . d6-d5 ( 2 1 7).
pressure against WThite's e-pawn
usually with the help of both
k nights and a heavy piece on the
e-file (2 1 6).

White controls d5, but the press­

ure on the e-pawn enables Black
to make the central break after
either f2-f3 (because of the unpro­
tected QB) or after � d 1 -c2 (keep­
Black's aim is to compel the ing in mind the risks mentioned
opponent to play f2 - f3 so as to in the commentary to Diagram
increase both his control of, and 2 1 3).
attacking potential on, the dark
squares. Given the fact that White
The p ress u re a g a i nst
almost always castles kingside, it
W h i t e ' s c-pa w n
is evident that the diagonal a 7 -g I
will become very sensitive after f2- Black can also exert pressure on
f3. Moreover, Black can some­ White's c-pawn with very similar
times use the restriction of White's aims in mind (2 1 8).
KB (usually placed on e2) that 218
follows the advance f2-f3 to
mount an attack on the kingside
based on . . . ct:Jf6--h 5 (e.g. with . . .
..tg7-e5 and . . . �d8 - h4). I f for
some reason White has also played
h2-h3, the weak ness of the black
squares on the kingside can easily
become fatal, as one can well
imagine.

1 34

The aim here is to oblige White
to play b2-b3 in order to increase
both his dark square weakness
in general and that of the long
diagonal h 8 -a 1 in particular.
Quite evidently, the pressure on
the c-pawn becomes even more
effective when White has played
b2-b4 (possibly in order to chase
a black knight away from c5). It
goes without saying that the plan
of pressurizing White's c-pawn (for
example by . . . il.c8-e6, . . . 4:J b8-
d7-b6) can also simultaneously
aid the freeing advance . . . d6-d5.
T h e s q u a res c 5 a n d e5
As we have already observed,
Black can base his play around
the dark squares in general, but
amongst these c5 and e5 have
particular significance. These
squares represent Black's most
advanced outposts, the occu­
pation of which frequently pro­
vokes White into weakening his
pawn structure (the advances b2-
b4 and f2-f4 weaken the pawns on
c4 and e4 respectively). Moreover,
the squares c5 and e5 can be
secured with the moves . . . a7-
a5 and (more rarely) . . . g6-g5 if
necessary (21 9).
The occupation of these squares
is usually carried out by the
knights, the QN going to c5 via
d7 or a6 and the KN to e5 via d7
T h e Orthodox Centre
219
or g4, although these roles can be
interpreted freely or even inverted.
Our observations, therefore, can
only be a general guide.
The wea k n ess of B l a c k ' s
d-pawn
Apart from some unusual lines
(mostly stemming from the Aver­
bakh Variation) involving castling
queenside and launching a king­
side attack, White will normally
concentrate on pressunzmg
Black's d-pawn after it has been
weakened by the thematic advance
. . . c7--c6. To this end, White's
standard programme can be out­
lined as follows : ( 1 ) not to lose
control of d5 (manoeuvres such as
il.e2-f3 and 4:Jd4-c2 - e3 are not
uncommon); (2) to exert some
pressure on the d-file, constantly
looking for a propitious moment
to augment it with the Q B (almost
always from f4); (3) not to shrink
from simplification of the position
13 5
The Orthodox Centre
as this diminishes Black's dyna­
mism and increases the weakness
of the d-pawn; (4) to constantly
keep an eye on pawn thrusts such
as the advance b2-b4 followed by
either b4-b5 or c4 -c5, or similarly
f2-f4 followed by f4-f5 or e4-e5.
Here is an example of the con­
crete implementation of these
general ideas (220).
White can orchestrate strong
pressure against the d-pawn : b4
tZ:Je6 (as we will soon see, this
retreat is the most active and the
most logical), tZ:J xe6 �xe6, �f4
:J: d8, c5 tZ:Je8 (22 1 ).
221
1 36
Black is rarely reduced to such
a pitiable state but both sides
need to know that such things can
happen.
The sq u a re d4
From the earliest stages White
obtains a well placed piece on d4
(usually the KN), which is clearly
a hindrance to Black's play on
the dark squares. Black sometimes
utilizes the combined action of
his KB and a knight in order to
remove the tZ:Jd4 (222).
After tZ:Je6, White finds it
difficult to support the tZ:Jd4 with
his other knight for various stra­
tegic reasons (such as the import­
ance of maintaining control of
d5). Whether White exchanges or
retreats the tZ:J d4 Black attains his
aim of increasing his play on the
dark squares.
Black can also utilize a tactical
motif to harass the .'t:Jd4 (223).
The diagrammed position is the
starting point of a well known

variation. Black plays . . . lZJg4 and
succeeds in eradicating the tt:Jd4
after either "tW xg4 �xd4 or h3
"tW b6, hxg4 "tW xd4 (. . �xd4 is
.
also possible).
The sq u a res d5 a n d b5
When Black chooses for whatever
reason not to play . . . c7-c6, White
can use d5 as a powerful central
base for his QN. This happens
above all in lines where Black
develops his QN on c6 (224).
The position of White's knight
can be indirectly protected by cre­
ating prophylactic pressure on d6
The Orthodox Centre
(for example by a doubling of the
major pieces on the d-file) so as to
discourage . . . c7 -c6. Given the
rigidity of his queenside pawns in
this type of position, Black will
generally seek counterplay on the
kingside with the advance . . . f7-
f5, something which hardly ever
occurs when Black has played . . .
c7-c6.
Black's queenside pawns can
find themselves even more immo­
bilized when he plays . . . a7-a5
before . . . c7-c6 as after tt:Jd4-b5
the pressure on d6 prevents the
liberating . . . c7-c6 (225).
Here, too, Black's only hope of
counterplay lies in . . . f7 -f5. I t
should b e remarked that i n con­
trast to the preceding diagram,
where White's knight may be
exchanged or forced away, Black's
position here is clearly inferior as
the difficulty of driving off the
tZJ b5 ties him to the defence of c7.
137
The Orthodox Centre

2 Tact ical Ideas The d o u b l e att a c k o n d 4

Given the fact that in the Ortho­
dox centre White has a basic struc­
tural superiority which Black
seeks to offset with active piece
play, it is not surprising that the
majority of thematic tactical ideas
are on Black's side. As one would
expect, therefore, most of the tac­
tics take place on the dark squares.
a n d f4
As this theme is quite common
and can occur in various guises,
White should pay special attention
to make sure that any pieces on
d4 and f4 are well defended (22 7).

The ove r l oa d i n g of W h i t e ' s

q u ee n o n d 2

When Black answers a pin on his

KN with "iJi a5, attacking the
. . .

bishop, White frequently cannot

reply with "ij'd2 as the queen
Here the unsuspecting f4? would
becomes overloaded (226).
lose White material after . . .
tt:J xf4!, n xf4 �xd4 + ' n xd4
'iWe5 (228).

After . . . tt:Jxe4! White must

allow the unfavourable simpl­
ification fxe4 �xd4, � xd4
I£W xg5, � xd6 in order not to lose
material. It is interesting to note
that Black's dynam ism is transfor­
med into a structural superiority
in this sequence.
By means of an amusing fork
Black regains h i s material with
interest. Occasionally, the black
queen can make similar double
attacks from f6.

1 38

T h e ps e u d o - sa c r i f i ce of t h e
b l a c k a-pawn
It quite often happens that Black
apparently leaves his a-pawn en
prise, but in fact its capture would
not lead to material gain and
would be welcomed by Black from
the positional point of view (229).
If White plays �xa7 Black
replies with . . . b5 opening up a
double attack on the bishop and
the c-pawn and Black thereby
regains his pawn (often advanta­
geously).
The lo n g d i a g o n a l h 8-a 1
The long diagonal not only lies
at the heart of most of Black's
combinative possibilities but can
itself encompass tactical oper­
ations ranging from the simplest
discovered attack to the most
stunning and imaginative pos­
itional queen sacrifice (230).
Black now played . . . tt:Jxe4 ! ! ?,
�xd8 tt:Jxc3, � d2 n axd8, and
The Orthodox Centre
notwithstanding the fact that
Black has only obtained two
minor pieces and a pawn for his
queen, he subsequently gained an
advantage by opening the centre
and further activating his pieces
with . . . c5 followed by . . . d5. (The
reader is quite at liberty not to
believe any of this, but it really did
happen! ).
W h i t e ' s pse u d o - s a c r i f i ce
tt:J d 5
As w e have already observed,
White is mostly concerned with
consolidating his structural
advantage and averting the
opponent's tactical threats rather
than creating his own, but he does
have one idea which occurs quite
often and in various forms, based
on the presence of Black's QB on
e6 (23 1 ).
White can now play tt:Jd5 (a
useful move even if Black does not
take it) as after . . . cxd5, exd5
1 39
The Orthodox Centre

lb f3 e5 9 0-0 exd4 1 0 lLJxd4 lbc5

1 1 ilf3 ..- b6.
5 0-0
6 ile2 e5
7 0-0

White can opt for the Gligoric

System at this point by playing
ilc 1 -e3, either before or after
castling. In both cases Black can
bring about an Orthodox centre
White regains the piece, normally where he will often aim to achieve
advantageously. It sho uld be the liberating . . . d6-d5 advance.
observed that this pseudo-sacrifice For example : ( 1 ) 7 ile3 exd4 (7
can also be played with, say, a . . . h6 preparing . . . lb g4 is an
knight on d7 instead of the queen interesting waiting move based on
on e7 in which case after lLJd5 the fact that after the natural 8
cxd5, cxd5 Black's bishop is h3 Black can mount annoying
trapped. pressure on e4 with 8 . . . exd4 9
lLJxd4 .ld: e8 1 0 � c2 ..-e7 since
1 1 f3 would weaken the dark
squares on the k ingside) 8 lLJxd4
.ld: e8 9 f3 c6 1 0 �d2 (to defend
3 Illustrative game
the Q B in order to have the option
Game 1 0 of capturing on d5 with the e­
Ftacnik-Nunn pawn; 10 0-0 would transpose to
Gjovik 1 983 the following line) 10 . . . d 5 1 1
Orthodox System exd5 cxd5 1 2 0-0 dxc4 1 3 ilxc4 a6
and Black has achieved complete
d4 lbf6
structural equality although he
2 c4 g6
still has to catch up on develop­
3 lLJc3 il g7
ment; (2) 7 0-0 c6 8 ile3 exd4 9
4 e4 d6
lLJxd4 (after 9 ilxd4 .tt e8 1 0
5 lLJf3
..- c2 ..-e7 1 1 .tt fe 1 lLJbd 7 Black
The Orthodox centre can also can seek to use his c5 and e5
sometimes be reached via the squares with satisfactory chances)
A verbakh Variation, e.g. 5 ile2 9 . . . .tt e8 1 0 f3 d5 1 1 cxd5 cxd5
0-0 6 ilg5 lLJ bd 7 7 ..-d2 c6 8 1 2 ..- b3 dxe4 1 3 ilc4 .tt f8 1 4

1 40

l:t ad 1 'Wie7 1 5 fxe4 ct:Jc6 with
approximate equality.
7 ct:J bd7
I t would be dangerous now for
Black to seek the liquidation of
the centre with a quick . . . d6-d5,
e.g. 7 . . . exd4 8 ct:Jxd4 1:!: e8 9 f3
c6 1 0 �h 1 d 5 ( 1 0 . . . ct:Jbd7 is
better, leading after 1 1 ct:Jc2 C2J b6
12 .tg5 h6 1 3 .t h4 .te6 14 b3
to the position shown in diagram
230) 1 1 cxd5 cxd5 1 2 .tg5 ! dxe4
1 3 ct:Jdb5! � xd 1 1 4 l:t axd 1 ct:J a6
1 5 fxe4! and White's threats can­
not be parried. Note the great
significance of the tempo saved
with the Q B in comparison with
the analogous lines in the Gligoric
System.
8 � c2
The basic tabiya of the Ortho­
dox System is reached after 8 1:!: e 1
c6 9 Jlfl a5 (9 . . . ct:J g4 1 0 h3
exd4 1 1 ct:J xd4 would transpose
to line 2 below) 10 1:!: b 1 exd4 1 1
ct:Jxd4 1:!: e8 (the same position
can be obtained via the move
order 8 .8: e l c6 9 .tfl exd4 1 0
ct:J xd4 .id e 8 -for 1 0 . . . ct:Jg4 see
below - 1 1 1:!: b 1 a5; here White
could also play 1 1 .tf4 ct:Jc5 1 2
'll!V c 2 ct:Jg4 1 3 1:!: ad 1 with a slight
advantage) and Black can con­
tinue his plan of making the free­
ing . . . d6-d 5 advance after, for
example, 1 2 f3 d5 or 1 2 .tg5 h6
T h e Orthodox Centre
1 3 .tf4 ct:Jc5 1 4 f3 d5.
Another important possi bility,
aiming to generate active play on
the dark squares, consists of 8
l:t e 1 c6 9 .tfl exd4 1 0 ct:Jxd4
ct:J g4 and now for example :
( 1 ) 1 1 � xg4 .t xd4 1 2 �g3
ct:Jf6 1 3 � d 3 � b6 14 .te3 .txe3
1 5 n xe3 ct:J g4 1 6 l:t e2 � c5 1 7
l:t d2 l:t d8 1 8 l:t ad 1 ..te6 1 9
�g3 ct:Je5 with mutual chances.
(2) 1 1 h3 � b6 1 2 hxg4 (Black
gets good play after 1 2 ttJce2
ct:J ge5 1 3 b3-not 1 3 � c2
� b4- 1 3 . . . ct:Jc5, e.g. 1 4 ct:Jg3?
ct:Jed3 ! 1 5 .txd3 ..txd4 and wins)
1 2 . . . iV xd4 ( 1 2 . . . .txd4 1 3 .te3
.txe3 1 4 1:!: xe3 "YW c5 1 5 .te2
�e5 16 �d2 ct:Jf6 1 7 g5 ct:Je8 1 8
l:t g3 gives some advantage to
Whi te) 1 3 .te3 (both 1 3 .tf4 and
1 3 g5 are also possible) 1 3 . . . iVe5
14 � d2 �e7 1 5 l:t ad 1 ct:Je5 1 6
f3 .te6 1 7 b 3 n ad8 with balanced
chances.
8 c6
Black must be careful not to let
control of b5 fall into the
opponent's h ands, e.g. 8 . . . a5?! 9
n d 1 exd4 1 0 ct:Jxd4 ct:Jc5?! 1 1
ct:J db5 with clear positional super­
iority for White.
9 l:t d l exd4
Clarifying the central situation
and bringing about the Orthodox
centre. M aintaining the tension
141
The Orthodox Centre
would give White the chance to
bring about other centres, e.g. 9
. . . �e7 1 0 d5 with the Petrosian
centre, or 9 . . . .rt. e8 1 0 dxe5 dxe5
with the simplified centre.
10 l2J xd4 (232)
Black's main aim is to generate
play on the dark squares, and he
will try to make White play f2-f3
and b2-b3 by pressurizing the
pawns on e4 and c4. Naturally, he
will also keep an eye on a possible
. . . d6-d5 break should White be
so generous as to allow it. White's
play will pivot around attacking
Black's weak d-pawn.
10 � e7
Protecting d6 and beginning
pressure against e4.
11 .i.g5 tt:Jc5
12 f3 .rt. e8
1 2 . . . 'VJ!I c7 has also been played,
e.g. 1 3 b4 tt:Je6 1 4 tt:J xe6 .1xe6
1 42
1 5 .1f4 tt:Je8 1 6 c5 �e5 1 7 .i.xe5
dxe5 with an i nteresting transfor­
mation to the simplified centre.
After the text move White can­
not play 1 3 �d2 because Black
can exploit the overloaded q ueen
with the thematic tactical riposte
1 3 . . . tt:Jfxe4! with advantage in
all variations.
13 b4
Very committal, as it weakens
c4 and the long diagonal h 8 -a 1 ;
1 3 � h 1 comes into consideration,
in order to be able to continue
with � d2.
13 l2Je6
14 tt:J xe6 Jt xe6
15 � d2
1 5 c5? does not work on account
of 1 5 . . . dxc5 16 e5 Jtf5 .
15 �c7 (233)
A critical moment. Black simul­
taneously invites simplification by
1 6 'VJ!I xd6 'VJ!I xd6 1 7 .rt. xd6 tt:Jxe4
 The Orthodox Centre

1 8 4J xe4 .t xa 1 1 9 .tf6 .txf6 17 cxd5

20 4J xf6 + � f8 2 1 'Ll xe8 �xe8 18 cxd5 .tg4!
with equality, and unpins his
Black finds a good way of keep­
knight thereby threatening to
ing the d-file closed.
increase the pressure on White's
c-pawn by the thematic 19 h3
manoeuvre . . . 'Llf6-d7-e5. There
is also a subsidiary threat along 1 9 fxg4 n xe4 would have been
the a 7 -g 1 diagonal to be taken worse.
into account, e.g. 1 6 . . . 'ii b6 + 1 7 19 _t xf3
�.e3 ( 1 7 �h 1 � xb4 1 8 .t xf6 20 gxf3 l2Je5
�xf6 1 9 'Ll d 5 � b2) 1 7 . . . � xb4
1 8 ll ab 1 �a5 1 9 ll xb7 'Lld7 After this move it begins to be
with sharp play. possible to believe that Black may
have some advantage, and this has
16 ll ab l ? an immediate effect on White.
Worried by the threat o f the 21 �g2?!
check on b6 White underestimates
the strength of the manoeuvre . . . 2 1 n be l � b6 + 22 .te3 'ii d 8
'Ll f6-d7-e5. There was only one was better with only a slight pull
way to maintain some advantage : for Black.
1 6 ll ac 1 ! 'Ll d 7 (now 1 6 . . . 21 f5
·� b6 + does not work on account 22 li be l � d7
of 1 7 � h l j¥ xb4 1 8 �xf6 .txf6 23 .te3?
1 9 4J d 5 � b2 20 ll c2 and wins)
1 7 l2J d 5 ! cxd5 1 8 cxd5 'iW b6 + 1 9 White fails to appreciate the
�.e3 �h6 20 �xb6 .t xd2 2 1 seriousness of his predicament and
n xd2 with a clear positional the passive text move allows Black
advantage. to acquire permanent gains from
his positional advantage. M ore
16 l2Jd7
active defence by 23 f4 'Llf7 24
17 l2Jd 5
exf5 'iif xf5 25 .t g4 was necessary.
White obviously pinned his
23 fxe4
hopes on this tactical response to
24 fxe4 'ii e7
Black's k night manoeuvre, but it
is fl awed and White gradually slips White suffers from a feeble e­
into a bad bishop versus good pawn, exposed king, and general
knight ending. dark sq uare debility whilst Black

1 43
The Orthodox Centre

has total control of the magnifi­

cent blockading square e5.
2S JigS �f6

With this, the spectre of a good

knight versus bad bishop ending
appears.
26 �f4 tt:J f7
27 �d3 Ji gS
The nightmare becomes reality!
inflict the fatal paralysis from t he
28 .U e l �xf4 black squares. White falls i nexor­
29 � xf4 tt:JeS ably into zugzwang given that t he
30 �e2 .U ac8 knight versus bishop ending
31 .U xc8
would not offer him the slightest
Not 3 1 �g4 .U xc l 32 .U xc l chance of salvation.
tt:Jd3 3 3 Jie6 + � xe6 and wins.
36 bS � g8!
31 .U xc8
But not 36 . . . b6 37 a5 'iW xa5
32 .U c l .U xc l
3 8 �g5 and White could still
33 � xc l � g7
hope.
Between grandmasters, the rest
37 � h2 b6
is really only a matter of technique.
38 �g2
34 � e3 � h4
Now 38 a5 could be answered
3S a4
quite simply by 38 . . . bxa5.
This permits Black to construct
38 h6
an elegant zugzwang, but White
39 �h2 gS
was lost in any case, e.g. 3 5 .i.. fl
40 �g2 tt:Jg6
�f6 (threatening . . . � g5 + after
41 eS ttJ f4 +
which White could only offer
42 � f3 � xe2 +
token resistance) 36 � e2 � f4
43 'W xe2 ttJ xe2
and White has no answer to the
44 exd6 ttJ d4 +
subsequent advance . . . h7-h 5-h4.
0- 1
3S �et ! (234)
On 45 �e4 comes 45 . . . ttJ b3
It is fitting that Black should and wins.

1 44
7 Samis ch Va riation :
the M odern Centre
Main Line: Samisch Variation
1 d4 t2Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 t2J c3 iig7 4
e4 d6 S f3 0-0 6 iie3 t2Jc6 (235)
I n addition to the mam van­
ation above we will also take into
consideration the following lines :
1 d4 t2Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 t2Jc3 iig7 4
e4 d6 . and now :
Samisch Variation
S f3 0-0 6 JigS t2Jc6 S f3 c6 6
ii.e3 (or 6 JigS a6) 6 . . . a6
1 Strategic Ideas
The quickest way for the reader
to understand the strategic themes
underpinning this type of centre
is to reconsider some positions
already considered, beginning
with Diagram 90, which shows the
starting point of the main line
against the Samisch Variation.
Black's prospects have not always
shown themselves to be comple­
tely satisfactory in this line, due to
the flexibility with which White
can react to the opening of the c­
file (see the commentary to Diag­
ram 93). It is also useful at this
point to refer to Diagram 98 in
order to recall the importance to
White of his black squared bishop.
Finally, returning to Diagram 90,
if we imagine Black's QN on d4
instead of b8 we begin to under­
stand the strategic ideas on which
the move 6 . . . t2J c6 is based.
The st r u g g l e fo r d4
From the preceding consider­
ations it will be understood that
the move . . . t2Jc6 signals the
beginning of a struggle for control
1 45
Samisch Vari a t i o n : the M odern Cen tre

of d4 where Black will a wait the

right moment to play . . . e7-e5 so
that he can answer d4 -d5 with . . .
lb c6-d4 (even at the cost of a
pawn in some special cases) as we
will see (236).

236

to reserve his kingside options by

first playing � d2 and 0-0-0 then
Black can continue with . . . e5
(after White has castled queenside)
seeing that after d5 lbd4, lbge2
he no longer has to exchange
knights as he can practically force
Black does not yet threaten to
the opening of the b-file with the
play . . . e5 as after d5 lbd4, lbge2
promising pawn offer . . . c5, dxc6
(practice has shown that winning
bxc6, lb xd4 exd4, �xd4 (238).
a pawn at the cost of giving up
the black squared bishop is almost
always too high a price for White
to pay) he would be obliged to
exchange knights, thereby merely
reverting to an unfavourable
Samisch centre.
For his part, White has some
problems with the completion of
his development, as the attempt
to maintain flexibility regarding
castling by playing �d3 and The pawn sacrifice is j ustified,
lbge2 is well met, for example, by despite the fact that White has not
�d3 e5!, d 5 lb d4, lbge2 lbd7 had to give up his black-squared
(23 7) bishop, because of the consider­
. . . and Black's strong centralized able attacking chances that Black
knight gives White problems. obtains against White's k ing.
On the other hand, if White tries Returning to Diagram 236, we

1 46

can also observe that an anticipa­
tory d4-d5 advance by White
would cede Black the e5 square
from where the knight can
enhance a pawn attack on the
white centre with . . . c6, . . . a6, and
. . . b5 (239).
239
It should be noted that Black
can also consider the advance . . .
c7 -c5 creating an Averbakh cen­
tre.
Bearing all of the foregoing in
mind, it is clear that White's most
natural way to counter Black's
occupation of d4 is to develop his
KN on e2 (240).
The logic behind this develop-
Samisch Variation: the M odern Centre
ment is simple : if Black now plays
. . . e5 White can reply d 5 and
Black is obliged to accept a
Samisch centre by retreating his
knight to e7. I n this case Black's
plan to gain control of d4 would
clearly be a failure. Nevertheless,
Black has obtained an important
success : White cannot move the
knight on e2 as then . . . e 5 would
follow, and consequently, and
obviously very importantly, White
cannot castle kingside. This means
that Black can prepare his queen­
side counterplay ( . . . a6, . . 1:1 b8,
.
. . . b 5 -a conceptually similar
reaction to the opening of the c-file
in Diagram 90) having prevented
White from retaining his flexibility
with regard to castling.
In the situation outlined in
Diagram 240 White can try to
solve the problem of the d4 square
in three ways : ( 1 ) to unblock the
development of the kingside by
moving the lt:le2, although this
allows Black to play . . . e5 followed
by . . . lt:l d4; (2) to implement a
waiting policy hoping that Black
will have to play . . . e5 when d5
will force . . . lt:le7; (3) to maintain
the K N on e2 and charge straight
ahead into opposite side attacks
by playing 'tid2, 0-0-0, and h4 etc.
At the time of writing, the relat­
ive merits of these three possibilit­
ies have yet to be adequately deter­
mined and so we will restrict
1 47
Samisch Variation: the M odern Centre
ourselves to an explanation of
their basic underlying strategies.
W h ite a l l ows . . . 4J d 4
When White moves h i s KN
(normally to c l ) Black can play . . .
e7-e5 and occupy d4 after White
closes the centre by d4-d5 (24 1 ).
24 1
White will challenge the l2Jd4
by l2J c l -b3 (or possibly l2J c l -e2)
and unless Black exchanges his
knight he will protect it by . . . c5
intending to sacrifice a pawn after
dxc6 bxc6, l2Jxd4 exd4, jL xd4.
Notwithstanding the fact that
White has not lost his black
squared bishop, nor has castled
queenside as in Diagram 238,
Black obtains compensation for
the pawn thanks to the time lost
by White's KN.
The wa it i n g p o l i cy
This approach is based on the
fact that Black only has a certain
1 48
number of moves available ( . . . a6,
. . . � b8, . . . l:t e8, . . . jLd7) before
he is obliged to continue with . . .
e5 or . . . b5. I n the meantime
White will generally follow up the
standard � d2 with the advance
b2-b4 (prepared either by a3 or
l:t b l ) which may well threaten to
spoil Black's plans with the further
advance b4-b5.
As we have already observed, if
Black plays . . . e5 White can reply
with d5 forcing the knight back
to e7 thus succeeding in crossing
Black's plan to occupy d4. If, on
the other hand, Black plays . . . b5
then White's main idea is to leave
Black with a vulnerable pawn on
b5 after cxb5 axb5, d 5 l2Je5, l2Jd4
(242).
I n such situations Black gener­
ally decides to sacrifice the b-pawn
and open the position by . . . e6
thus trying to exploit his advan­
tage in development and White's
uncastled king.

O p po s i te s i d e att a c ks
Going back to Diagram 240,
White can also choose to forget
about the positio nal subtleties of
the d4 square and instead sharpen
the game by launching a kingside
attack. Gi ven the opportunity,
White will play the standard
attacking plan � d2, h2--h4-h5
and if Black captures with . . .
CZJxh5 then g4 followed by .i h6,
or if not, hxg6 and .i h6. Such a
plan naturally implies that White
will castle q ueenside.
Black will usually organize his
queenside counterplay by moves
such as . . . a6, . . .:C: b8 and . . . b5,
.
either with or with out kingside
prophylaxis, although nowadays
Black commonly prevents the
further advance of White's h-pawn
by answering h4 with . . . h5 (243).
Following the advance . . . b7-
b5 Black has t he possibility of
augmenting the pressure on the c­
pawn with . . . lbc6-a5, but will
more often continue with . . . b5xc4
S am isch Variation: the M odern Centre
intending to play . . . CZJ c6-b4
(threatening . . . lbd3 + ) so as to
free the advance of his c-pawn and
consequently permit the queen to
join in the attack via the d8-a5
diagonal. The advance . . . e7-e5 is
sometimes also included in Black's
plans, the aim being both to pre­
vent a possible central advance by
White and to stop the lbe2 going
to f4.
For White's part, he has three
main methods of weakening the
black king's defences : ( 1 ) the thrust
g2-g4 (almost always played as a
sacrifice after . . . h7-h5 so as to
open lines); (2) the exchange of
Black's fianchettoed bishop by
.ih6 (this move can also be useful
for preventing . . . h7-h5); (3) the
exchange of Black's KN by lbc3-
d5.
In this sharp type of position
with opposite side attacks it i s easy
to appreciate that the efficacy of
all the above ideas very m uch
depends on the concrete features
of the position as the outcome of
the game could hang on a single
tempo. It follows that those wish­
ing to employ this variation in
practice would do well to also
study some specific theoretical
variations.
B l a c k p re p a res ... b 5 w i t h
... a6 a n d . . . c6
Another plan for Black against
the Samisch Variation is to begin
1 49
Samisch Variation: the M odern Centre

immediate counterplay on the 24 5

q ueenside by . . . a6, . . . c6 and . . .
b5 in order to discourage White
from castling long. Black generally
implements this counterplay
before challenging in the centre
with . . . e7--e5, and even sometimes
before having castled (244).

simply leaving thi ngs, reckoning

on pressurizing Black's pawn on
c6 should he capture on c4.
Black will generally resolve the
problem of his development by
playing . . . tt:l bd7, followed by . . .
bxc4, �xc4 tt:l b6, �b3 a5 (246).

This line is almost diametrically 246

opposed to the preceding . . . lZJc6

variation : there, Black tries to
force tLlge2 in order to oblige
White to castle queenside, w hereas
here on the other hand Black
encourages White to castle k ing­
side. Although White could try
castling queenside despite Black's
demonstration, he usually decides
to go kingside either with or Black will either develop his QB
without holding up the opponent's on a6 or e6 according to how
queenside expansion by a4 (245). White has retreated his KB, and
I n this kind of position both reinforce his central control in
players must constantly pay atten­ general, and e5 in particular, by
tion to the consequences of either playing . . . tt:l fd7.
side playing a pawn to e5. White Given the flexibility of the pawn
can meet the opponent's queenside structure, it will be understood
advance either by playing b3 or that it is not practicable to attempt

1 50

to outline the vanous strategic
possibilities any further.
2 Tactical Ideas
As with the various strategies,
these variations tend to produce
middlegames so rich in tactics,
especially in the lines with
opposite side castling, that they
defy systematization (the reader
may verify this by referring to our
illustrative game). The following
examples, however, show two
themes which occur quite often.
T h e d ef e n s i ve s a c r i f i ce
. . . it xg 4
When there are opposite side
attacks in full flow, Black some­
times breaks White's pawn storm
attack by sacrificing his QB (24 7).
Here, for example, by sacrificing
his bishop by .i.. x g4, fxg4
Samisch Variation: the M o dern Centre
'Ll xg4 (threatening to capture
White's vital dark squared
bishop), Black can halt t he
opponent's attack in its tracks and
thus gain time to pursue his own
attack on the queenside.
This defensive sacrifice can also
occur after Black has played the
prophylactic . . . h7-h5 (248).
248
I n this example it is clear that
it would be suicidal for Black to
play h xg4 allowing the
breakthrough h5. By sacrificing
the bishop, on the other hand, by
. . . .txg4, fxg4 'Ll xg4 Black not
only secures the safety of his king
but gains time for his own attack
(as above).
So efficient is this idea in turning
the tables and gaining the initiat­
ive that White often prefers to
decline the sacrifice i n the hope of
utilizing the open g-file to further
his attack.
151
Samisch Variation: the M odern Centre

The pse u d o - sa c r i f i ce Black has tried j ust about every­

. . . tt:J xd 4
Another tactical theme which
Black can sometimes use to allevi­
ate the pressure against his king
arises when White places a knight
on f4 (24 9).
thing against the Samisch; thus
even at this point the alternative
moves 5 . . . e5, 5 . . . c5, 5 . . . c6,
and 5 . . . a6 have been played.
Sometimes these moves merely
transpose to main variations, but
they can also lead down individual
paths.

6 iLe3

This move, born from the idea

Black can play . . . tt:Jxd4 fol­
lowed by the fork . . . e5. The
simplification of pieces will often
diminish White's attack, but Black
must always be on guard against
desperado-type counters.
3 Illustrative game
Game 1 1
Timman- Kasparov
of preventing . . . c5, is by far the
most usual continuation in the
Samisch. It is noteworthy that
against 6 iLg5 the most popular
defence is 6 . . . c5 (even though
Black can play 6 . . . lZJc6 or 6 . . .
c6 as mentioned earlier in this
chapter) which usually transposes
to the M odern Benoni after 7 d5
e6 8 � d2 exd5 9 cxd5. It is
interesting to note, however, that
even against 6 iLe3 Black has
experimented with the surprising
gambit 6 . . . c5 which, despite
the original motivation of the text
move, appears to be playable.
6 tt:Jc6

Bugojno 1 982
Nowadays this move has taken
Siimisch Variation
the place of the historically more
1 d4 tt:J f6 important 6 . . . e5 which we exam­
2 c4 g6 ined in Chapter 3 .
3 tt:Jc3 iLg7 The third possibility, in order of
4 e4 d6 importance, is 6 . . . c6 with which
5 f3 0-0 Black prepares . . . a6 and . . . b5

1 52

in order to dissuade White from
castling q ueenside. Let's see some
possible contin uations :
( 1 ) 7 � d 2 a6 8 0-0-0 b5 9 j, h6
"$' a 5 1 0 j, xg7 �xg7 1 1 e5 dxe5
1 2 dxe5 tt:Jg8 with level chances.
(2) 7 j,d3 a6 8 tt:J ge2 (8 a4
preventing . . . b5 is also possible
but allows Black to gain control
of b4, e.g. 8 . . . a5 9 "$'d2 tt:J a6 1 0
.U d 1 e 5 1 1 tt:J ge2 tt:J b4 1 2 j, b 1
"$' e 7 1 3 0-0 and in order t o equal­
ize Black probably has to continue
with . . . exd4 followed by . . . d5) 8
. . . b5 9 0-0 tt:J bd7 1 0 "ii' d2 ( 1 0 b3
e5 1 1 d 5 will generally bring about
a Samisch centre) 10 . . . bxc4 1 1
j,xc4 tt:J b6 1 2 j,b3 a5 with a
position w here Black's sole struc­
tural handicap is the pawn on c6.
Another idea against the
Samisch Variation, w hich enjoyed
some popularity in the past, is 6
. . . b6 with the idea of playing . . .
c7-c5. A ssuming Black negotiates
some specific tactics such as 7
j,d3 c5? 8 e5 tt:Je8 9 j,e4, the
game will generally take a similar
strategic course to that in Chapter
4 after the respective advances . . .
c5 and d 5 .
7 tt:Jge2
By developing his KN on e2
White already takes steps against
the opponent's possible designs on
d4. Opting for a sharper game
with opposite side attacks by omit-
Samisch V ariati on: the M odern Centre
ting the development of the K N
may allow Black t o carry out his
plan, e.g. 7 "ii d2 a6 8 0-0-0 n b8
(8 . . . b 5 has also been played,
giving good results after 9 cxb5
axb5 10 j,xb5 tt:Ja5) 9 h4 e5 1 0
d5 tt:Jd4 1 1 tt:Jge2 c 5 1 2 dxc6 bxc6
1 3 tt:Jxd4 exd4 14 j,xd4 j,e6
and \Vhite's small material advan­
tage is irrelevant given the violence
of the mutual attacks.
7 a6 (250)
After having achieved his aim
of preventing White developing
his KB, and consequently from
castling kingside, Black begins his
counterplay on the queenside. At
this stage, or at latest after the
moves 8 � d2 .U b8, White must
decide which plan to play. He can
choose from the following : ( 1 ) to
play d4- d 5 in order to free the
K N from the defence of d4; (2) to
follow a waiting policy by organiz­
ing the advance b2�-b4; (3) to play
1 53
Samisch V ariation: the M odern Centre
l2Je2-c 1 allowing Black to play
. . . e5 followed by . . . l2J d4; (4) to
castle q ueenside and attack on the
opposite flank.
We will consider some examples
of the first three given that the
fourth is examined i n the continu­
ation of the game :
( 1 ) 8 "iWd2 � b8 9 d5 l2Je5 1 0
l2Jg3 c 6 1 1 .te2 (or 1 1 f4 l2Jeg4
1 2 .ta7 � a8 1 3 .i.. g 1 h5 1 4 h 3
l2Jh6 with complications) 1 1
b5 with m utual chances.
(2) 8 ..,d2 (alternatively : 8 a3
.td7 9 b4 � e8 1 0 g3 b5 1 1 c5 a5
with equal chances; or 8 � b 1
.i.. d 7 9 b4 b5 1 0 cxb5 axb5 1 1 d5
l2Je5 12 l2J d4 e6 1 3 dxe6 fxe6 with
complex play) 8 . . . � b8 9 a3 (or
9 � b 1 .i.. d 7 10 b4 .., c8 1 1 b5
l2Ja5 12 l2Jf4 and White has suc­
ceeded in freeing his knight from
the task of controlling d4) 9 . . .
j,d7 1 0 b4 b 5 1 1 cxb5 axb5 1 2
d 5 l2Je5 1 3 l2Jd4 e6 with a position
which has been shown to be fav­
ourable to White after 14 i.e2.
(3) 8 l2J c l (or 8 .., d2 � b8 9
l2J c 1 e5 1 0 d5 l2Jd4 1 1 l2J 1 e2 c5
12 dxc6 and now Black can either
play 1 2 . . . l2J xc6 with a compli­
cated game or 1 2 . . . bxc6 1 3 l2Jxd4
exd4 1 4 .t xd4 1W a 5 and Black's
advantage in development com­
pensates the sacrificed pawn) 8 . . .
e5 9 d5 l2J d4 1 0 l2Jb3 l2Jxb3 (or
10 . . . c5 1 1 dxc6 bxc6 as before)
1 54
1 1 1Wxb3 c5 1 2 dxc6 bxc6 1 3 0-0-0
..,e7 with chances for both sides.
8 jVd2 � b8
This position can be reached by
various move orders. At we saw
in the preceding note, White still
has to clarify his intentions.
9 h4
White opens hostilities : the text
move implies opposite side
attacks. Two less common
methods of beginning the attack
are 9 g4 and 9 � h 6 .
9 b5
At the time this game was
played the text move was quite
usual. Only afterwards, in fact, did
Black begin to favour spending a
tempo on the prophylactic
advance . . . h7-h5 before starting
his counterplay. Later on, Kaspa­
rov himself declared the text move
dubious in notes to a game he
played with White against Spas­
sky. Nowadays, 9 . . . h5 has
become the standard response and
advanced theoretical researches
begin at this point. Just as an
example, here are some possible
continuations : 1 0 0-0-0 ( 1 0 � h6,
1 0 l2Jd5, and 1 0 l2J c 1 are also
possible) 1 0 . . . b5 1 1 l2Jd5 ( 1 1
l2Jf4 and 1 1 i.h6 have also been
played) 1 1 . . . bxc4 1 2 !2J xf6 + ( 1 2
g4 and 1 2 �h6 have also been

tried) 1 2 . . . �xf6 ( 1 2 . . . exf6!? is
possible) 1 3 g4 ttJ b4 14 tt:Jc3 c5
15 �xc4 cxd4 16 �xd4 "i/ c7
with roughly balanced chances.
10 h5 e5
In the game mentioned above
between Kasparov and Spassky,
1 0 . . . bxc4?! was played, but after
1 1 g4! the impending violence of
White's attack prompted Black
into the adventurous 1 1
� xg4!? which, although in fact it
won, should still have left him with
a difficult defensive task.
11 d5 tt:J a5
12 tt:Jg3 (25 1 )
12 bxc4
After 1 2 . . . b4 White could
have used his flexibility in castling,
typical of the Samisch variation,
e.g. 1 3 tt:Jd 1 c6 1 4 tt:Jf2 �d7 1 5
b3 l:t e8 1 6 �e2 "i/e7 1 7 0-0 with
some advantage.
13 0-0-0
Samisch V ariation: the M odern Centre
A trappy move. At fi rst sight it
appears that White is declaring
that he considers his attacking
chances to be superior, but in fact
it conceals the idea of preventing
the protection of Black's knight
on a5 by . . . c7-c6 as we will see
later.
13 tt:J d7?
Black is expecting 1 4 hxg6 fxg6
1 5 � h 6 which he intends to meet
with 1 5 . . . tt:Jc5, threatening . . .
tt:Jb3 + . But White's idea catches
him unprepared.
14 hxg6 fxg6
1 4 . . . hxg6 would indeed have
been met by 1 5 �h6 with deadly
threats.
15 tt:J b 1 !
Here w e see White's hidden
idea : castling q ueenside has
increased his pressure on the d­
file so that . . . c7-c6 would cost
Black a pawn even if he hadn't
played 1 3 . . . tt:J d7.
15 l:tb5
There is no choice, as 1 5
tt:Jb7 1 6 �xc4 would be pos­
itional resignation. Kasparov is
hoping for 16 lila3 tt:Jc5 muddy­
ing the waters, e.g. 1 7 'lt b 1 c3 1 8
"il xc3 tt:J a4 etc.
16 b4! cxb3
1 55
Samisch Variation: t he M odern Centre

1 6 . . . tt:l b 7 1 7 .i.xc4 4:Jb6 1 8 time that his q ueen check has only
.i.xb5 axb5 1 9 .i.xb6 cxb6 would made things worse : on 20 cxd7?
have been equally disastrous given l2J c4 2 1 dxc8(�) � xc8 and Black
that Black would not have the actually wins!
slightest compensation for the
20 4:Jf8
exchange.
21 � xd6
17 .i. xb5
Were it not for the roller-coaster
A whole rook up, White obvi­ ride in between, this move could
ously has a winning position, but be seen as the culmination of t he
as is well known in chess a move 1 3. I ndeed, it seems that
moment's i nattention can be White's advantage is still sufficient
sufficient to ruin everything. to win.
17 c5 21 � e8
18 dxc6? 22 � d8 � xc6 +
23 � b2 (252)
The simple 1 8 .i.e2 would have
kept all the advantage.

18 axb5
19 'ii d5 + ?

Confronted with the threat of

. . . tt:l a5-c4xe3 followed by . . .
bxa2 it seems natural to play the
queen to the a2-g8 diagonal, but
in reality this move does nothing
at all to avert the threat. White
could still have won by playing 1 9
cxd7! tt:l c4 20 dxc8(�) � xc8 2 1 Faced with t he double threat of
axb3! tt:l xd2 + 22 �xd2 with a �xa5 and l:t cl it looks as if
decisive advantage. Black is finished. Kasparov finds
After the text move Kasparov the impossible.
squeezes sufficient resources from
23 � aS!!
his position to save the game.
24 l:tc 1 tt:lc4 + !
19 l:tfi 25 bxc4 l:td7!
20 axb3 26 'ii e8

White realizes m the nick of Now it is White who must

1 56
 Samisch Variation: t he M odern Centre

defend well : after 26 'ii' h4? bxc4 28 �c2

27 tt:Jc3 'ii' b7 + 28 � a l 'ii a6 +
29 tt:Ja2 � d3 and . . . ..te6 Black's Forced in order to avoid 28 . . .
attack would be extremely dang­ � b7 + .
erous.
28 � d2 +
26 bxc4
27 tt:Jc3 'iV c6

27 . . . "ti!Vb7 + ? 28 �a l "ti!V a6 + A fair res ult after such interesting

29 tt:J a2 � d3 would no longer play from both players. After 29
work because of 30 � xh 7 ! , e.g. 30 �xd2 "ti!V xe8 the opposing forces
. . . �xh7 3 1 "t/!Vf7 and wins. are in equilibrium.

1 57
8 The O rthod ox Centre
a g a i nst g 2-g 3

Main Line: Orthodox System Kavalek Variation

against g2 -g3 6 . . . c6 7 CZJc3 'ii' a5 8 h3 e5 9
1 d4 CZJf6 2 c4 g6 3 g3 �g7 4 e4 exd4 1 0 tz:l xd4
�g2 d6 5 CZJ f3 0-0 6 0-0 CZJ bd7
7 CZJc3 e5 8 e4 exd4 9 CZJxd4 (253)

1 Strategic Ideas
As one would expect, comparison
of the pawn structure here with
that of the other Orthodox centre
examined in C hapter 6 (see Diag­
ram 2 1 1 ) reveals a close affinity
(254).

Black can make the central

exchange in various positions, e.g.
1 d4 CZJf6 2 c4 g6 3 g3 �g7 4 254
�g2 d6 5 CZJf3 0-0 6 0-0 and now :

Orthodox System against g2-g3

6 . . . CZJ bd7 7 tz:lc3 e5 8 e4 c6 9
h 3 (or 9 b3 exd4 1 0 tz:l xd4) 9 . . .

'ii' b6 (or either 9 . . . .l:t. e8 1 0

�e3 exd4 1 1 tz:l xd4 o r 9 . . .

'ii' a5 1 0 .l:t. e 1 exd4 1 1 tz:lxd4)

1 0 .l:t. e l exd4 1 1 CZJ xd4

1 58

Although the fund amental stra­
tegic ideas remain the same as
those pictured in Diagram 2 1 2, the
fianchetto of White's KB naturally
produces considerable differences
which we will try to make clear
by starting with the most obvious.
T h e p ress u re on W h i t e ' s
u n p rotected c - p a w n
I n comparison with the Orthodox
centre without g2-g3 White has
reinforced his e-pawn but conse­
q uently left the c-pawn unprotec­
ted. It is logical, therefore, that
pressure on c4 should become cen­
tral to Black's strategical oper­
ations. Black frequently uses his
q ueen to attack White's c-pawn
and typically opens a route for her
majesty to the queenside with the
thematic . . . c7-c6 (255).
The queen can attack c4 from
the three squares b4, c5 and a6,
all of which can be reached from
either b6 or a5, and thus it is not
easy for White to predict Black's
The Orthodox Centre against g2-g3
intentions. When Black plays . . .
'iWd8-b6, however, it is clear
White must pay particular atten­
tion to tactical threats against his
knight on d4 from the concerted
action of the black queen and KB,
whereas after . . . 'iW d8-a5 White
must take into consideration not
only the fact that b2-b3 is (tem­
porarily at least) unplayable but
also the possibility that Black
could transfer his queen to the
kingside by . . . 'iW a5-h5. As i n the
Orthodox centre with out g2-g3
Black can also pressurize the c­
pawn with a knight on e5 or b6
and his QB on e6 (see Diagram
21 8).
Black generally attacks the
white c-pawn in order to increase
his dark square dynamism after
b2-b3, but it should be noted
that White is often quite ready to
sacrifice the pawn if threatened by
the black queen as its capture
clearly entails risks and will cost
the opponent a lot of time in
getting her back into safety (256).
1 59
The O rthodox Centre agai nst g2-g3
In this kind of situation, for
example, White can play 2Le3
intending, after . . . 11¥ b4, to ignore
the threat to the c-pawn and
instead create difficulties for the
black queen by a3 11¥ xc4, t2Jd4
(25 7).
The vast amount of time it costs
Black to capture the pawn and get
the queen back into safety clearly
gives White excellent compens­
ation.
In other positions, when Black's
d-pawn is not protected, the attack
on c4 can simply lead to a trading
of pawns (258).
Here, for example, faced with
1 60
the double threat of . . . 'i:!V xc4 and
. . . t2J xe4, White can invite the
trading of pawns by t2Jb3 'i:!V xc4,
'i:!V xd6.
The p ress u re on W h i t e ' s
e - pa w n
Despite the increased protection
afforded by the fianchettoed
bishop, Black does not give up his
thematic pressure on White's e­
pawn usually effected by the KR
on e8 and k nights on c5 and f6.
Although he can hardly hope to
force White into playing f2-f3, as
in the other Orthodox, neverthe­
less Black's pressure does have the
effect of tying down White's pieces
to some extent.
It should be remarked that as
in Chapter 6, Black's pressure
against White's c- and/or e-pawns
can occasionally be helpful in ach­
ieving the liberating . . . d6-d5
advance even though it is true that
the presence of White's KB on g2
makes the implementation of this
idea much more difficult.
Just as we have already seen
with the c-pawn, White can some­
times sacrifice his e-pawn in order
to weaken the opponent's king
position ( 259).
Here, for example, it seems that
'i:!V c2 is not possible on account of
. . . t2J fxe4, t2J xe4 .,txd4 winning
a pawn. I n reality, however, White

has a concrete idea m mind
�g5 (260)
. . . after which a subsequent check
on f6 will oblige Black to give up
his dark squared bishop (even after
. . . f6, ct'lxf6 + �.xf6, ll xe8 +
� xe8, �,xf6), leaving senous
holes around his king.
The p ro p h y l a ct i c a dva nce
h 2- h 3
I n this Orthodox centre (against
g2-g3) White practically always
needs to control the g4 square by
h2- h 3 . Whilst the most obvious
point of this move lies in being able
The O rthodox Centre against g2-g3
to play � c l -e3 without having to
worry about . . . ct'lf6-g4, it also
proves useful for other reasons. As
White nearly always has to protect
his e-pawn with ll fe l , the dimin­
ished protection of f2 enables
Black to advantageously im­
plement the tactical theme noted
in Diagram 223. Let's consider the
following situation (26 1 ).
m
261
Black can play . . . ct'lg4, obtain­
ing active play after � xg4 � xd4,
and the advantage after ct'l xc6
bxc6, � xg4 ct'le5, � e2 �e6 etc.
Black's tactical themes are shown
even more clearly when White
answers . . . ct'lg4 with h 3 which
can be met with . . . � f6 forcing
an exchange of knights (either after
capturing on g4 or following ct'l f3
ct'lge5) which allows Black to
complete his development easily
by putting his QN on e5 and
playing . . . �e6.
It i s instructive to compare this
position with that in Diagram 223
(see also line 2 in the note to
161
The Orthodox Centre against g2-g3
White's eighth move in Game 1 0).
Here, Black does well to avoid
(from the diagram) . . . tZ:Jg4, h 3
'ir' b6 a s after t2Jce2 tZ:J ge5, b 3
t2J c 5 White h a s far fewer problems
given that his e-pawn is protected
and the rook has f1 available as
a flight square and can calmly
continue with �e3, since any
occupation of d3 would only be
counter-productive for Black.
After h2-h3, therefore, Black
generally plays . . . 'ir' b6 in con­
j unction with . . . t2Je8 (262).
This retreat aims to shift the
t2Jd4 from its central position
(additional i nducement coming
from the manoeuvre . . . tZ:Je8-c7-
e6 if White plays t2J ce2) as well
as protecting d6.
The f i g ht fo r s p a c e
As has already been observed,
Black's play principally revolves
around his pressure against c4 and
logically, therefore, his efforts are
1 62
directed at impeding its simple
protection by b2-b3 or at least
making it less attractive. Rather
curiously, although on the one
hand Black tries to provoke b2-b3
(in order to increase his dynamism
on the dark squares in general and
on the long diagonal in particular),
on the other hand this rock-solid
protection of c4 also has the effect
of taking some of the bite out of
Black's counterplay. At the same
time, he needs to guard against
White gaining more space on t he
queenside by b4. I n an attempt
to reconcile these demands, Black
often does not simply restrict him­
self to protecting the c5 square
with the thematic . . . a7-a5 but
also continues with the further
advance . . . a4 (263).
This advance has several aims :
( 1 ) to free a5 for the q ueen; (2) to
semi-isolate the c-pawn with the
thematic manoeuvre . . . tZ:J f6-d7-
e5 in mind; (3) to be able to open
the a-file should White play b2-

b3 or b4; (4) to have . . . a4-
a3 available in order to further
weaken the long black diagonal.
White has sought to neutralize
these ideas by playing b2-b3 in
conjunction with shifting the Q R
off t h e long diagonal.
The fight for space on the king­
side is more one-sided. Since
White is hardly ever obliged to
protect the e-pawn by f2-f3, he can
instead use this pawn aggressively,
after appropri ate preparation, in
order both to gain space in general
and control the square e5 in par­
ticular by playing f2 -f4 (264).
Given that f2-f4 weakens the
g l - a7 diagonal, it is practically
always prepared by �c l -e3
which in turn, as we h ave seen,
is preceded by h2-h3. Generally
speaking, this is the best square
for the QB even if occasionally
(when White wants to pressurize
d6) it is also usefully placed on
f4. If White finds it necessary to
protect his e-pawn after the
The O rthodox Centre against g2-g3
advance f2-f4 he can do so by
retreating with �e3-f2. White
sometimes augments this kingside
expansion with g3-g4 before look­
ing for a possible breakthrough.
In some exceptional positions
Black can fight to retain control
of e5 (and the dark squares in
general) by means of the advance
. . . h7-h5-h4 aiming to deprive
the advance f2-f4 of its natural
support from the g-pawn. The aim
is to get White to play g3-g4 in
order to be able to anticipate the
advance of the f-pawn with . . . g6-
g5 (265).
265
It must be remembered, however,
that such a plan can only s ucceed
in rather exceptional circum­
stances.
The p ress u re o n W h i t e ' s
h - pa w n
Black can occasionally try to
weaken the opponent's k ingside
by attacking the h-pawn with the
1 63
The O rthodox Centre against g2-g3

aim of forcing either h 3-h4 or g3- The ex p osed p o s i t i o n of

g4 at an inconvenient moment B lack's q ueen
(266).
There are many combinative
possibilities associated with the
exposed position of the black
queen; we illustrate the most fre­
quent.
White can sometimes try to trap
the q ueen (26 7).

26 7

It must be clearly understood

that this diagram shows all of
Black's methods of pressurizing
the h-pawn at once! Despite
appearances, then, it is only very
rarely that such an operation
really assumes the characteristics In this normal enough situation,
of an attack. White can play CL:Ja4 and if . . .
� b4 (there may also be reasons
why the thematic alternative . . .
'i¥ a6 is not advisable) the trap
snaps shut with b3! (268)

268

2 Tactical Ideas
I n comparison with the other
Orthodox centre examined in
Chapter 6, where most of the tacti­
cal themes were in Black's favour,
here there is more of a balance
given that Black's attacks on the
c-pawn with the q ueen are double-
edged to say the least. . . . and Black cannot play . . .

1 64

Si,xa l as he would lose the queen
after a3.
Another characteristic combi­
native theme is the exploitation of
the a3 -f8 diagonal (269).
The clearest way for White to
take advantage of the dangerously
exposed position of the black
queen is by playing e5 and answer­
ing . . . dxe5 with Si,c5. After . . .
� xc4, Si,xf8 Si,xf8 material is
level, but then comes the sting
in the tail of the combination-
4:J x a 5 ! --and White gains the
advantage as after . . . � xa5, �d8
(2 70).
White wins material thanks to
The Orthodox Centre against g2-g3
the triple attack on a5, c8 and f6.
A related idea is seen in the
following example (27 1 ).
271
Despite appearances, White can
play c5 intending to answer . . .
� xc5 with 4:Je6 and . . . dxc5 with
4:Jb3 regaining the pawn with a
good game.
I n d i rect d efence of W h i t e ' s
e- pawn
It quite often happens that Black's
thematic pressure against White's
e-pawn is hampered by the pre­
sence of his queen on e7 (2 72).
Black cannot capture on e4 by
1 65
The O rt h odox Centre against g2--g3

. . . tt:l fxe4, tt:l xe4 tt:l xe4, jLxe4 I tt:l f3 tt:l f6

� xe4, because of jLd2 with a 2 c4 g6
decisive gain of material. 3 g3 jLg7
4 jL g2 0-0
5 d4 d6
The wea k n ess of f3
6 0-0
Although White's queen is norm­
With either this move or 6 tt:lc3
ally placed on c2 in these vari­
we have the basic starting position
ations, it is as well to show the
of the lines where White fianchet­
following simple combination
toes his KB. Whether White has
which can occur when White's
played 6 0-0 or 6 tt:lc3 can result
queen is at a knight's move from
in some slight differences which
f3. Although it is illustrated here
will be noted both in this and the
in its most basic form, it should
following game.
be remembered that in practice
it can be quite heavily disguised 6 tt:l bd7
(27 3).
With this move Black prepares
the advance . . . e7-e5 which brings
about the Orthodox System. The
other possibilities are : 6 . . . c5
(Yugoslav Variation; see Chapter
9), 6 . . . tt:lc6, and 6 . . . c6 (the
Panno and Kavalek Variations
respectively; see Chapter 1 0).

7 tt:lc3

1 ust as Black has prepared . . .

Thanks to the fork on f3 Black e7-e5, White prepares e2-e4.
wins the h-pawn. Once both these advances have
been played it is quite logical that
White is not particularly inter­
ested in resolving the central ten­
3 Il lustrat ive game sion either by opening the centre
Game 1 2 with dxe5 or closing it by d4-d5,
Karpov-Balashov both of which diminish the activity
Moscow 1 98 1 of his KB. Black can maintain
Orthodox System the central tension fo r a certain

1 66

amount of time, but sooner or
later the necessity of moving the
QN in order to be able to move
the QB will persuade him to cap­
ture on d4. This explains why, in
the Orthodox System against g2-
g3, the Orthodox centre (which
arises after . . . exd4) predominates
over other configurations. Never­
theless, it can happen that for some
reason or other White decides to
adopt a central structure which
we have not yet examined.
This can come about, for exam­
ple, i n the Panno variation where
Black interprets the move 6 . . .
l2Jc6 as preparation for . . . e7-e5,
e.g. 7 l2Jc3 e5 8 d 5 l2Je7 9 e4, and
the affinity between this position
and that deriving from the Mar
del Plata Variation considered in
the first chapter is quite evident.
This kind of position is generally
slightly favourable to White as
he can continue virtually as in
diagrams 2 1 , 22 and 2 3 but with
the K B in the 'right' place. If Black
tries to prevent this by playing . . .
h 6 and . . . f5, then White can make
use of his kingside fianchetto to
counter Black's kingside demon­
stration by taking on f5 and play­
ing f4 with ideas similar to those
in diagrams 62, 63 and 70.
White can also choose to bring
about a simplified centre, by play­
ing 7 ..- c2, with a specific idea in
mind, e.g. 7 . . . e5 8 l:!: e 1 l:!: e8 9
The Orthodox Centre against g2-g3
dxe5 dxe5 I 0 e4 c6. The point of
playing 7 "t!V c2 in place of 7 l2Jc3
becomes clear not only in the rapid
occupation of the d-file with the
KR but also in the faster fixing
and occupation of d6 by means
of b4, c5 and l2J bd2-c4-d6 (cf.
Diagram 1 95). The possibility of
this specific variation shows the
difference between playing 6 0-0
and 6 l2Jc3 (see note to White's
sixth above).
Naturally, these different
approaches to the Orthodox cen­
tre against g2-g3 can also arise
in other variations and at later
stages, as we shall see.
7 e5
8 e4
If White fails to make this
advance then Black can try to
take advantage of its omission by
pushing his own e-pawn, e.g. 8 b3
n e8 9 ..-c2 c6 10 n d I e4 1 1
l2Jg5 e3 1 2 Jixe3? nxe3 1 3 fxe3
l2J g4 with some advantage.
8 c6
Black has experimented quite
frequently with 8 . . . a6 which,
according to White's response, can
produce centres substantially
similar to those considered in
chapters 2, 4 and 5, e.g. : ( 1 ) 9
d5 (9 dxe5 dxe5 producing the
simplified centre has also been
played) 9 . . . b5 10 cxb5 axb5 1 1
1 67
The O rt h odox Centre against g2-g3
b4 'Ll b6 1 2 .tg5 .td7 1 3 'iWe2
'iW e8 14 'Ll d2 h 5 i ntending to
continue with . . . 'Llh7 and . . . f5
(see Diagram 59); (2) 9 .!:t e 1 exd4
10 'Llxd4 'Lle5 1 1 b3 c5 1 2 'Llc2
b5 1 3 cxb5 axb5 1 4 'Llxb5 .ta6
1 5 .tfl d 5 (see Diagram 1 45).
The text move, with which
Black postpones the decision to
exchange central pawns, has long
been the most popular. In earlier
times, however, the normal conti­
nuation was 8 . . . exd4 9 'Ll xd4
.!:t e8 1 0 h3 'Llc5 1 I .!:t e i a5 after
which Black might either try to
get by without . . . c6 or play it at
some later time.
9 h3 (274)
The basic idea behind the
advance h2-h3 is to prepare to
defend the e-pawn by .!:t e i against
Black's plan of . . . exd4, . . . .!:t e8
and . . . 'Llc5. Trying to get by
without this move runs up against
tactical difficulties, e.g. 9 .!:t e 1 ?!
exd4 10 t2l xd4 t2lg4 I 1 h3 'iY f6
1 68
as elaborated in the commentary
to Diagram 26 I . This explains why
attempts to diverge from the text
move generally only result in a
postponement of h3, e.g. 9 b3 exd4
1 0 t2l xd4 'Llc5 1 1 h3 .!:t e8 1 2
.!:t e 1 a 5 etc.
9 'iW b6
The time has arrived for Black
to declare his intentions, at least
to some extent. As has already
been made clear, Black's main idea
is to pressurize e4 or c4. In the
first case he puts his KR on e8
and, after the capture . . . exd4, the
QN on c5. Additionally, Black's
queen will sometimes augment the
pressure from e7. I n the second
case, on the other hand, the black
queen will either be played to b6,
as in the present game, or to a5,
and the QN may go to e5 after
the exchange . . . exd4. Obviously,
these concepts must only be
treated as guidelines given that in
practice all sorts of mixtures can
occur.
Let us briefly consider the main
alternatives to the text move :
( 1 ) 9 . . . .!:t e8 1 0 b3 (White can
also permit the advance . . . a7-
a5-a4, e.g. 1 0 .!:t e i a5 1 I 'iWc2
exd4 1 2 'Ll xd4 t2lc5 I 3 .te3 a4
etc., or 10 .te3 exd4 I 1 t2lxd4
t2lc5 I 2 'iY c2 a5 1 3 .!:t ad l 'iY e7
1 4 .!:t fe i a4 etc.) I O . . . exd4 1 I
t2l xd4 t2lc5 I 2 .!:t e I a5 I 3 .!:t b I

( 1 3 � b2 a4! with the idea of
answering 1 4 b4 with 1 4 . . . a3 is
good for Black) 1 3 . . . h6 (in order
to reply to 1 4 �f4 with 14 . . . g5)
1 4 l:r e2 �d7 1 5 �f4 "YW b6 1 6
�e3 (if 1 6 �xd6 tt:Jfxe4) 1 6 . . .
"YW c7 1 7 "i!Vc2 "i!Vc8 1 8 �h2 l:r e5
with approximate equality.
(2) 9 . . . "i!Va5 10 l:r e 1 exd4 1 1
tt:Jxd4 l:r e8 (or 1 1 . . . "YWc5 1 2
tt:J b3 "i!V xc4 1 3 "i!V xd6 with
chances for both sides) 12 �e3
tt:Je5 1 3 �fl �e6 14 tt:Jxe6
l:r xe6 1 5 f4 (so as to a void the
threat of 1 5 . . . tt:J xe4 1 6 tt:J xe4
"YW xe 1 etc.) with a slight advantage
for White.
This kind of position, with . . .
"YW a5, can also be obtained via the
Kavalek Variatio n : 1 d4 tt:Jf6 2 c4
g6 3 g3 �g7 4 � g2 d6 5 tt:Jf3
0-0 6 0-0 c6 7 tt:Jc3 "i!Va5 8 h3 (a
curious transposition to a centre
similar to the Petrosian centre
could come about after 8 "i!V d2!?
e5 9 d5 c5 10 a3 tt:Je8 1 1 e4 "YWd8
12 "i!Vc2 tt:Jd7 1 3 �g5 �f6 1 4
� d2 tt:Jg7 1 5 tt:J e 1 �e7 1 6 tt:Jd3
f5 1 7 f4 with a marked similarity
with Diagram 65) 8 . . . e5 (8 . . .
"i!V a6 has also been played) 9 e4
(White can also impose a simpl­
ified centre after 9 dxe5 dxe5, e.g.
1 0 e4 tt:Jbd7 1 1 a3 "i!V c5 1 2 "i!Ve2
'ii e7 1 3 b4 tt:Je8 14 �e3 tt:Jc7 1 5
l:r ad 1 tt:Je6 1 6 c5 etc.) 9 . . . exd4
1 0 tt:J xd4. At this point 1 0 . . .
lLl bd7 would transpose to line
The Orthodox Centre agai nst g2-g3
2 above, but alternatively Black
could also try to immediately
attack Whi te's c-pawn, e.g. 10 . . .
'ii c5 1 1 tt:Jb3 'ii b4 (or 1 1
"YW xc4 1 2 'ii xd6 etc.) 1 2 �e3 a5
1 3 e5 dxe5 14 �c5 'ii xc4 1 5
� xf8 itxf8 1 6 tt:Jxa5 ! and White
has gained material (see Diagrams
269 and 270).
10 l:r el
The logical follow-up to the pre­
ceding move. Other possibilities :
( 1 ) 1 0 b3 exd4 1 1 tt:J a4 ( 1 1 tt:Jxd4?
tt:Jxe4) 1 1 . . . 'ii a5 1 2 tt:Jxd4 d5
with complications; (2) 1 0 d5 tt:Jc5
1 1 tt:Je1 cxd5 1 2 cxd5 �d7 1 3
tt:Jd3 tt:Jxd3 1 4 'ii xd3 l:r fc8 with
balanced chances.
10 exd4
Instead of the text move, Black
can also try to maintain the central
tension seeing as the opponent
has practically run out of useful
moves. I n this case, White can
establish other centres similar to
those examined in chapters 2 and
5. For example, ( 1 ) 1 0 . . . tt:Je8 1 1
dxe5 dxe5 ( 1 1 . . . tt:J xe5 can be
met by 1 2 tt:Jxe5 ..t xe5 1 3 tt:J a4
'ii b4 1 4 ..tfl with the threat of
1 5 ..td2) 1 2 b3 tt:Jc7 1 3 ..ta3
l:r e8 14 tt:Ja4 'ii a5 1 5 ..td6 tt:Je6
1 6 b4 'ii d8 1 7 c5 with some
advantage to White; (2) 10 . . . l:r e8
1 1 d5 ( 1 1 l:r b 1 ?! is dubious
because after 1 1 . . . exd4 1 2 tt:Jxd4
1 69
The Orthodox Cen tre agai nst g2-g3

l2J g4 1 3 l2J ce2 l2Jge5 White must Black prepares to born bard the
resign himself to the loss of the c­ e- and c-pawns.
pawn either with 14 b3 l2J xc4 or
12 l2Ja4
14 'iW c2 'iW b4) 1 1 . . . l2Jc5 12 .id: b 1
a5 1 3 ile3 'iW c7 1 4 l2Jd2 ild 7 An example of the difficulty
1 5 ilfl with similar themes to White can experience in rebuffing
those shown in diagram 7 4. the attack against his central
pawns can be seen in the following
11 l2Jxd4 (275)
line : 1 2 .id: e2 'iW b4 ( 1 2 . . . l2J xe4
1 3 l2J xe4 1\V xd4 and now not 1 4
l2J f6 + l2Jxf6 1 5 'iW xd4 .ld: xe2
with some advantage to Black, but
1 4 ile3 and White stands better)
1 3 .ld: c2 l2Jc5 1 4 ild2 'iWb6 1 5
ile3 'iW c7 1 6 f3 a5 1 7 ilf2 a4 1 8
.id: b 1 and White stands somewhat
better.
12 11Va5
12 . . . '1Wa6 came into consider­
ation.
Black used to defend this pos­
ition with 1 1 . . . l2J g4 before it was 13 ilf4 l2Je5
realized that White could gain the 14 b3 l2Jfd7
advantage by 1 2 l2J ce2 l2Jge5 1 3 15 il d2! 11t' d8
b3 l2Jc5 1 4 ile3, as explained in 16 ilc3 l2Jc5
the commentary to Diagram 26 1 . 17 l2Jb2!
1 1 . . . .id: e8, which we will see in
Black had been counting on
the game, became the established
1 7 l2J xc5 dxc5 1 8 l2Je2 f5 with
continuation following the demise
balanced chances. Karpov's move,
of 1 1 . . . l2J g4, although Black
on the other hand, deprives Black
has also tried 1 1 . . . l2Je8 quite
of his normal counterplay and
frequently. One example of this
leaves him exposed to the
latter is 1 2 l2J b3 a5 1 3 ile3 'iWb4
advances b3-b4 and f2-f4.
14 a3 'iW xc4 1 5 l2Jd4 and White,
threatening ilfl , has fine com­ 17 a5
pensation for the pawn. 18 a3! (2 76)
11 .ld: e8 With his last move which pre-

1 70
 The Orthodox Centre agai nst g2-g3

24 it xc3
25 � xc3 � b6
26 tt:J d3 it f5?!
Compromising an already
tricky situation. Perhaps it was
necessary to play 26 . . . � xe 1 +
27 � xe 1 � e8 i n order not to lose
control of the e-file.
27 � ad 1 �. xd3
vents the possibility of 1 8 . . . a4 1 9 28 � xd3 � f2
b4 a 3 Karpov has emerged on top 29 � de3 � xe3
from the opening : he has won the 30 � xe3 'lt> f8
fight for space on both wings, 31 � d4!
whilst his central pawns are solidly The threat of � e8 + highlights
defended, and his black-squared the deficiencies of Black's position.
bishop is well placed to neutralize
31 � c2
its counterpart. Without Black
32 � b6 � e8
having made any obvious error
33 � xe8 + 'lt> xe8
his position is clearly inferior.
34 � xb7 c5
18 tt:J e6 35 � e4 + � xe4
19 tt:J xe6 it xe6 36 itxe4 tt:J h6
20 � c2 f5 37 g4 tt:Jg8
38 g5 tt:J e7
Fighting for space tooth and
39 h4 'lt>f7
nail.
40 h5 'lt>g7
21 f4 tt:J fi 41 'lt>g2
22 'lt>h2 fxe4 1 -0
23 it xe4 it d7
Black will slowly be squeezed
Hoping to be able to play . . . to death, e.g. 4 1 . . . 'lt>f7 42 'lt>g4
� xe4. 'lt>g7 (42 . . . 'lt>e6 43 hxg6 fxg6 44
�xg6) 43 h6 + 'lt>f7 44 f5 gxf5 +
24 itg2
45 �xf5 'lt>g8 46 ite6 + �f8 47
24 itxg6 hxg6 25 � xg6 tt:Je5 'lt> f4 tt:Jc6 48 'lt>f5 tt:Jd4 + 49 �f6
26 fxe5 � e6 is unclear. tt:Jxb3 50 g6 and wins.

171
9 The Y u g osla v Centre
Given that White, as we will see,
will continue with 9 tbd2, the
same position can be obtained
by transposition from the Panno
variation : 1 d4 tbf6 2 c4 g6 3 g3
�g7 4 �g2 d6 5 t2Jf3 0-0 6 0-0
tbc6 7 d 5 tba5 8 tbd2 c5 9 tbc3.
The same basic structure can
arise from other lines, e.g. 1 d4
tbf6 2 c4 g6 3 g3 �g7 4 �g2 d6
5 tbf3 0-0 6 0-0 and now :
Yugoslav Variation
6 . . . c5 7 d 5
1 Strategic Ideas
Consideration of the pawn struc­
ture enables us identify the main
1 72
strategic themes for both players
(2 78).
2 78
As in the Averbakh centre (see
Diagram 1 3 7), White's basic idea
here is to achieve the central
breakthrough e2-e4-e5 (sup­
ported by f2-f4 if necessary), whilst
Black's counterplay hinges on
attacking the pawns on c4 and d5.
Here, however, Black will norm­
ally effect the flank advance . . .
b7-b5 before deciding how to con­
tinue his central play. Generally
speaking, seeing as an early central
counter could lead to the rapid
activation of White's KB, it is
understandable that Black should
delay his central action, and that
according to circumstances it may
take the form of either the straight-

forward . . . e7-e6 or the multi­
purpose . . . e7-e5. This latter
advance contains several ideas :
( 1 ) prophylaxis against the
advance of White's e-pawn; (2) the
beginning of a kingside offensive
(to be augmented by the advance
of the f-pawn); (3) a kind of chal­
lenge to White's centre since it
invites d5xe6.
I t is difficult to draw up hard
and fast rules as to how White
should react to this . . . e7-e5
advance, but generally speaki ng
we can suggest the following : that
White should capture en passant
if Black has a strong initiative on
the queenside, but agree to closing
the centre either when he is ready
to confront Black in the centre
and on the kingside, or when he
discerns a possibility of turning
the tables on the queenside.
Amongst all these intricacies,
the position of Black's QN (which
can be either on a5 or b8) has
considerable influence on both
players' plans.
T h e f l a n k att a c k with . .
b5
In contrast with the A verbakh
centre, it is rare, but not imposs­
ible, in the Yugoslav centre for the
advance . . . b7-b5 to be played as
a gambit. When Black's QN is on
b8 the normal method of prepar­
ing . . . b7-b5 consists of the
The Yugoslav Centre
manoeuvre . . . l2J b8-a6-c7 fol­
lowed by the thematic moves . . .
a7-a6 and . . . l:i:. a8-b8. White
usually opposes this plan by a2-
a4 i ntending, if Black does not
choose to play the preventive . . .
b7 -b6 before continuing with . . .
a7-a6 etc., to continue with a4-
a5 (2 79).
In such positions Black some­
times plays . . . b7-b5 immediately,
recapturing after axb6 with the
rook, and other times plays . . .
l2J f6-d7 so as to be able to recap­
ture on b6 with the knight. I t
should b e observed that Black can
also achieve this placing of k nights
on c7 and d7 with an inversion of
. b7- the normal roles, the QN going to
d 7 and the KN to c7 ( . . . l2Jf6-
e8-c7).
When, on the other hand,
Black's QN is on a5 (see Diagram
277), it is evident that White is
unable to prevent . . . b7-b5 by
a2--a4-a5 and therefore he will
have to defend his c-pawn by b2-
1 73
The Y ugoslav Centre
b3 if he does not want to fall in
with his opponent's plans and play
c4xb5. This move is not possible
immediately, however, as it would
allow Black to utilize the pin on
the long diagonal with . . . tt:Jf6-
e4. In fact, the protection of the c­
pawn requires a threefold oper­
ation : ( 1 ) the immediate defence
of the pawn by tt:Jf3-d2; (2) the
defence of the QN by ir'd 1 -c2;
(3) the advance b2-b3. Whilst this
is going on, Black will organize
the . . . b7-b5 advance (280).
Whilst White will normally now
complete his development by plac­
ing the QB on b2 and the QR on
either b 1 or e 1, the time has come
for Black to take a decision con­
cerni ng the ad vance of his e-pawn.
Thus the strategic battle extends
over the whole board and subse­
quent developments will depend
very much on the decisions taken
by both players on the tension
points c4/b5 and d 5/e6 (e5).
1 74
The p a w n wea k n esses o n
bJ o r c4
Apart, of course, from some spec­
ific exceptions, Black's flank
attack against c4 generally creates
a structural weakness in White's
positiOn. Following the
manoeuvre . . . l2J a6-c7 (see Diag­
ram 279) and the advance . . . b7-
b5, Black's main aim is to attack
White's c-pawn whether he has
recaptured on b6 with knight or
rook (in the latter case he will
continue with . . . � b6-b4) in
order to get White to play b2-b3.
As preparation for b2-b3 White
often shifts his rook off the long
diagonal (28 1 ).
281
Although White has firmly
defended c4 with his b-pawn,
Black has nevertheless made stra­
tegic gains insofar as the b-pawn
is more vulnerable on b3 than b2
and the scope of Black's KB has
been increased.
Alternatively, when Black's QN
is on a5 the tension between the

pawns on b5 and c4 is generally
resolved by an exchange of pawns
which leaves White with a struc­
tural weakness on c4. From this
point Black will direct the greater
part of his efforts against c4 in
addition, of course, to making the
most of the open b-file (282).
The respective techniques for
attacking and defending the c­
pa wn are as follows :
( I ) the straightforward threat to
the pawn by . . 1l b4 which White
. Given that the action of Black's
can almost always beat off by a2-
a3 although Black will then have
succeeded in weakening b3.
(2) the simple threat to capture
the c-pawn-defending tt:Jd2 by
playing . . . .tg7-h6 which White
can either block, with f2-f4 or
counter with the reinforcing
tt:J cb I .
(3) the indirect challenge to
White's centre by . . . e7-e6 (even
. . . e7-e5 can have a similar effect
given that the arrival of a pawn
on e5 can often be awkward for
The Yugoslav Centre
White to meet especially if he has
played f2-f4) inviting dxe6 .txe6
after which White has little choice
but to block the QB by tt:Jc3-d5.
W h i t e ' s q u e e ns i d e
ex p a n s i o n
W i t h Black's knight on a5 it is
sometimes possible for W hite him­
self to play b2-b4, supported of
course by a2-a3 (283).
283
bishop on the long diagonal is not
sufficient for Black to prevent b2-
b4, the normal method is to play
. . . 'ilc7 thus exerting an indirect
pressure on c4. Sh ould this not be
possible, then Black is obliged to
play . . . b7-b6 in order to give the
k night a retreat square.
B l a c k ' s c e n t ra l a ct i o n
As w e have already observed,
Black almost always only
implements central action with . . .
1 75
The Y ugoslav Centre
e7-e6 after having begun his flank
attack with . . . b7-b5. The attempt
by Black to block the centre by . . .
e7-e5 frequently amounts to the
same thing since White does best
to capture with d5xe6 if he finds
himself under pressure from Black
on the queenside, given that the
blockade will generally be helpful
to Black.
When Black has played . . .
CZ'la6-c7 he will almost always
recapture on e6 with the knight
for various reasons : to free the d8-
a5 diagonal for the queen, to be
ready to occupy d4 (especially, of
course, if White has played e2-e4),
and also, occasionally, to harass
or prevent the placing of a bishop
on f4. White's Q B could easily find
itself on f4 in order to support the
advance of his e-pawn or exert
pressure on the potentially weak
pawn on d6 (284).
The culmination of Black's
strategy against the opponent's
pawn centre would be to be able
1 76
to play the totally liberating . . .
d6-d5.
White can seek to exploit the
opponent's plans by trying to take
advantage of the positional weak­
nesses created by Black's advances
with . . . b7-b5 and . . . e7-e6 (or
. . . e7-e5), i.e. the squares c6 and
d5, plus the d-pawn. To this end
White can retreat his KN to d2
(285).
From this square White's knight
can exploit the weak squares
rapidly and efficiently. The poss­
ible use of b3 as a transit square
demonstrates another good
reason for Black to try to get
White to play b2-b3 (see commen­
tary to Diagram 28 1 ).
When Black's QN is on a5, on
the other hand, his central attack
will normally follow the outlines
suggested by Diagram 282. I n
some cases, however, when Black
plays the advances . . . e7-e6 (or
. . . e7-e5) before exchanging the
b-pawns it can happen that White
 The Y ugoslav Centre

agrees to the total dissolution of further advance . . . f7-f5 after

his centre by capturing on e6 and which the central pawn structure
b5 (286). can take on some aspects remi­
niscent of the Petrosian centre.
286 Black will generally apply this
strategy when White's KN is on
d2 (as a result of the presence of
Black's knight on a5) as otherwise
White would be able to continue
along the lines shown in Diagram
70. Black's . . . f7-f5 advance is
normally prepared by moving the
C2Jf6 either to h5 or g4 (28 7).

This type of position (which can

also occur with Black's f-pawn on
e6 if he prefers that capture to . . .
�xe6) is dynamically in Black's
favour as his pawns give him better
control of the central squares,
although it is also true that White
may either find the right moment
to weaken Black's queenside
pawns with the advance b3-b4 or
exploit the weak d-pawn (and even If h2-h3 then Black will retreat
occasionally some weakness to h6 happy in the knowledge that
around Black's king's position) by his manoeuvre has caused a slight
C2Je4. One concrete effect of the weakening of White's kingside.
disappearance of White's d-pawn From White's point of view,
is to give Black's QN the chance although the closing of the centre
of getting back into play via c6. makes it easier for him to develop
the queenside (for example by b3
and � b2) he nevertheless has to
The c l osed c e n t re
do something about the
After the creation of a closed cen­ opponent's action on the kingside.
tre following . . . e7-e5 Black will This will usually take the form
generally tend to undertake oper­ (after . . . f7-f5) of chasing away
ations on the kingside with the the C2Jg4 by h2-h3 followed by

1 77
The Y ugoslav Centre

exf5 gxf5 and then f2-f4 (often 289

prepared by tZJc3-e2) (288).

288

White plays Ji.xg7 ri; xg7,

� c3 + and wins the black knight
Such a plan, however, is by no on a5 (290).
means automatic, given that Black
290
may be able to throw an anticipa­
tory . . . f5-f4 spanner in the works.

2 Tactical Ideas
Curiously, although the . Yugoslav
centre often lead to dynamic play
(especially when the centre has not
been closed), there are not that
many recurring tactical themes. It should be noted that even
were the tZJa5 protected by the
� d8, gaining control of the long
The a 1 -h8 d i a g o n a l a n d
diagonal represents a real gain for
B l a c k ' s v u l n e ra b l e tZJ a 5
White. If Black finds it necessary
Since White's Q B is almost always to protect the diagonal by . . t7-
.

developed on b2, he can often take f6 then White obtains an incon­

advantage of the diagonal a l -h8
(following the exchange of dark­
squared bishops) especially when
Black's QN is on the vulnerable
square a5. Let's see the basic form
of this theme (289).
testable advantage thanks both to
the possibility of pressurizing f6
(with a knight from either d5 or
e4, or even by the advance g3--g4-
g5) and the permanent weakening
of the e6 square.

1 78

White can even try simply to
capture the k night on a5. I t can
happen that White manages to
control the squares c6 and b7 (for
example with the �g2 or the d­
pa wn pi us 11 b 1 ) and can attack
the k night by �c3 and � a4 for
example.
B l a c k ' s exc h a n g e sa c r i f i ce
There are two basic forms of this
typical sacrifice. In the following
diagram we have a positional sac­
rifice where Black's aim is to create
a queenside pawn maj ority and
increase the vulnerability of Whi­
te's c-pawn (and of course also
gain control of the dark squares)
(29 1 ).
291
Black plays . . . 11 b4, after which
�xb4 cxb4 can lead to his queen­
side pawn maj ority becoming very
dangerous after . . . lb b7-c5 fol­
lowed by . . . a5-a4. In addition,
he can use the semi-open c-file
The Yugoslav Cen tre
to build up very strong pressure
against the c-pawn.
By contrast, the same exchange
sacrifice can take on a more
dynamic aspect when the centre is
open (292).
292
This position, which arises from
one of the most important lines of
the Yugoslav Variation, is crucial
for the evaluation of the conse­
quences of Black's dynamic
exchange sacrifice. Black plays . . .
11 xb2, � xb2 j_g7 (293)
. . . and the domination of the h8-
a 1 diagonal guarantees Black
sufficient dynamic compensation
for the exchange. Practice has
1 79
The Y ugoslav Centre
shown that the position is unclear
after either 'ii' a3 t2J xc4, or 'ii' c 1
t2Jg4, o r 'ii' c 2 t2Jxd5 (or . . . t2Jg4).
3 Illustrative game
Game 1 3
Browne-Timman
Wijk aan Zee 1 980
Yugoslav Variation
1 d4 t2Jf6
2 4J f3 g6
3 c4 Ji. g 7
4 g3 0-0
5 �g2 d6
6 t2Jc3
The move 6 0-0 is also possible
and would produce some slight
but distinct differences : after, for
example, 6 . . . c5 7 d5 Black can
contin ue with the gambit 7 . . . b5
following the basic model exam­
ined in Chapter 4 (for the sake of
thoroughness it should be
observed that a very similar idea
has been tried even after the text
move, e.g. 6 l2Jc3 c5 7 d5 a6 8 0-0
b5, but it was possible for White
to play 8 a4). A nother case is seen
in 6 . . . t2Jc6 7 d5 tZ.Ja5 8 t2Jfd2
c5 and White can over-protect c4
with 9 t2Ja3. These possibilities
are, however, rather rare in prac­
tice and normally, therefore, the
choice of this or that move
amounts to the same thing.
1 80
6 c5
Black has also tried 6 . . . �g4
7 0-0 'ii' c8 with the idea of thereby
preparing the advance . . . c7-c5,
e.g. 8 .U e 1 c5. The idea of this
continuation (in addition to the
obvious one of . . . �h3) is to
encourage White to close the cen­
tre in order to get rid of the
unpleasant central tension. The
most promising reply appears to
be 8 �g5 (intending to continue
with 9 �xf6 � xf6 1 0 l2Jd5), e.g.
8 . . . .U e8 9 'iWd2 t2J a6 10 e4 c5
1 1 d 5 tZ.Jc7 1 2 l:He I and White
stands slightly better.
It should be noted that this
variation would not be playable
after the move order 6 . . . c5 7
0-0 �g4 seeing as White could
continue advantageously with 8
dxc5 dxc5 9 t2Je5.
7 0-0
The most usual continuation.
The historically important alter­
native, though rarely seen now­
adays, is 7 d5, e.g. 7 . . . ti.J a6 8
0-0 l2Jc7 9 a4 .U b8 1 0 e4 (or 1 0
�f4 a 6 1 1 a5 b 5 1 2 axb6 .U xb6
1 3 b3 e5 14 dxe6 tZ.J xe6 with level
chances) 10 . . . a6 1 1 a5 t2Jd7 1 2
�f4 b6 1 3 axb6 .U xb6 1 4 .U a2
.U b4 1 5 'iW d 3 tZ:lb6 1 6 tZ:ld2 with
equality.
7 4J c6

More popular than 7 . . . cxd4 8
CZJ xd4 after which Black has tried
8 . . . "iW a5 and also tried to
improve the old gambit line 8 . . .
CZJc6 9 CZJxc6 bxc6 1 0 �.xc6 � b8.
8 d5
The closing of the centre establ­
ishes the Yugoslav centre.
8 dxc5 dxc5 was a very popular
continuation in its day, after which
the players' main aims in the strug­
gle for the initiative could be sum­
marized as follows : ( 1 ) the mutual
attacks against the c-pawns; (2) the
occupation of the squares d4 and
d5; (3) the uncovering of the K Bs
by the rapid moving of the KNs.
Notwithstanding the apparent
simplicity of this line, the game
often takes on a surprisingly tacti­
cal character.
8 CZJa5
9 CZJ d 2 (294)
As we have already pointed out,
this position can also be reached
The Y ugoslav Centre
via the Panno Variation.
Here, Black has no real interest
in attacking White's centre
immediately with 9 . . e6 since,
.
after an . . . exd5, cxd5 exchange,
the position of Black's QN would
be deprived of its raison d'etre, the
pressure against White's c-pawn.
This explains why Black normally
plays for . . . b7-b5 before co unter­
ing i n the centre.
A totally different strategy for
Black exists m completely
renouncing any counterplay
against White's centre and instead
pursuing play on the k ingside by
means of . . . e7-e5 followed by the
advance of the f-pawn. In this case
Black will provide a retreat square
for the QN by playing . . . b7-
b6. White will usually contest the
central space by playing e2-e4
followed by f2-f4, e.g. 9 . . e5 1 0
.
e4 (another possibility i s 1 0 a 3 b6
1 1 b4 CZJb7 1 2 CZJb3 CZJ g4 1 3 e4
f5 1 4 exf5 gxf5 1 5 � a2 e4 1 6 CZJe2
CZJe5 1 7 .:C: c2 with the idea of
continuing with CZJf4) 1 0 . . . tt:Jg4
1 1 h3 CZJh6 1 2 b3 f5 1 3 exf5 gxf5
1 4 j,b2 j,d7 1 5 'i!Wc2 b6 1 6 CZJe2
"iW c7 1 7 f4 � ae8 with roughly
balanced chances.
The two plans of attacki ng on
the queen's flank and attacking
on the kingside after closing the
centre can also be employed
together. For the most part, White
tends to deal with this mixture by
181
The Yugoslav Centre
answering Black's kingside action
with e2-e4 and f2-f4 and the que­
enside action with the manoeuvre
Ci:Jc3-d l -e3, e.g. 9 . . . a6 1 0 � c2
e5 1 1 b3 (of course 1 1 a3 is also
possible with the idea of b2-b4)
1 1 . . . tb g4 (or 1 1 . . . tb h5) 1 2 e4
f5 1 3 exf5 gxf5 1 4 .tb2 �d7 1 5
� ae 1 b5 1 6 Ci:J d 1 (White intends
playing h3, f4 and Ci:Je3) 1 6 . . . f4
with chances for both sides.
Finally, if Black mixes the two
plans by advancing on the flank
first, then White can also try giving
up his centre with the double cap­
ture on e6 and b5, e.g. 9 . . . a6 1 0
�c2 � b8 1 1 b 3 b 5 1 2 � b2 e5
13 dxe6 fxe6 (after 1 3 . . . �xe6 1 4
cxb5 axb5 1 5 Ci:J ce4 lZJxe4 1 6
Ci:Jxe4 �xb2 1 7 �xb2 the weak­
ness of both d6 and f6 is accentu­
ated) 1 4 cxb5 axb5 15 lZJ ce4 �b7
1 6 � ad 1 �e7 with mutual
chances.
9 a6
10 �c2
White protects his knight so as
to make b3 and �b2 possible.
Black could meet 10 a3 by 10 . . .
� c7 preventing b4 on account
of the pressure on c4. Another
possibility is to play 10 � b1 inte­
nding to challenge control of the
b-file after b3 followed by ..t b2-
a 1 , e.g. 10 . . . li b8 1 1 b3 b5 1 2
.tb2 bxc4 (an outlandish strategy
has been played with some sue-
1 82
cess : 1 2 . . . h 5 !? 1 3 �c2 h4 1 4 e4
bxc4 1 5 bxc4 e5 1 6 lZJe2 h3 1 7
.t h 1 lZJg4 etc.) 1 3 bxc4 e6 (or 1 3
. . . �h6 1 4 � a 1 with a complex
position) 1 4 � a 1 � b4 1 5 a3
� xb 1 1 6 � xb 1 with an edge for
White.
10 � b8
11 b3 b5
12 .t b2
The position after the text move
has been much analysed over the
years. White's basic idea is to
continue with � ae l , lZJd 1 , e4 and
tbe3, with �c3 in reserve if Black
tries to increase the pressure on
the b-file. Alternatively, if the b­
file is opened up quickly then the
idea we saw in the preceding note
of challenging by � ab 1 and .ta 1
is still valid.
Black tried j ust about every­
thing in this position until it was
established that the most promis­
ing continuation was to increase
the pressure on c4 by means of
. . . .th6 either before or after
exchanging b-pawns. The theory
of this line now extends well
beyond the twentieth move
12 bxc4
Several other moves have also
been played : 1 2 . . . .td7, 1 2 . . . e5
and 1 2 . . . e6 as well, of course, as
1 2 . . . .t h6.

13 bxc4 �h6 (295)
A commonly seen positiOn.
White cannot now play 14 e3?
because of 1 4 . . . �f5 ! 1 5 e4 �xd2
1 6 exf5 (after 1 6 lZ:ld 1 �d7 Black
wins the c-pawn) 1 6 . . . lZ:lxc4 and
the extra pawn sets Black on the
winning path.
The alternative to the continu­
ation we will see in the game is I 4
lZ:lcb I against which Black can
carry out a typical exchange sacri­
fice, e.g. I 4 . . . e5 I 5 �c3 �d7 I 6
lZ:la3 n b4!? I 7 �xb4 cxb4 I 8
lZ:l ab I 'Wic7 with compensation
for the material.
14 f4
This blocking move is the usual
continuation.
14 e5
The earliest form of the thematic
exchange sacrifice on b2 arose via
I 4 . . . lZ:lg4 1 5 tZJd 1 n xb2 1 6
'Wixb2 �g7; we will point out the
more refined version below.
The Y ugoslav Centre
15 dxe6
In former times the usual move
here was 1 5 n ae 1 which, how­
ever, gives rise to some combinat­
ive opportunities for Black, e.g. 1 5
. . . exf4 1 6 gxf4 lZ:l h5 1 7 e3 �g7
1 8 lZ:l d I �f5 and White is obliged
to accept a level game with 1 9
�e4 given the inadequacy o f both
19 'Wi c 1 ? �xb2 20 tt:Jxb2 'Wi f6
2 1 tt:Jd l ..td3 22 .l::r f2 tt:Jxc4 23
lZ:l xc4 n b 1 winning the queen,
and 1 9 e4?! .l::r xb2! 20 tt:J xb2
� d4 + 2 1 � h l 'i+' h4 22 'Wi d 3
� d7 23 lZ:l d l tt:Jxf4.
.i xe6
15
lZ:l d5
16
Practically forced.
16 �xd5
The most frequent continuation
consists of the improved version
of the thematic exchange sacrifice :
1 6 . . . .l::r xb2 (see Diagrams 292
and 293).
17 cxd5 tt:Jg4
Setting up not only a possible
fork on e3 but also the idea of
. . . .:C: xb2 followed by . . . �g7.
White's reply undoubtedly came
as a surprise to his opponent,
but in any case his position is
preferable, e.g. 1 7 . . . il.. g 7 1 8 �c3
.l::r fe8 19 e4.
1 83
The Y ugoslav Centre

18 C2J b3! ( 296) 28 ld: xa6

Although Black is the exchange

up his position is very tricky given
the weakness of the d-pawn and
the extreme passivity of his king­
side pieces.
28 g5?
An automatic attempt to reacti­
vate the KB which only makes
things worse. Black should have
A typical tactical exploitation of tried 28 . . . .id: b4 intending to meet
the black diagonals : 1 8 . . . C2Je3? 29 e3 by 29 . . . n xd4! 30 exd4
19 �c3 would give White a triple n d8 with chances of halving the
attack on h8, a5 and e3. point.
18 C2J xb3 29 fxg5 ..t xg5
19 axb3 � b6 30 ld: xd6 h5?!
20 � c3 c4 +
This does nothing to counter
21 <;t h 1 f6
White's natural plan of advancing
22 ..th3 C2J f2 +
the d-pawn.
Black j udges that this continu-
31 ld: c6 h4
ation offers better chances than
32 d6 ld: b 1 +
either 22 . . . � xb3 23 ..txg4
33 <;tg 2 ld: d 1
� xb2 24 ..te6 + <;th8 25 � xc4
34 e3 hxg3
or 22 . . . C2J e3 23 ..te6 + <;t h8 24
35 hxg3 ld: xd4
ld: f3 � xb3 25 ld: xe3 'Yi'xb2 26
ld: xa6 'Yi' b l + 27 <;tg2 ld: b3 28 Too late.
'Yi'd4.
36 exd4 f5
23 ld: xf2 'Yi' x f2 37 ..t xf5 ld: xf5
24 ..te6 + <;t h8 38 ld: c5 ld: xc5
25 � xc4 � b6 39 dxc5 <;t g7
26 ..td4 'Yi' xb3 40 c6
27 � xb3 ld: xb3 1 -0

1 84
10 The P a nno a nd
K a valek Centres
Main Line: Panno Variation
1 d4 t2Jf6 2 c4 g6 3 g3 Jl.g7 4
Jl.g2 d6 5 CZJf3 0-0 6 0-0 4:Jc6 7
CZJc3 a6 (297).
In this chapter we will also
examine the following : 1 d4 t2Jf6
2 c4 g6 3 g3 Jl.g7 4 Jl.g2 d6 5
CZJ f3 0-0 6 0-0 and now :
Panno Variation
6 . . . tbc6 7 CZJc3 i.g4 (or 7 . . .
Jl.f5)
Kavalek Variation
6 . . . c6 7 4:J c3 � aS (or 7 . . .
Jl.g4, or 7 . . . Jl.f5) 8 h3 (or 8
d5) 8 �,e6 9 d5
. . .
1 Strategic Ideas
Although the variations consid­
ered in this chapter are very
different from each other, we have
grouped them together because
they nevertheless share a common
characteristic : the omission of any
central advances by Black, at least
in the early part of the opening.
The basic idea of both the
Panno and Kavalek Variations is
to undertake queenside counter­
play (especially against c4) before
declaring their intentions in the
centre. In particular, Black hopes
by avoiding . . . e7-e5 that not only
will his position be more solid but
also that his KB will be more
potent on the long diagonal. Nat­
urally enough, Black reserves the
option of playing e7-e5 (or . . . c7-
c5 as in the Panno) at a convenient
or opportune moment.
I n this chapter we will concentr­
ate on the more individualistic
forms of the Pan no and Ka valek
Variations rather than those tend-
1 85
The Panno and Kavalek Cen tres

ing to produce similar types of ing control of b5 with the advance

centres to those already consid­ a2-a4. In this case Black's
ered in previous chapters. response will comprise of the fol­
lowing (299).
The P a n n o C e n t re

The characteristic plan of the

Panno Variation (see Diagram
297) is for Black to prepare the
advance . . . b7-b5 with . . . l::t a8-
b8, temporarily ignoring the ques­
tion of the centre (298).

In this kind of position we can

appreciate the chameleon nature
of the Panno Variation : according
to circumstances Black can react
with a Yugoslav type of strategy
with . . . 4.Ja5, b3 c5 (300) . . .

Essentially, the aim of this

action is to attack the undefended
c-pawn and confront White with
the problem that no matter how
he reacts he cannot avoid the
opening of lines on the queenside.
White has tried various different
ways of meeting Black's idea, and
we will now try to outline their
pros and cons.
. . . or discern i n the a-pawn's
advance the possi bility of creating
T h e stat i c m et h o d : t h e
an improved version of the Mar
a d v a n c e a 2-a4
del Plata centre by fixing White's
One way of containing Black's queenside pawns with . . . a5 and
queenside expansion is by regain- then playing . . . e5 i nviting d5

1 86

tiJe7 (30 1 ).
30/
In reality, such possibilities are
rarely seen in practice because
White does not often play a2--a4.
For our purposes, however, they
are useful for gaining a clearer
understanding of the essentially
mutable nature of the Panno Vari­
ation.
T h e d y n a m i c m et h od : t h e
c e n t ra l t h r ust
Another possible reaction by
White is to ignore the opponent's
queenside demonstration and con­
centrate his attention on the cen­
tre, assigning a major role to a
central thrust with his e-pawn.
This plan m ust, however, be pre­
pared with a prophylactic h2-h3,
as otherwise Black will pin the K N
by . . . �c8-g4 and then follow up
with . . . e7-e5 winning control of
d4. As White can only ignore the
attack on his c-pawn because of
the concrete threats created by
the advance of his e-pawn, any
The Panno and Kavalek Centres
analysis of the consequences of
this plan must take into account
the specific position of all the
pieces (302).
Whether Black decides to
exchange queens first or retreat
the k night immediately, he tends
in any case to oblige the opponent
to take a decision concerning the
e-pawn by retreating the k night to
d7 (e8 would obviously be too
passive). After . . . tiJd7 White gen­
erally resolves to contin ue with
the pawn sacrifice e6 which takes
on diverse aspects according to
whether or not the queens have
been exchanged.
From the above diagram, the
version with the exchange of
queens occurs after . . . dxe5, dxe5
'iW xd l , :t xd l CiJd7, e6 fxe6 (303).
In this well explored line White
hopes to be able to take advantage
of the temporary congestion of
Black's queenside pieces and
ragged pawn structure. As might
be expected, however, the
1 87
The Panno and K avalek Centres
exchange of the queens and relat­
ive symmetry of the pawns makes
Black's defensive task reasonably
easy.
In the second case, after . . .
tt:Jd7, e6 fxe6, White tries to
exploit the weakness of the light
squares in the opponent's camp
by means of d5 (304).
Black can play . . . exd5 given
that capturing the knight would
cost White his queen after
� xd5 + ?! e6!, � xc6? �b7. After
White recaptures with cxd5 he
obtains strategic compensation for
the sacrificed pawn : the c-pawn
has managed to sidestep the
1 88
opponent's pressure (thus avoid­
ing the opening of lines on t he
q ueenside) and fix the e6 and c6
squares which White can easily
pressurize by tt:Jf3-d4. In con­
trast, Black's position is often
sufficiently dynamic even to com­
pensate a possible loss of the
exchange from a fork on either e6
or c6. This variation occurs quite
frequently given that i t offers rich
possibilities for both players. I t
goes without saying that t h e above
lines illustrate only a few of the
possibilities deriving from White's
central thrust, but t hey are among
the most important.
C o nta i n m e n t fo l l ow i n g
c4x b 5
White has also met the problems
posed by the advance . . . b7-b5 in
a more positional way, namely by
capturing on b5, being content to
accept a slight inferiority of pawn
structure because of the com­
pensatory pressure obtained on
the c-file plus, most importantly,
the time gained to i nitiate mea­
sured action in the centre (305).
I n this kind of position White
will generally seek to gain central
space either by means of the thrust
e2-e4-e5, or the advance d4-d5
freeing the d4 square, or even
both together. The central pawn
majority ceded to Black by the

exchange of pawns can be con­
tained by pressure down the semi­
open c-file.
The other side of the coin is that
following the exchange cxb5 axb5
Black's queenside attack obtains
the concrete goal of corn bining
t he annoying advance . . . b5-b4
(which before the exchange was
not strategically attractive given
that the point of . . . b7-b5 is,
above all, to open lines) with the
posting of the Q B on a6, in
addition to the manoeuvre . . .
l2Jc6-a5-c4 (with the aim of enco­
uraging b2-b3, the reason for
which will become clear in the
commentary to Diagram 306). On
account of t his, White might
decide to delay the capture on b5
for a few moves by protecting c4
with l2Jf3 -d2. Thus, to summar­
ize, we have two possibilities :
either White can capture on b5
immediately, following the
advance . . . b7-b5, or delay it for
a few moves.
The Panno and K avalek Centres
In the first case, the game takes
on different characteristics accord­
ing to whether White develops his
QB in fianchetto or on i ts original
diagonal (306).
306
When White fianchettoes the
QB Black's correct response is to
gain space with . . . b5-b4. This
gives him the new possibilities of
attacking White's a-pawn and pre­
ssurizing the weak c3 square, q uite
possibly by . . . l2Jc6-a7-b5, which
would also remove the k night
from its precarious position on
c6 and restore mobility to the c­
pa wn. I t would be less logical to
play the QN to a5 after the
advance . . . b5-b4 given that c4 is
protected and the k night would be
in the way of potential pressure
down the a-file. But be careful : if
Black plays . . . l2Jc6-a7 before . . .
b5-b4 then White can cut it out
of the game by playing b2/b3-b4
himself.
Al terna ti vel y, when White
exchanges on b5 and then
1 89
The Panno and Kavalek Centres

develops his QB on its original

diagonal he will usually place it
on e3 after the advances h2 - h 3
a n d e2-e4 (30 7).

307

T h e Kava l ek Cent re

After the characteristic sortie of

the black queen to a5 in the Kava­
lek Variation, Black can seek to
solve the problem of the centre
Here Black's queenside counter­ differently to the normal solution
play is based around the occu­ of playing . . . e7-e5 (see Chapter
pation of c4, the advance . . . b5- 8) (309).
b4, and the control of the a6-fl
diagonal.
Finally, as we have said, White
can delay the capture on b5 for a
few moves by protecting it with
the retreat t2Jf3-d2. In this case
in order both not to obstruct the
bishop on c 1 and to protect the d­
pawn, White must develop the
bishop on e3. But since it is neces­
sary to play h2-h3 so as to avoid
. . . t2Jf6-g4 White does not have In this position White normally
time to play e2-e4 (308). plays h2-h3, a move which almost
To get White to capture on b5 always constitutes a useful and
Black must play . . . t2J a5, produc­ necessary prelude to the advance
ing, after cxb5 axb5, b4 t2Jc4, e2-e4. As an alternative to . . .
t2Jxc4 bxc4, b5 d5, a complex e7-e5 Black can then play the
position with chances for both provocative . . . ..te6, inviting the
sides. opponent to play d5. White can

1 90

indeed carry out this advance as
unless Black is willing to hazard
the uncertainties (following d5
cxd5, ct:Jd4) of . . . dxc4, jL xb7 he
must return the pawn with . . .
jL d7, cxd5. This, however, is in
fact Black's idea, given that the
centre has now taken on a definite
form which permits him to lay far
reaching plans (3 1 0).
This structure can also arise
from other lines in either the
Panno or Kavalek Variations.
As a result of the advance d4-
d5, Black makes some precise
dynamic/strategic gains : the open
c-file, the possibility of using the
squares e5, c5 and c4, in addition
to the opening of the long black
diagonal and the obstruction of its
white counterpart. Here, as in the
Panno centre, Black hopes that
the avoidance of . . . e7-e5 will
prove useful to the solidity of his
position.
For his part, White obtains a
definite space advantage in the
The Panno and Kavalek Centres
centre which he can try to make
use of either by seeking to break
thro ugh with e2-e4--e5 (supported
if necessary by f2- f4) or by trying
to exert pressure on the q ueenside.
In subsequent developments both
players will use some thematic
manoeuvres.
The t h e m a t i c m a n o e u v res
Black tends to occupy the c-file
rapidly with his KR ( . . . l::t fc8) so
as to allow a possible retreat of
the q ueen to d8 without disrupting
the rooks. The QN will usually be
directed to c5 (sometimes after the
safeguarding advance . . . a 7 -a5)
whereas the KN will head for e5
and c4 via d 7 after Black has
tucked his QB away by . . . jLd7-
e8 (3 1 1 ).
In order to make headway on
the c-file Black needs not only
to double his rooks but also to
remove White's obs tructive QN
1 91
The Panno and K avalek Centres

which he will try to accomplish can prove very useful both for
either with the typical manoeuvre turning the tables on the c-file and
. . . ttJc5--a4 or by the advance of supporting the central break­
the b-pawn. I n an ending, Black through.
will sometimes be ready to make
the capture . . . �g7xc3 if White
C o m m o n i d ea s in t h e
is obliged to weaken his structure
Pa n n o a n d K a va l e k
by recapturing with the pawn.
Va r i at i o ns
White's play pivots around the
d4 square, which he will often first Finally, we bring to the reader's
use as a transit square for the KN attention two ideas in the opening
in order to drive off Black's queen which Black can implement, in
( ttJf3 -d4-b3) and then occupy both the Panno and Kavalek Vari­
with his QB ( � c l -e3-d4) from ations, before the central position
where it both neutralizes its has clarified. The first requires the
counterpart and supports a poss­ development of Black's QB on f5
ible e4-e5 break through. In (3 1 3).
addition, the placing of the Q B on
the g l -a7 diagonal and/or the
pressure deriving from ttJ b3-a5
can produce real problems for
Black especially in an ending. Last,
but by no means least, White can
seek to gain control of the diag­
onal h 3-c8 by playing h3-h4 fol­
lowed by �g2-h3 (3 1 2).

This placement, which can also

occur in the Panno Variation, is
useful both for trying to exchange
White's KB by . . . � d8-d7 and
. . . �f5-h3 and gaining control of
e4 by means of . . . ttJf6-e4xc3
followed by . . . �f5-e4.
The second idea is prepared by
. . . �c8-g4 (3 1 4).
This new alignment of the KB This placement, which can also

1 92

occur in the Kavalek Variation,
aims to diminish White's control
of d4 (and e5) by means of . . .
� g4xf3. Consequently, this sim­
plifying manoeuvre is generally a
prelude to the advance . . . e7-e5.
2 Tact ical Ideas
Although there are no recurring
tactical themes in the Ka valek
centre, it is possible to isolate some
themes in the Panno centre based
on the fact that Black's QN is
unprotected after the advance . . .
b7-b5.
The d i scove red att a c k on
the c-fi le
An extremely simple theme which
invariably arises when White cap­
tures on b5 and then occupies the
c-file (3 1 5).
The threat is tt:Jc3xb5 winning
The Panno and K avalek Centres
a pawn. Given its transparency,
this theme rarely actually occurs
but nevertheless the way that the
black knight is exposed on the
c-file is an element which must
constantly be borne in mind, as
we will see in the following theme.
The i n d i rect d efence of t h e
e- pawn
When White combines the capture
cxb5 with the advance e2-e4 he
sets a li ttle trap based on the
unprotected position of Black's
QN (3 1 6).
19 3
The Panno and Kavalek Centres

It seems that after . . . b4 Black White plays cxb5 axb5, tt:Jg5

wins the e-pawn but in fact White
has everything under control, e.g.
lZJe2 lZJ xe4?, � c2 (3 1 7) . . .
simultaneously threatening i. xc6
and e6. Black can, however, reply
by sacrificing the tt:Jc6 : . . . dxe5,
i.xc6 exd4. The idea is that after
tt:Je2 h6, lZJf3 e5 the piece is
compensated by the central pawn
mass, w hereas after lZJxb5 ti. b6,
tt:Jxd4 4Jb8! (3 1 9).

. . . and White wms one of the

knights.

The d i sc ove red att a c k on

t h e h 1 -a8 d i a g o n a l and t h e
. . . Black regains the piece and
sa c r i f i ce o f t h e tt:Jc6 material equality. In this line, how­
This discovered attack can only ever, in place of lZJ xd4 the move
really hope to be effective when tt:Ja 7 deserves attention.
combined with the central
breakthrough. Only in this case
can White create a threat by mov­
3 Illustrative game
ing his KN (3 1 8 ).
Game 1 4
318 Ribli-Adorjan
Budapest 1 9 79
Panno Variation

1 c4 g6
2 d4 tt:J f6
3 tt:Jf3 i.g7
4 g3 0-0
5 i. g2 d6
6 0-0 lZJ c6

1 94

The characteristic move of the
relatively modern Panno Vari­
ation which, as we saw in the
preceding chapter (see commen­
tary to Diagram 277), can trans­
pose to the Yugoslav Variation.
Excluding the Orthodox System
(6 . . . t2J bd7 followed by . . . e5)
and the Yugoslav Variation (6 . . .
c5) the principal alternative to the
text move is the Kavalek Vari­
ation : 6 . . . c6. The latter advance
normally prepares to answer 7
tb c3 with 7 . . . � a 5 but the
position is still sufficiently unex­
plored for Black to be able to
strike out in new directions.
Amongst the alternatives to . . .
� a5 we can note the following :
( 1 ) the queenside counter by . . .
a6 and . . . b5; (2) the simplifying
manoeuvre . . . i..g4xf3 followed
by . . . e5; (3) the dual purpose . . .
i.. f5, aiming either to exchange
White's fianchettoed bishop by . . .
� d 7 and . . . i.. h 3 or simply to
occupy e4. Here is one example of
this latter possibility : 6 . . . c6 7
tbc3 i.. f5 8 b3 (8 ttJe 1 'iY c8 9
'iY b3 ttJa6 1 0 e4 i.. e 6 1 1 a4 l::t b8
12 tbf3 i.. h 3 1 3 l::t e 1 i.. x g2 1 4
c;t;xg2 giving White a clear advan­
tage has also been played but 8 . . .
e5 is much more logical, e.g. 9 d5
a5 10 e4 i..g4 1 1 f3 �b6 + 1 2
c;t; h 1 i.. d 7 1 3 'iY e2 cxd5 1 4 cxd5
l::t c8 with only a slight advantage
to White) 8 . . . ttJ e4 9 i.. b2 ttJ xc3
The Panno and K avalek Centres
1 0 i.. xc3 i..e4 1 1 �d2 ttJd7 1 2
�e3 d 5 1 3 i..h 3 i.. xf3 1 4 � xf3
e6 1 5 e4 and White is a little more
comfortable.
In the Kavalek Variation after
6 . . . c6 7 ttJc3 �a5 8 h3, Black
can continue with 8 . . . e5 which
often produces an Orthodox Sys­
tem (see Chapter 8), but normally
brings about the Kavalek centre
by playing 8 . . . i.. e 6, e.g. 9 d 5
cxd5 (9 . . . i.. d 7 h a s also been
played, e.g. 1 0 e4 l::t e8 1 1 l::t e 1
cxd 5 1 2 cxd5 ttJ a6 1 3 e5 with a
complex game) 1 0 ttJd4 J.. d 7 (the
sacrificial line 10 . . . dxc4!? is inter­
esting, e.g. 1 1 �xb7 t2J bd 7 1 2
ttJxe6 fxe6 1 3 .txa8 l::t xa8 and
it seems that Black has sufficient
compensation for the exchange)
1 1 cxd5 (White has experimented
with 1 1 ttJ b3 in an attempt to
prevent Black carrying out the
thematic manoeuvre . . . l::t fc8 and
. . . �d8, e.g. 1 1 . . . 't\V b4 1 2 cxd5
i.. a4 1 3 � d4 � xd4 14 ttJ xd4
i.. d7 1 5 i.. e 3 ttJ a6 1 6 ll ac 1
.tt fc8 1 7 ttJb3 ii.. e 8 with equality)
1 1 . . . l::t c8 1 2 i.. e 3 (both 1 2 ttJ b3
and 1 2 e4 have also been played)
1 2 . . . ttJ a6 1 3 �d2 with approxi­
mately balanced chances.
7 ttJc3
It should be observed that
should White try to transpose to
the Yugoslav Variation at this
point by playing 7 d 5 ttJa5 8
1 95
The Panno and K a valek Centres
lZ'lfd2 (expecting 8 . . . c5), Black
can in fact force the creation of
the Ka valek centre : 8 . . . c6 9 lZJ c3
cxd5 10 cxd5 ..td7 with equality.
7 a6
This preparation for the the­
matic advance . . . b7-b5 is by far
the most important line in the
Panno Variation. However, as in
our observatio n above concerning
the Kavalek Variation, this pos­
ition is also sufficiently unexplored
to enable Black to seek new paths.
We note the following possibilit­
ies : the immediate 7 . . . e 5 (for
which see the note to White's sev­
enth move in Game 1 2); the simpli­
fying manoeuvre . . . .tg4xf3 fol­
lowed by . . . e5; the development
. . . J.J5 followed by . . . lZJe4 or
by . . . ifc8. Examples of the last
two lines :
( 1 ) 7 . . . .tg4 8 h 3 (naturally 8
d5 lZJ a 5 9 lZJd2 c5 is also possible
transposing to a type of Yugoslav
centre) 8 . . . .i.xf3 9 .txf3 lZJd7
10 e3 e5 1 1 d5 lZJe7 1 2 e4 f5
bringing about a kind of Mar del
Plata centre.
(2) 7 . . . ..t f5 8 b3 (or 8 lZJ e 1
� c 8 9 e 4 ..t h 3 1 0 lZ'lc2 ..txg2 1 1
�xg2 e5 1 2 d 5 lZJe7 again with
transposition to a type of Mar del
Plata centre) 8 . . . lZ'le4 9 .t b2
lZJ xc3 1 0 ..t xc3 lZJe4 1 1 l:. c 1 d 5
w i t h roughly level chances.
1 96
These variations demonstrate
the chameleon nature of the
Panno Variation very well.
8 b3 (320)
The q ueenside fianchetto
almost always presages the imple­
mentation of the plan of contain­
ment given that White will soon
be ready to place h is Q R on c l
after the exchange cxb5. Apart
from the static method (i.e. pre­
venting . . . b7-b5 with a2-a4),
which is no longer much
employed, we will take a brief
look at the most frequently seen
alternatives to the text move.
Containment method: 8 h3 1:.1 b8
and now :
( 1 ) 9 e4 b5 (or 9 . . lZJd7 1 0
.
.te3 lZJ a5 1 1 b 3 b 5 1 2 cxb5 axb5
with approximate equality) 1 0
cxb5 axb5 1 1 .i.e3 b4 ( 1 1 . . . lZJa5
and 1 1 . . . .i.d 7 have also been
played) 1 2 lZJe2 and Black must
not fall for the trap 1 2 . . . lZJxe4?

1 3 � c2 and White wins a piece.
(2) 9 �e3 b5 1 0 ttJd2 �d7 (or
10 . . . �b7 1 1 cxb5 axb5 12 ttJxb5
ttJa5 with a complicated game) 1 1
;a c 1 ttJa5 (or 1 1 . . e5 1 2 dxe5
. B
ttJ xe5 1 3 cxb5 axb5 1 4 b3 with
some advantage to White) 1 2 cxb5
axb5 1 3 b4 ttJc4 14 ttJxc4 bxc4
1 5 b5 d5 with a difficult game
perhaps somewhat in White's fav-
our.
Dynamic method: 8 h 3 ;a b8 9
e4 b5 1 0 e5 and now :
( 1 ) 1 0 . . . ttJ d 7 1 1 e6 (or 1 1 cxb5
axb5 1 2 ttJg5 dxe5 1 3 Ji.xc6 exd4
14 ttJxb5 ;a b6, see Diagram 3 1 9)
1 1 . . . fxe6 1 2 d5 exd5 1 3 cxd5 (not
1 3 'ii' xd5 + ?! e6! 14 � xc6? � b 7
winning the queen) 1 3 . . . tZJ a 5 ( 1 3
. . . ttJ a7 has also been tried) 1 4
Cbd4 Cbe5 1 5 b4 tZJ ac4 1 6 f4 c5
(or 16 . . . ttJf7 1 7 ttJ c6 �e8 1 8
ttJ xb8 �f5 1 9 ;a f3 � xb8 with
complications) 1 7 dxc6 ttJxc6 1 8
ttJ xc6 'ii' b6 + 1 9 � h 2 �xc3
with chances for both sides.
(2) 10 . . . dxe5 1 1 dxe5 � xd 1
1 2 ;a xd l tZJd7 1 3 e6 fxe6 1 4 cxb5
axb5 and in this approximately
equal position White has directed
his attention towards the moves
1 5 �f4 and 1 5 �e3.
I t should be noted that in Diag­
ram 320 White has also experim­
ented with the less usual moves 8
Cb d 5 and 8 �d2.
8 ;a b8
9 .i b2 b5
T h e P a n n o and Kavalek Centres
10 cxb5 axb5
11 ;a c t (32 1 )
321
The normal continuation.
Before this game, Black generally
met the threat of ttJxb5 by playing
1 1 . . . tZJa5 but this tends to leave
the knight somewhat out of play,
e.g. 1 2 'ii' c 2 b4 ( 1 2 . . . � b7 and
1 2 . . . ttJ d7 are also playable) 1 3
tZJ b l c6 1 4 e4 tZJe8 1 5 ttJ bd2
tZJc7 16 ;a fd 1 ttJ b5 1 7 tZJfl � b6
1 8 ttJ e3 and White's position is
better centralized. For the first
time, Adorj an demonstrates
Black's correct strategy of . . . b4
followed by . . . ttJa7 intending
. . . ttJ b5. Note, however, that it
would be a mistake to play . . .
tZJ a7 before the advance . . . b4 on
account of b4 by White himself. I t
seems logical to try 1 1 d5 but
this would simultaneously make
White's central pawns static and
enhance the dynamism of the
opponent's, e.g. 1 1 . . . ttJa5 ( 1 1 . . .
tZJ a7 1 2 b4 is somewhat in White's
favour) 1 2 ttJd4 ( 1 2 ;a c t e6 is a
1 97
The Panno and K avalek Centres

bit awkward for White) 1 2 . . . b4 16 �d2 tt:Jdc3

1 3 tt:J a4 e5 and Black has little to
The occupation of c3 also
worry about. This line also shows
underlines the weakness of the a­
the lack of good retreat squares for
pawn.
the QN and the possible danger of
it being locked out of play on a4. 17 e3 tt:J xa2
This reveals another aspect of the
White was threatening 1 8 a4.
text move in that a possible tt:J b 1
retreat would cause less i nter­ 18 l:t a 1 ttJ bc3
ference to W hite's development. 19 .ixc3

11 b4 Nor are the alternatives any

12 tt:J b 1 tt:Ja7 better, e.g. 1 9 ..txc6 d 5 20 tt:Je5
13 tt:Jbd2? � c7 2 1 .i.a4 tt:J xa4 22 l:t xa2
tt:Jc3 or 19 tt:Jd3 � c7 20 tt:J xb4
A natural but bad move which l:t xb4 2 1 ..txc3 tt:Jxc3 22 � xc3
accentuates the weakness of the c3 c5 with clear advantage in both
square. Subsequently an improve­ cases.
ment was found in the manoeuvre
tt:J f3-e 1 -d3, leaving the QN to 19 tt:J xc3
guard the c3 square. 20 tt:Ja5 c5!

13 c6 A correct exchange sacrifice

given Black's strong bishop pair
Black has another promising and extra pawn.
continuation at this point in 1 3 . . .
tt:Jb5 1 4 e4 (or 1 4 tt:Je 1 .tb7 1 5 21 tt:Jc6 � c7
e4 l:t a8 with advantage) 1 4 . . . 22 tt:J xb8 jt' xb8
tt:Jd7 1 5 tt:J c4 c5 with a preferable 23 l:t a8 jt' b6
position. 24 tt:Jc2 ..i e6
25 l:t xfB + � xfB
14 tt:Je1 tt:Jd5! 26 l:t a1 J.. f6
27 dxc5?!
With the convergence of the
black knights on c3 the drawbacks White's last hope was probably
of White's thirteenth become clear; 27 e4 (threatening 28 � h6 + ) 27
1 5 e4 tt:Jc3 1 6 .t xc3 bxc3 1 7 tt:J c4 . . . �g7 28 d 5 .td7 although
tt:J b 5 would now be advantageous it would in any case have been
to Black. difficult for White to survive.

15 tt:Jc4 tt:J b5 27 dxc5

1 98
 The Panno and Kavalek Cen tres

28 e4 �g7 30 'ii e3 .t xb3

29 .!:t e 1 1lt' d6! (322) 31 e5
Or 3 1 tt:Ja 1 .td4 etc.
31 J.. xe5
32 tt:J a 1
There is no stopping the b-pawn
after 32 'ii xe5 + 'ii xe5 33 .!:t xe5
.txc2 34 .!:t xc5 b3.
32 J.. d 4
33 � xe7 � xe7
34 .!:t xe7 j_e6
An almost symbolic conclusion 35 tt:Jc2 b3
for a Panno variation : the decisive 36 tt:Je3 tt:J d 1
text move can only be made 37 � fl tt:J xf2
thanks to Black's unmoved e­ 38 �e2 tt:J g4
pawn! Despite the advantage of 39 .!:t b7 tt:J xh2
the exchange White can do 40 �d3 tt:J g4
nothing in the face of Black's 41 tt:J b5 j_e5
crushing queenside initiative. 0- 1

1 99
 Ta ble of Va riations
This is a rather special table of
variations, for which some expla­
nation will be helpful.
On the left-hand side we have
given the variations in their tra­
diti onal divisions, sub-divided into
minor variations. While these
minor variations may be grouped
here under one main variation,
they will often be found in differ­
ent chapters, according to their
common type of centre.
The first percentage column
gives victories for Whi te, draws,
200
and wins for Black, in that order.
(As these statistics have in
some cases been compiled from
�
additional related variations to
those alongside which the figures
appear, they are meant as no more
than a useful guide.) The next
column gives the level of complex­
ity of the variation from the point
of view of strategy first, tactics
second. The scale ranges from one
to five. Finally there comes the
percentage frequency with which
the variations are played.